Aecom Avenue Arch SD 2013.07.29

29 July 2013
Avenue Phase 2
Avenue - Phase 2
Outline Specification Architecture
100% Schematic Design
29 July 2013
Specification
Specification
Prepared for
Meraas Holding
Prepared by
AECOM Middle East Limited

PO Box 43266, Abu Dhabi
United Arab Emirates
www.aecom.com
29 July 2013
AECOM
The information contained in this document produced by AECOM Middle East Limited is solely
for the use of the Client identified on the cover sheet for the purpose for which it has been
prepared and AECOM Middle East Limited undertakes no duty to or accepts any responsibility
to any third party who may rely upon this document.
All rights reserved. No section or element of this document may be removed from this
document, reproduced, electronically stored or transmitted in any form without the written
permission of AECOM Middle East Limited.
Quality Information
Document
Outline Specification - Architecture
Ref
ADH-AP2-ARC-SPC-00003-1
Date
29 July 2013
Prepared by
Ratnavelupillai Mayooranathan
Reviewed by
Rolando Cordova
Revision History
Authorised
Revision
Revision Date
Details
Name/Position
29/07/2013
Anthony Ray
Signature
Avenue - Phase 2
Table of Contents
034500 - Precast Architectural Concrete
034900 - Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Concrete
035300 - Concrete Topping
042000 - Unit Masonry
042113 - Brick Masonry
044200 - Exterior Stone Cladding
055000 - Metal Fabrications
055200 - Metal Railings
072100 - Thermal Insulation
072400 - Exterior Insulation And Finish System (Eifs)
074113 - Metal Roof Panels
074200 - Wall Panels
074213 - Metal Wall Panels
075400 - Membrane Roofing
079200 - Joint Sealants
081110 - Metal Doors And Frames
081416 - Wood Doors
083200 - Glass Doors
084413 - Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls
086200 - Unit Skylights
087100 - Door Hardware
088000 Glazing
089000 - Louvers And Vents
093000 Tiling
093033 - Stone Tiling
099100 Painting
107316 Canopies
Appendix A Technical Reference Sheet
Architectural Outline Specification

29/07/2013
AECOM Middle East

Table of Contents
Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 034500 PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1
1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
PRODUCT SELECTION
DESIGN CRITERIA
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
MATERIALS
ACCESSORIES
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
FINISHES

29/07/2013
2
2
3
6
9
10
11
034500
AECOM Middle East

Precast Architectural Concrete
Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 034500 PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
Performance Specified Work

1.
Supply, deliver, install and warrant the work in strict compliance with the materials and
workmanship requirements of the Specification.
2.
Where required to prepare Shop Drawings, these shall be limited to final detailing of
components, systems and other required elements indicated on the Design Drawings, necessary
to demonstrate their safe installation.
3.
Where products are offered by the Contractor for acceptance by the Engineer, provide full
supporting documentation in respect of the complete system or installation.
Work Section Includes

1.
C.
1.2
Architectural precast concrete cladding with necessay accessories.
Drawing Description References: Reference codes and accompanying descriptions are contained in
the Technical Reference Sheet (TRS) and identify systems/ components/ products indicated on the
Design Drawings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Contractor's Qualifications
1.
A specialist, who has at least 10 years' successful experience in performing similar work.
2.
Certification to ISO 9001 or operates a similar quality system acceptable to the Engineer.
3.
A precast concrete installer qualified and designated by PCI's Certificate of Compliance to install
Category A (Architectural Systems) for non-load or S2 (Complex Structural Systems) for
load-bearing members.
4.
A precast concrete installer who has retained a "PCI-Certified Site Auditor" to conduct a Site
audit of a project in the same category as this Project before installation of precast concrete and
who can produce an Installers' Post-Audit Declaration.
5.
Fabricator Qualifications: A firm that assumes responsibility for engineering architectural precast
concrete units in accordance with performance requirements. This responsibility includes the
preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified
professional engineer.
a)
6.
B.
Participates in PCI's plant certification program and is designated a PCI-certified plant for
Group A, Category A1 - Architectural Cladding and Load-Bearing Units or participates in
APA's "Plant Certification Program for Production of Architectural Precast Concrete
Products" and is designated an APA-certified plant.
Operatives must have service or repair facilities not more than 2 hours from the Site.
Off Site Testing

1.
The Contractor may provide data from previous independently certified tests to demonstrate that
the Contractor's proposed systems meet the performance requirements of the Specification. The
information shall be to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.
2.
If suitable data to demonstrate compliance with the performance requirements is not available,
provide prototypes of each type and have them independently tested in accordance with the
testing criteria indicated in the Specification.
3.
Independently certified test data, as applicable, shall include static and dynamic results and
Agrment certificates.
4.
Submit to the Engineer test certificates to confirm compatibility of the sealant used with all
substrate materials. These certificates shall relate to tests carried out by the sealant
manufacturer.
5.
Testing of Fastening:
a)
As the panels are manufactured, the Contractor shall arrange for testing of the primary
brackets and fastening to be carried out to selected panels to confirm compliance with the
Specification and the requirements of Local Building Regulations.
b)
1 in every 5 panels manufactured shall have their fastenings subjected to pull-out and shear
testing.
c)
The primary fastenings shall be subjected to test loading of design load times a factor of 1.1
for both pull-out and shear. The direction of the test loads shall be consistent with the
design principles and shall allow for the most onerous design conditions.
d)
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review proposals for these tests, which shall
be suitably modified to allow for the primary bracket design.
e)
The Contractor shall arrange for Test Reports to be produced at appropriate intervals by the
Independent Testing Authority and submitted to the Engineer for review. If any of the
fastenings show a displacement of more than 0.1mm, this shall be brought to the attention
of the Engineer immediately.

29/07/2013
034500 / 1
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
f)
C.
Depending on the initial test results, the frequency of testing may be reviewed and modified
with prior agreement.
Results and Certificates

1.
Tests and inspection results shall be submitted immediately they are available.
2.
Maintain, until the end of the defects liability period, records of all inspections and tests
performed, material certification, inspection and test plans, drawings and any other
documentation to substantiate conformity with the Specification, including those carried out by
Subcontractors.
3.
The records shall be stored in such a way that they are identifiable to the component to which
they refer and are retrievable.
4.
The records shall be available for inspection by the Engineer and copies of records shall be
given to the Engineer upon request. At the end of the defects liability period they shall be
submitted to the Engineer.
D.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C1077 and ASTM E329 for testing indicated.
E.
Design Standards: In accordance with American Concrete Institute (ACI) 318 "Building Code
Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary"/ 318M "Metric Building Code Requirements
for Structural Concrete and Commentary" and design recommendations of Precast/ Prestressed
Concrete Institute (PCI) MNL 120, "PCI Design Handbook - Precast and Pre-stressed Concrete,"
applicable to types of architectural precast concrete units indicated.
F.
Quality Control Standard: For manufacturing procedures and testing requirements, quality control
recommendations and dimensional tolerances for types of units required, in accordance with PCI MNL
117S, "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast and Prestressed
Concrete Products."
G.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to American Welding Society (AWS) D1.1/
D.1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel"; and AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing
Steel."
H.
Calculated Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide architectural precast

concrete units whose fire resistance has been calculated according to ACI 216.1/ TMS 0216.1,
"Standard Method for Determining Fire Resistance of Concrete and Masonry Construction
Assemblies," or PCI MNL 124, "Design for Fire Resistance of Precast Prestressed Concrete," and is
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
I.
Mock-ups
1.
Provide mock-ups for each type, of size required to demonstrate all materials selected and
workmanship, to Engineer's acceptance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION
A.
Source of Supply: Obtain products for each item from a single manufacturer.
B.
Type EWS-417, EWS-418, EWS-419, EWS-420 Architectural Concrete Panel Cladding

1.
Manufacturers: Rieder Smart Elements GMBH or acceptable equivalent.
2.
Panel Types
a)
b)
c)
d)
2.2
Type EWS-417 Standard Panel Cladding

1.
Description: Fiber reinforced panels in various colours and finishes.
2.
Product Reference: Fiber C or acceptable equivalent.
Type EWS-418 Architectural Concrete Panel Cladding

1.
Description: Bespoke cladding panels with various patterns and finishes.
2.
Product Reference: Fiber C Design+ or or acceptable equivalent.

1.
Description: Concrete panels with 3-dimensional cladding elements with faced

concrete quality on both sides. Each element with a uniform and non-seperable unit for
a monolithic appearance.
2.
Product Reference: Fiber C 3D facade or acceptable equivalent.

1.
Description: Fiber reinforced concrete panels with specific surface appearance typical
for concrete.
2.
Product Reference: ko Skin or acceptable equivalent.
DESIGN CRITERIA
A.
The Work shall oversail the slab edge and be either fastened to the primary structure or secondary
support structure.

29/07/2013
034500 / 2
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
B.
Joints shall align and continue through interfacing EWS types. Visually open, recessed horizontal and
vertical joints between units shall be uniform and equal to a nominal width as indicated on the Design
Drawings.
C.
All support systems shall be of adequate thickness and strength to meet the structural requirements
and eliminate risk of distortion in finished surfaces.
D.
Secondary Support
1.
Support shall be configured as indicated on the Design Drawings, suitably fastened back to the
primary structure in methods acceptable to the Engineer. Where secondary support is required
and visible and not indicated as part of the Engineer's Design, provide details at Tender.
Acceptance from the Engineer is required in terms of appearance.
2.
Mild steel secondary support members shall be fabricated and protected against corrosion in
accordance with the Structural Engineer's requirements:
a)
If visible it shall be finished with PVDF, color to the Engineer's acceptance.
b)
All joints, as necessary with regard to visual intent, shall be welded and ground smooth.
Protective coatings, where specified, and the associated finish to the joints shall be to the
same standard as the main assemblies.
E.
Dimensions are deemed to be nominal but indicative to the Design Intent. The Contractor shall
maintain these dimensions and clearly state them on the Shop Drawings; deviations to these shall be
stated with the Tender.
F.
Materials used for fastening shall be stainless steel grade Grade 304 for internal use and grade Grade
316 for external use of suitable design and strength to suit application. Fastenings shall be concealed
or inconspicuous to the acceptance of the Engineer.
G.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of all supports for the precast concrete paneling.
For the design of the primary structure refer to the Structural Specification.
H.
Provide all necessary waterproofing membranes at openings and interfaces with adjoining trades.
Membranes shall be compatible with adjoining trades. The Contractor shall liaise with the appropriate
Subcontractor to ensure a fully waterproof integration is achieved.
I.
The Contractor shall undertake the Detailed Design and provide copings and cappings to parapets, to
nominal sizes and profiles as indicated on the Design Drawings.
J.
Agree with the Engineer the period during which the sealant shall not change in appearance or color.
Any discoloration of sealant during this time shall not be acceptable.
K.
Sealant performance shall be verified by provision of current independent test certificates.
2.3
A.
B.
General
1.
Precast concrete assemblies shall comply with performance requirements without failure due to
defective manufacture, fabrication, installation or other defects in construction.
2.
Provide panel frames and connections to accommodate deflections and other building
movements.
3.
Provide panel frames that transfer window loads to building structure.
Structural Performance Requirements

1.
Provide panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads and stresses
within limits and under conditions indicated, based on testing in accordance with ASTM E1592/
ASTM E330:
a)
2.
3.
4.
Wind Loads: Determine loads based on the following minimum design wind pressures:
1.
Design Wind Pressures: Refer to the Structural Specification.
2.
Uniform pressure of 957Pa/ 1436Pa, acting inward or outward.
3.
Uniform pressure as indicated on the Design Drawings.
Wind Loads:
a)
Wind loading shall be accommodated safely, without detriment to the overall design,
structural integrity and performance of the work.
b)
Calculated pressure loads shall include the effect of internal air pressures within the
building, taking into account the presence of significant openings, which might arise
occasionally within the building enclosure.
c)
The wind loading must be factored into the fixing of the fastening and the distances of the
subconstruction. In the load case wind suction, a difference must be made between the
normal- and edge area of the cladding.
Specific Movements:
a)
The work shall withstand all movement of the structure under all design loads or
combination of loads without damage or reduction in performance.
b)
Expansion and movement joints shall accommodate the appropriate range of movement.
Specific Dead Loads:

29/07/2013
034500 / 3
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
5.
a)
The work shall accommodate its own dead loading without causing deflections or
movements which adversely affect the system itself or the supporting structure.
b)
Provide dead loading calculations for the installed system. This shall be expressed as the
weight in kN/ m, plus any other dead and imposed loadings transmitted to surrounding
construction.
Specific Live Loads:

a)
C.
The work shall be capable of accommodating the following specific live loads without any
reduction in performance:
1.
Horizontally applied loads acting on the surface of any component. The work shall
sustain safely, without reduction in performance and without permanent deformation to
any component, a static 500N load applied horizontally through a square of 100mm
sides on any part of the framing.
2.
A horizontal line load applied to the work, due to the occupants.
Thermal Movements
1.
All components shall resist thermal movement resulting from the maximum and minimum surface
temperature differentials occurring. The design shall cater for all temporary and permanent
conditions envisaged for the work.
2.
The work shall be capable of accommodating changes in dimension and shape of its
components resulting from the varying surface temperatures without any reduction in the
specified performance.
3.
Thermal movements shall not result in audible noise.
4.
Provide for thermal movements resulting from annual ambient temperature changes of 56C.
D.
Horizontal Building Movement (Interstory Drift): Allow for maximum horizontal building movement
equal to quotient resulting from dividing floor-to-floor height at any floor by 400, to the acceptance of
the Structural Engineer.
E.
Shrinkage and Creep for Concrete Frame Buildings Only: Allow for progressive vertical shortening of
building frame equal to 3mm in 3m.
F.
Deflections
1.
The work shall not deflect under loading in any way that is detrimental to any element of the work
or adjacent structural or building elements.
2.
All components, couplings and fastenings shall be capable of accommodating all of the above
deflection without permanent distortion, deformation or failure.
3.
The work shall accommodate differential structural movements arising from any loads imposed
by adjacent structures.
4.
The magnitude of the allowable deflections shall be reduced if they are detrimental to any part of
the work, its support structure or finishes.
5.
Deflection Limits:
a)
Panel frames shall withstand design loads without lateral deflections greater than 1/ 240 of
wall span.
b)
Provision for the following deflection of building structure:

1.
Deflection due to weight of dimension stone cladding system: Allow for 6mm vertical
deflection in 6m span of structural members supporting dimension stone cladding
system.
2.
Live Load Deflection: Allow for 6mm vertical deflection in 6m span of structural
members supporting dimension stone cladding system, due to live loads imposed on
building's structural frame after stone installation.
G.
Provisions for Fabrication and Installation Tolerances: Allow for fabrication and installation tolerances
of building's structural system. Concrete fabrication and installation tolerances are specified in the
Structural Specification. Structural steel fabrication and installation tolerances are specified in the
Structural Specification.
H.
Environmental Performance Requirements

1.
Moisture Movement:
a)
2.
The work shall withstand movement without permanent deformation or any reduction in the
specified performance:
1.
Due to changes in the moisture content of its components, resulting from variations in
the moisture content of the air.
2.
Caused by the flow of rainwater to the inside of the panels.
Thermal Performance Requirements:

a)
The average thermal transmittance (U-value) for the work shall be 0.35W/ mK or better.
b)
Provide U-value calculations including condensation calculations to justify insulation and

vapor barrier design.

29/07/2013
034500 / 4
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
3.
Solar Performance Requirements:

a)
4.
Exposure to sunlight during the service life of the work shall not result in degradation of
appearance or performance.
Air Permeability/ Infiltration: The work shall resist the passage of air such that its air leakage
rates and shall not be exceeded in both the initial and repeat tests.
a)
Air Infiltration: Air leakage through assembly of not more than 0.3L/ s per m of wall area
when tested in accordance with ASTM E283 at the following test-pressure difference:
b)
Test-Pressure Difference: 75Pa.
5.
Condensation: No condensation shall take place either on internal or external surfaces or within
the interstitial construction thickness of the work under the local temperature and humidity
conditions.
6.
Capillarity: Water migration caused by capillarity shall be prevented to areas that are designed to
remain dry.
7.
Weather and Water Penetration Resistance: The work, including flashings and junctions with
adjacent components, shall be fully weatherproof and watertight under all conditions with full
allowance made for deflections and other movements.
a)
Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested in accordance
with ASTM E331 at the following test-pressure difference:
1.
b)
I.
Water Leakage: As defined according to AAMA 501.1.
2.
Water Leakage: Uncontrolled water infiltrating the system or appearing on the system's
normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other than condensation. Water
controlled by flashing and gutters that is drained back to the exterior and cannot
damage adjacent materials or finishes is not water leakage.
General: Refer to the Acoustic Report and the Design Drawings for detailed performance
requirements.
1.
The work shall provide internal sound reduction between floors.
2.
The work shall provide internal sound reduction between adjoining areas on the same
floor.
b)
Work Site Performance: Ensure that the interfaces (including all movement and soft joints)
between elements making up the work are such that the laboratory sound insulation
performances of all elements are not degraded.
c)
Interfaces between the work and other elements: Provide details of all interfaces allowing
sufficient time for the Contractor to comment and to allow such comments to be
implemented.
d)
Work's Self-noise:
1.
The work, including all interfaces, shall be constructed so that any necessary
expansion joints are designed to permit noiseless movement.
2.
Air movement across the work shall not cause audible rattling, whistling or other
attention-catching noise inside the building.
Fire Performance Requirements

1.
2.
L.
1.
Sound Insulation:
a)
K.
Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: No evidence of water leakage when tested
according to AAMA 501.1 under dynamic pressure equal to 20% of inward-acting, wind-load
design pressure of not less than 300Pa and not more than 575Pa.
Acoustic Performance Requirements

1.
J.
Specific Fire Performance Requirements:

a)
Elements of the work shall be either non-combustible or not easily ignitable with low flame
spread characteristics and shall not produce excessive quantities of smoke or toxic gases.
b)
Surface spread of flame: In accordance with UL 723 and ASTM E 84.
Fire and Smoke Stopping:

a)
Provide all cavity barriers to meet the requirements of the NFPA.
b)
Fire and smoke stops shall be positively fastened in position in such a manner that they
shall not become dislodged in the event of a fire.
Local Factors
1.
Accommodate local microclimatic conditions and grades of materials confirming their suitability
and durability.
2.
An assessment of microclimatic conditions shall be made with due allowance for any factors
likely to have an adverse effect upon materials intended for the work contract. More appropriate
materials shall be substituted if adverse effects are predicted.
Durability Performance Requirements

29/07/2013
034500 / 5
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
1.
2.
3.
General:
a)
The performance criteria shall be satisfied for the full design life of the work, as stated by
the Specification, provided always that the maintenance has been carried out as specified.
b)
Metal sheets shall not suffer bowing, dimpling, oil canning, sagging, pillowing, rippling, warp,
abrupt transitions and other visual deformation or irregularity.
Impact and Abrasion Resistance:

a)
Generally, surfaces shall be sufficiently hard to resist heavy impacts from hand-held objects
without any noticeable change to the surface appearance. The work shall resist abrasion
from cleaning methods and maintenance systems without any noticeable change in surface
appearance.
b)
Impact tests shall be carried out on all work assemblies adjacent to pedestrian areas.
c)
The extent of any damage determined through testing shall be recorded and, where
possible, quantified. Samples shall be submitted to the Engineer.
d)
Details of tests shall be provided to demonstrate the performance of materials and finishes
in resisting abrasion from pedestrian traffic (hands, rings, luggage, cloth, shoes) and any
other abrasion resulting from adjacent traffic movements.
e)
Vehicular Impact Loads: Provide spandrel beams acting as vehicular barriers for passenger
cars to resist a single 26.7kN service load and 44.5kN ultimate load applied horizontally in
any direction to the spandrel beam, with anchorages or attachments capable of transferring
this load to the structure. Provide spandrel beams assuming the load to act at a height of
460mm above the floor or ramp surface on an area not to exceed 0.93m.
Demountability:
a)
Elements of the work shall be individually and independently removable ensuring access for
maintenance and/ or replacement of panels in the event of damage.
b)
The removal of panels shall not affect the performance or safety of adjacent or any other
part of the work.
M.
Seismic Performance: The work shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined
according to ASCE/ SEI 7.
N.
Window Washing System: Provide precast units supporting window washing system indicated to
resist pull-out and horizontal shear forces transmitted from window washing equipment.
O.
Fastenings: Refer to Section 050523 Metal Fastenings.
2.4
MATERIALS
A.
Mold Materials
1.
Molds:
a)
Rigid, dimensionally stable, non-absorptive material, warp and buckle free, that shall
provide continuous and true precast concrete surfaces within fabrication tolerances
indicated, nonreactive with concrete and suitable for producing required finishes.
1.
B.
2.
Form Liners: Units of face design, texture, arrangement, and configuration indicated/ to match
those used for precast concrete design reference sample. Furnish with manufacturer's
recommended liquid-release agent that shall not bond with, stain, or adversely affect precast
concrete surfaces and shall not impair subsequent surface or joint treatments of precast
concrete.
3.
Surface Retarder: Chemical set retarder, capable of temporarily delaying final hardening of
newly-placed concrete mixture to depth of reveal specified.
Reinforcing Materials
1.
C.
Reinforcing Bars: In accordance with ASTM A615/ A615M, Grade 420, deformed.
Prestressing Tendons
1.
Prestressing Strand: In accordance with ASTM A416/ A416M Grade 1860, uncoated, 7-wire,
low-relaxation strand.
a)
D.
Mold-Release Agent: Commercially produced liquid-release agent that shall not bond
with, stain or adversely affect precast concrete surfaces and shall not impair
subsequent surface or joint treatments of precast concrete.
Coat un-bonded post-tensioning strand with corrosion inhibitor in accordance with ASTM
D1743 and sheath with polypropylene tendon sheathing. Include anchorage devices and
coupler assemblies.
Concrete Materials
1.
2.
Portland Cement:
a)
In accordance with ASTM C150, Type I or Type III, gray, unless otherwise indicated.
b)
For surfaces exposed to view in finished structure, mix gray with white cement, of same
type, brand and mill source.
Supplementary Cementitious Materials:

29/07/2013
034500 / 6
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
3.
a)
Fly Ash: In accordance with ASTM C618 Class C or F, with maximum loss on ignition of 3%.
b)
Metakaolin Admixture: In accordance with ASTM C618, Class N.
c)
Silica Fume Admixture: In accordance with ASTM C1240, with optional chemical and
physical requirement.
d)
Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: In accordance with ASTM C989, Grade 100 or 120.
Normal-Weight Aggregates: Except as modified by PCI MNL 117S, ASTM C33, with coarse
aggregates in accordance with Class 5S. Stockpile fine and coarse aggregates for each type of
exposed finish from a single source (pit or quarry) for the Project.
a)
Face-Mixture-Coarse Aggregates: Selected, hard, and durable, free of material that reacts
with cement or causes staining, to match selected finish sample.
1.
b)
E.
Gradation: Uniformly graded.
Face-Mixture-Fine Aggregates: Selected, natural or manufactured sand of same material as

coarse aggregate, unless otherwise accepted by the Engineer.
4.
Lightweight Aggregates: Except as modified by PCI MNL 117S, ASTM C330, with absorption
less than 11%.
5.
Coloring Admixture: In accordance with ASTM C979, synthetic or natural mineral-oxide pigments
or colored water-reducing admixtures, temperature stable and nonfading.
6.
Water: Potable; free from deleterious material that may affect color stability, setting or strength of
concrete and in accordance with chemical limits of PCI MNL 117S.
7.
Air-Entraining Admixture: In accordance with ASTM C260, certified by manufacturer to be

compatible with other required admixtures.
8.
Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to

not contain calcium chloride, or more than 0.15% chloride ions or other salts by weight of
admixture.
a)
Water-Reducing Admixtures: In accordance with ASTM C494/ C494M, Type A.
b)
Retarding Admixture: In accordance with ASTM C494/ C494M, Type B.
c)
Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: In accordance with ASTM C494/ C494M, Type
D.
d)
Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: In accordance with ASTM C494/ C494M,

Type E.
e)
High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: In accordance with ASTM C494/ C494M, Type F.
f)
High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: In accordance with ASTM C494/

C494M, Type G.
g)
Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: In accordance with ASTM C1017/ C1017 M.
Steel Connection Materials

1.
Carbon-Steel Shapes and Plates: In accordance with ASTM A36/ A36M.
2.
Carbon-Steel-Headed Studs: In accordance with ASTM A108, AISI 1018 through AISI 1020, cold
finished, AWS D1.1/ D1.1M, Type A or B, with arc shields and with minimum mechanical
properties of PCI MNL 117S, Table 3.2.3.
3.
Carbon-Steel Plate: In accordance with ASTM A283/ A283M.
4.
Malleable Iron Castings: In accordance with ASTM A47/ A47M.
5.
Carbon-Steel Castings: In accordance with ASTM A27/ A27M, Grade 415-205.
6.
High-Strength, Low-Alloy Structural Steel: In accordance with ASTM A572/ A572M.
7.
Carbon-Steel Structural Tubing: In accordance with ASTM A500, Grade B.
8.
Wrought Carbon-Steel Bars: In accordance with ASTM A675/ A675M, Grade 450.
9.
Deformed-Steel Wire or Bar Anchors: In accordance with ASTM A496 or ASTM A706/ A706M.
10. Carbon-Steel Bolts and Studs: In accordance with ASTM F568M, Property Class 4.6,
carbon-steel, hex-head bolts and studs; carbon-steel nuts, ASTM A563M; and flat, unhardened
steel washers, ASTM F844.
11. High-Strength Bolts and Nuts: In accordance with ASTM A325M, Type 1, heavy hex steel
structural bolts, heavy hex carbon-steel nuts, ASTM A563M and hardened carbon-steel washers,
ASTM F436M.
12. Zinc-Coated Finish: For exterior steel items,steel in exterior walls and items indicated for
galvanizing, apply zinc coating by hot-dip process in accordance with ASTM A123/ A123M or
ASTM A153/ A153M/ electro-deposition in accordance with ASTM B633, SC 3, Types 1 and 2.
a)
For steel shapes, plates, and tubing to be galvanized, limit silicon content of steel to less
than 0.03 or to between 0.15% and 0.25% or limit sum of silicon and 2.5 times phosphorous
content to 0.09%.
1.

29/07/2013
Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint with dry film containing not less
than 94% zinc dust by weight, and in accordance with DOD-P-21035A or SSPC-Paint
20.
034500 / 7
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
13. Shop-Primed Finish: Prepare surfaces of non-galvanized steel items, except those surfaces to be
embedded in concrete, in accordance with requirements in SSPC-SP 3 and shop-apply lead and
chromate-free, rust-inhibitive primer, complying with performance requirements in MPI 79/
SSPC-Paint 25 in accordance with SSPC-PA 1.
14. Welding Electrodes: In accordance with AWS standards.
F.
Stainless Steel Connection Materials

1.
Stainless Steel Plate: In accordance with ASTM A666, Type 316L, of grade suitable for
application.
2.
Stainless Steel Bolts and Studs: In accordance with ASTM F593, Alloy 304 or 316, hex-head
bolts and studs, stainless steel nuts and flat, stainless steel washers.
a)
3.
G.
I.
Stainless Steel Headed Studs: In accordance with ASTM A276, with minimum mechanical
properties of PCI MNL 117S, Table 3.2.3.
Bearing Pads
1.
H.
Lubricate threaded parts of stainless steel bolts with an anti-seize thread lubricant during
assembly.
Provide one of the following bearing pads for architectural precast concrete units as
recommended by precast fabricator for application:
a)
Elastomeric Pads: AASHTO M 251, plain, vulcanized, 100% polychloroprene (neoprene)

elastomer, molded to size or cut from a molded sheet, Type A durometer hardness of 50 to
70, in accordance with ASTM D2240, minimum tensile strength 15.5MPa, ASTM D412.
b)
Random-Oriented, Fiber-Reinforced Elastomeric Pads: Preformed, randomly oriented

synthetic fibers set in elastomer. Type A durometer hardness of 70 to 90, in accordance
with ASTM D2240, capable of supporting a compressive stress of 20.7MPa with no
cracking, splitting, or delaminating in the internal portions of the pad. Test 1 No. specimen
for every 200 pads used in the Project.
c)
Cotton-Duck-Fabric-Reinforced Elastomeric Pads: Preformed, horizontally layered

cotton-duck fabric bonded to an elastomer; Type A durometer hardness of 80 to 100, in
accordance with ASTM D2240, complying with AASHTO's "AASHTO Load and Resistance
Factor Design (LRFD) Bridge Design Specifications, Division II, Section 18.10.2, or with
MIL-C-882E.
d)
Frictionless Pads: Tetrafluoroethylene (Teflon), glass-fiber reinforced, bonded to stainless or

mild-steel plate, of type required for in-service stress.
e)
High-Density Plastic: Multimonomer, non-leaching, plastic strip.
Grout Materials
1.
Sand-Cement Grout: Portland cement, in accordance with ASTM C 150, Type I, and clean,
natural sand, ASTM C144 or ASTM C404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2 parts sand, by
volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration.
2.
Non-metallic, Non-shrink Grout: Premixed, non-metallic, non-corrosive, non-staining grout

containing selected silica sands, Portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, plasticizing
and water-reducing agents, in accordance with ASTM C1107, Grade A for drypack and Grades B
and C for flowable grout and of consistency suitable for application within a 30-minute working
time.
3.
Epoxy-Resin Grout: Two-component, mineral-filled epoxy resin, in accordance with ASTM C881/
C881M, of type, grade and class to suit installation requirements.
Concrete Mixtures
1.
Prepare design mixtures for each type of precast concrete required.

a)
Limit use of fly ash and silica fume to 20% of Portland cement by weight; limit metakaolin
and silica fume to 10% of Portland cement by weight.
2.
Design mixtures may be prepared by a qualified independent testing agency or by qualified

precast plant personnel at the architectural precast concrete fabricator's option.
3.
Limit water-soluble chloride ions to maximum percentage by weight of cement permitted by ACI
318M or PCI MNL 117S when tested in accordance with ASTM C1218/ C1218M.
4.
Normal-Weight Concrete Mixtures: Proportion face and backup mixtures or full-depth mixtures, at
fabricator's option by either laboratory trial batch or Site test data methods according to ACI
211.1, with materials to be used on the Project, to provide normal-weight concrete with the
following properties:
a)
Compressive Strength (28 Days): 34.5MPa minimum.
b)
Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.
5.
Water Absorption: 6% by weight or 14% by volume, tested according to PCI MNL 117S.
6.
Lightweight Concrete Backup Mixtures: Proportion mixtures by either laboratory trial batch or Site
test data methods according to ACI 211.2, with materials to be used on the Project, to provide
lightweight concrete with the following properties:
a)
Compressive Strength (28 Days): 34.5MPa.

29/07/2013
034500 / 8
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
b)
Unit Weight: Calculated equilibrium unit weight of 1842kg/ m, 48kg/ m, according to

ASTM C567.
7.
Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of

placement having an air content in accordance with PCI MNL 117S.
8.
When included in design mixtures, add other admixtures to concrete mixtures according to the
manufacturer's written instructions.
J.
Metalwork General: All materials and components shall be durable and to the minimum standards set
out in the Specification.
K.
Stainless Steel
L.
M.
N.
O.
1.
Unless otherwise specified, use austenitic, non magnetic, 1.4401 (316) to suit the application.
2.
Specific grade designations shall be either as specified in the relevant Work Sections of the
Specification or, where not identified specifically, selected to meet the performance criteria
specified for the particular element or components.
3.
Plate: In accordance with ASTM A666, Type 316.
4.
Bar Stock: In accordance with ASTM A276, Type 316.
5.
Tubing: In accordance with ASTM A269, Type 316, seamless welded.
6.
Sheet: In accordance with ASTM A240/ A240M or ASTM A666, Type 316, stretcher-leveled
standard of flatness. Tension leveled.
7.
Finish: In accordance with AISI No. 4 or 6 (satin finish).
8.
Fasteners, Bolts, Screws, Nuts and Fastenings: Stainless steel grade A2 or grade A4. Select the
property Class of fastenings to meet the specified performance requirements.
Aluminum
1.
Aluminum Extrusions: In accordance with ASTM B221M, aluminum alloy and temper as
recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish.
2.
Aluminum Sheet: In accordance with ASTM B209M, with temper as required for forming, or as
otherwise recommended by metal manufacturer for required finish.
3.
Aluminum Castings: In accordance with ASTM B26/ B26M, Alloy 319.
4.
Structural aluminum shall be in accordance with AA ASM 35 and AA ADM 1.
5.
Only appropriate grades, strengths and thicknesses of aluminum shall be used to ensure that all
structural and finishing requirements of the Specification are met. The wall thicknesses of
aluminum extrusions shall be sufficient to ensure their rigidity in the lengths required in the final
installation.
Stainless Steel Castings

1.
Shall be of austenitic stainless steel and the casting alloy shall be determined by the Contractor
to meet the requirements of the Specification but shall be equal or superior to grade 1.4408 with
respect to corrosion resistance.
2.
The surface roughness of the casting surface prior to any subsequent finishing process shall be
SCRATA A2 (Steel Castings Research and Trade Association) or better.
3.
Make allowance for two post production finishing processes to be utilized. The processes shall
be agreed with the Engineer and shall include blast finishes (including bead blasting) and
electropolishing or acid pickling.
Corrosion-Resistant Coating
1.
Cold-applied, compounded for 0.4mm dry film thickness per coat.
2.
Provide inert-type non-corrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components and other
deleterious impurities.
Sealants
1.
Refer to Section 079200 Joint Sealants.
2.
Where the sealant location involves special requirements, comply with the following:
a)
2.5
Where the sealant is required to achieve a period of fire resistance, provide independent
performance certification of the proposed sealants to show the sealant satisfies the required
fire resistance requirement.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Reglets: Refer to Section 077100 Roof Specialties.
B.
Precast Accessories: Provide clips, hangers, plastic or steel shims and other accessories required to
install architectural precast concrete units.
C.
Insulated Panel Accessories

1.
Molded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: In accordance with ASTM C578, with square or ship-lap
edges, as suitably required.
2.
Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: In accordance with ASTM C578, with square edges or
ship-lap edges, as suitably required.

29/07/2013
034500 / 9
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
3.
2.6
Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: In accordance with ASTM C591, un-faced.

A.
General
1.
Quality Control Testing: Test and inspect precast concrete according to PCI MNL 117S
requirements.
2.
Employ an Independent Testing Agency to evaluate architectural precast concrete fabricator's

quality control and testing methods.
a)
3.
Strength of precast concrete units shall be considered deficient if units fail in accordance with
American Concrete Institute (ACI) 318M requirements for concrete strength.
4.
Testing Requirements:
a)
B.
C.
1.
Air infiltration when tested according to ASTM E283.
2.
Repeat air filtration when tested according to ASTM E283.
Weatherproofing and Watertightness Tests
2.
E.
F.
G.
If there is evidence that the strength of precast concrete units may be deficient or may not
be in accordance with ACI 318M requirements, the precaster shall employ an Independent
Testing Agency to obtain, prepare and test cores drilled from hardened concrete to
determine compressive strength according to ASTM C42/ C42M.
Air Permeability Tests
1.
D.
Allow the Testing Agency access to material storage areas, concrete production equipment,
concrete placement and curing facilities. Cooperate with the Testing Agency and provide
samples of materials and concrete mixtures as may be requested for additional testing and
evaluation.
Tests shall be carried out adopting either the static or the dynamic procedures, as appropriate to
the system type and expected conditions, set out below:
a)
Water penetration under static pressure when tested according to ASTM E331.
b)
Water penetration under dynamic pressure when tested according to AAMA 501.1.
Repeat water penetration under static pressure when tested according to ASTM E331.
Wind Resistance Tests

1.
Perform wind tunnel testing as specified in the 'Wind Tunnel Testing Specification' by the
Structural Engineer, to establish various governing wind pressures for the wall assembly.
2.
Provide structural performance preloading at 50% of the specified wind-load design pressure
when tested according to ASTM E330.
3.
Structural performance at maximum 150% of positive and negative wind-load design pressures
when tested according to ASTM E330.
Structural Test Performance in accordance with ASTM E330 as follows.

1.
When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not evidence
deflection exceeding specified limits.
2.
When tested at 150% of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies, including
anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of
main framing members exceeding 0.2% of span.
3.
Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.
Off Site Test Sequence

1.
The Testing Authority shall witness the installation and dismantling of the prototypes, record any
variations to the agreed details on a set of the prototype assembly drawings prepared by the
Contractor and shall also record the extent of water penetration into the system.
2.
No test shall be carried out unless all previous tests in the sequence have been passed to the
satisfaction of the Testing Authority.
3.
If any modification is made to the prototype, repeat testing shall be undertaken. However, if any
modification is undertaken that, in the opinion of the Independent Testing Authority or witness,
invalidates earlier test results, the sequence shall commence again at the first test. This
requirement is not applicable to glass breakage during the wind resistance safety test when
replacement of a pane of glass may be carried out without re-starting the whole sequence.
Acoustic Testing - Initial Advance Test

1.
Identify the glass configurations and incorporate any acoustically enhanced configurations that
may be necessary to meet the Specification.
2.
Immediately following the appointment of the cladding Subcontractor, arrange laboratory acoustic
tests of the proposed glass configurations using similar framing to that intended with similar
dimensions and mass per meter run of framing. These prototypes shall not be used as visual
samples and shall not include glass coatings or heat treatments but shall be used to confirm
compliance with the specified acoustic data.
3.
From initial results of acoustic testing, provide detailed acoustic assessment of each cladding
type for review.

29/07/2013
034500 / 10
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
H.
2.7
Sealants: Written confirmation from the sealant manufacturer shall be obtained and submitted to the
Engineer for consideration of the suitability of the sealant for the application intended. Refer to Section
079200 Joint Sealants.
FINISHES
A.
General
1.
Panel faces shall be free of joint marks, grain and other obvious defects. Corners, including false
joints, shall be uniform, straight and sharp. Finish exposed-face surfaces of architectural precast
concrete units to match approved sample panels and as follows:
a)
PCI's "Architectural Precast Concrete - Color and Texture Selection Guide," of plate
numbers indicated.
b)
As-Cast Surface Finish: Provide surfaces free of pockets, sand streaks and honeycombs.
c)
Textured-Surface Finish: Impart by form liners or inserts to provide surfaces free of pockets,
streaks and honeycombs, with uniform color and texture.
d)
Bushhammer Finish: Use power or hand tools to remove matrix and fracture coarse
aggregates.
e)
Exposed-Aggregate Finish: Use chemical retarding agents applied to concrete forms and
washing and brushing procedures to expose aggregate and surrounding matrix surfaces
after form removal.
f)
Abrasive-Blast Finish: Use abrasive grit, equipment, application techniques, and cleaning
procedures to expose aggregate and surrounding matrix surfaces.
g)
Acid-Etched Finish: Use acid and hot-water solution, equipment, application techniques and
cleaning procedures to expose aggregate and surrounding matrix surfaces. Protect
hardware, connections and insulation from acid attach.
h)
Honed Finish: Use continuous mechanical abrasion with fine grit, followed by filling and
rubbing procedures.
i)
Polished Finish: Use continuous mechanical abrasion with fine grit, followed by filling and
rubbing procedures.
j)
Sand-Embedment Finish: Use selected stones placed in a sand bed in bottom of mold, with
sand removed after curing.
k)
Finish exposed surfaces of architectural precast concrete units to match face-surface finish.
l)
Finish exposed surfaces of architectural precast concrete units by smooth, steel-trowel

finish.
m)
Finish unexposed surfaces of architectural precast concrete units by float finish.

End of Section

29/07/2013
034500 / 11
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 034900 GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1
1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
PRODUCT SELECTION
DESIGN CRITERIA
MATERIALS

29/07/2013
2
2
2
5
034900
AECOM Middle East

Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Concrete
Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 034900 GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
Contractor's Delegated Design Work

1.
Complete the Detailed Design, manufacture, supply, install and warrant the work, complying with
the visual intent indicated and specified design and performance requirements.
2.
Where no material, product or supplier is specified, propose suitable materials and systems prior
to the Contract Award which comply with the visual intent indicated and specified design and
performance requirements, and be fully responsible for the Detailed Design of the work.
3.
Where a particular material, product or supplier is specified, the material, product or supplier
shall be deemed indicative representing the Engineer's Design Intent only. Complete the
installation using the specified or other product acceptable to the Engineer, in writing. Be fully
responsible for the Detailed Design and performance of the work.
4.
Complete the Detailed Design of all interfaces with adjoining trades prior to commencement of
manufacture.
5.
Ensure that all interfaces are fully coordinated prior to commencement.
Section Includes
1.
C.
1.2
Glass-fiber-reinforced concrete (GRC) panel cladding with various surface patterns complete
with metal support structure and accessories.
Design Drawings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
1.
2.
3.
For qualified GRC manufacturer, including proof of current Precast/ Pre-stressed Concrete
Institute (PCI) or Architectural Precast Association (APA) Plant Certification.
4.
Operatives must have service or repair facilities not more than two hours from the Site.
Off-Site testing
1.
The Contractor may provide data from previous independently certified tests to demonstrate that
the Contractor's proposed systems meet the performance requirements of the Specification. The
information shall be to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.
2.
If suitable data to demonstrate compliance with the performance requirements is not available,
provide prototypes of each type and have them independently tested in accordance with the
testing criteria indicated in the Specification.
3.
Independently certified test data, as applicable, shall include static and dynamic results, and
Agrment certificates.
4.
substrate materials. These certificates shall relate to tests carried out by the sealant
manufacturer.
5.
Testing of Fastening:
a)
As the panels are manufactured, the Contractor shall arrange for testing of the primary
brackets and fastening to be carried out to selected panels to confirm compliance with the
Specification and the requirements of Local Building Regulations/ Municipality.
b)
1 in every 5 panels manufactured shall have their fastenings subjected to pull-out and shear
testing.
c)
The primary fastenings shall be subjected to test loading of design load times a factor of 1.1
for both pull-out and shear. The direction of the test loads shall be consistent with the
design principles and shall allow for the most onerous design conditions.
d)
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review proposals for these tests, which shall
be suitably modified to allow for the primary bracket design.
e)
The Contractor shall arrange for Test Reports to be produced at appropriate intervals by the
Independent Testing Authority and submitted to the Engineer for review. If any of the
fastenings show a displacement of more than 0.1mm, this shall be brought to the attention
of the Engineer immediately.
f)
Depending on the initial test results, the frequency of testing may be reviewed and modified
with prior agreement.
Mock-ups
1.
Provide mock-ups for each type, of size required to demonstrate all materials selected and

29/07/2013
034900 / 1
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION
A.
Source of Supply: Obtain products for each item from a single manufacturer.
B.
Type EWS-410 and EWS-414 Glass-Fiber Reinforced Concrete Rainscreen Panel System
1.
2.2
Manufacturer:
a)
Khansaheb Reckli Foam Division.
b)
Rieder-Smart Elements GmbH.
c)
Or acceptable equivalent.
2.
Description: Precast panels with pattern imprints on the finished surface, fixed to the structure
behind, using standard mechanical fixing.
3.
Material: Glass-fiber reinforced concrete.
4.
Size: As indicated on the Design Drawings.
5.
Thickness: 150mm.
6.
Formliner:
a)
Manufacturer: Reckli or identical.
b)
Pattern:
1.
Type EWS-410: Kocher formliner pattern.
2.
Type EWS-414: Plafond formliner pattern with customisation.
DESIGN CRITERIA
A.
Joints shall align. Visually open, recessed horizontal and vertical joints between units shall be uniform
and equal to a nominal width as indicated on the Design Drawings.
B.
C.
Secondary Support
1.
2.
All secondary supports for external use shall be of 316L stainless steel.
3.
All secondary supports for internal use shall be of galvanised steel.
4.
If visible it shall be finished with PVDF, color to the Engineer's acceptance.
5.
Protective coatings, where specified, and the associated finish to the joints shall be to the same
standard as the main assemblies.
D.
Dimensions are deemed to be nominal but indicative to the design intent. The Contractor shall
E.
Materials used for fastening shall be stainless steel grade 316L of suitable design and strength to suit
application. Fastenings shall be concealed or inconspicuous to the acceptance of the Engineer.
F.
Use bimetalic seperator between the galvanized and stainless steel material.
G.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the design of all supports for the GRC Cladding. For the
primary structure refer to the Structural Engineer's specification.
H.
Subcontractor to ensure a fully waterproof integration is achieved.
I.
J.
K.
2.3
A.
General
1.
GRC assemblies shall comply with performance requirements without failure due to defective
manufacture, fabrication, installation or other defects in construction.
2.
Design panel frames and connections to accommodate deflections and other building
movements.
3.
Design panel frames to transfer window loads to building structure.

29/07/2013
034900 / 2
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
B.

1.
GRC panels, including panel frames, anchors, and connections, shall withstand the following
design loads as well as the effects of thermal and moisture induced volume changes, according
to load factors and combinations established in PCI MNL 128, "Recommended Practice for Glass
Fiber Reinforced Concrete Panels."
2.
Provide GRC panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads and
stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, based on testing in accordance with ASTM
E 1592 / ASTM E 330:
a)
3.
4.
5.
C.
1.
Uniform pressure of 957 Pa or 1436 Pa, acting inward or outward as determined by the
Engineer.
2.
Uniform pressure as indicated on Design Drawings.
Specific Movements:
a)
b)

a)
The work shall accommodate its own dead loading without causing deflections or
movements which adversely affect the system itself or the supporting structure.
b)
Provide dead loading calculations for the installed system. This shall be expressed as the
weight in kN/ m, plus any other dead and imposed loadings transmitted to surrounding
construction.

a)
6.
1.
2.
Wind Loads:
a)
structural integrity and performance of the work.
b)
Design Wind Pressures: Refer to the Structural Engineer's specification.
c)
Calculated pressure loads shall include the effect of internal air pressures within the
building, taking into account the presence of significant openings which might arise
occasionally within the building enclosure.
Thermal Movements
1.
2.
3.
4.
Provide for thermal movements resulting from annual ambient temperature changes of 56C.
D.
E.
Shrinkage and Creep for concrete frame buildings only: Allow for progressive vertical shortening of
F.
Deflections
1.
2.
3.
4.
the work, its support structure or finishes.
5.
Deflection Limits:

29/07/2013
034900 / 3
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
G.
a)
Design panel frames to withstand design loads without lateral deflections greater than 1/
240 of wall span.
b)
Provision for the following deflection of building structure:

1.
Deflection due to weight of dimension stone cladding system: Allow for 6mm vertical
deflection in 6m span of structural members supporting dimension stone cladding
system.
2.
Live load deflection: Allow for 6mm vertical deflection in 6m span of structural
members supporting dimension stone cladding system, due to live loads imposed on
building's structural frame after stone installation.

1.
Moisture Movement:
a)
2.
3.
1.
2.
Caused by the flow of rainwater to the inside of the GRC panels.

a)
The average thermal transmittance (U-value) for the work shall be 0.35 W/ mK or better.
b)


a)
4.
a)
Air Infiltration: Air leakage through assembly of not more than 0.3 L/ s per m of wall area
when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283 at the following test-pressure difference:
5.
Test-Pressure Difference: 75 Pa.
6.
Condensation: No condensation shall take place either on internal or exterior surfaces, or within
conditions.
7.
remain dry.
8.
a)
with ASTM E 331 at the following test-pressure difference:
1.
b)
H.
Test-Pressure Difference: 300 Pa.
design pressure of not less than 300 Pa and not more than 575 Pa.
1.
2.
Water Leakage: Uncontrolled water infiltrating the system or appearing on system's


1.
Sound Insulation:
a)
requirements.
1.
The work shall effectively insulate the internal areas of the building from high levels of
noise.
2.
3.
The work shall provide internal sound reduction between adjoining areas on the same
floor.
b)
Work's Site Performance: Ensure that the interfaces (including all movement and soft joints)
c)
Interfaces between the work and Other Elements: Provide details of all interfaces allowing
sufficient time for the Contractor to comment and to allow such comments to be
implemented.

29/07/2013
034900 / 4
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
d)
I.
2.
K.
1.
The work, including all interfaces, shall be constructed so that any necessary
expansion joints are designed to permit noiseless movement.
2.

1.
J.
Work's Self-noise:

a)
b)
Surface spread of flame: In accordance with UL 723 and ASTM E 84.
Fire and smoke stopping:

a)
b)
Fire and smoke stops shall be positively fastened in position in such a manner that they will
not become dislodged in the event of a fire.
Local Factors
1.
and durability.
2.

1.
2.
3.
General:
a)
The performance criteria shall be satisfied for the full design life of the Work, as stated by
b)

a)
appearance.
b)
c)
d)
Demountability:
a)
b)
part of the work.
L.
Seismic Performance: The work shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined
according to ASCE/ SEI 7
M.
Fastenings: Refer to Section 050523 Metal Fastenings.
2.4
MATERIALS
A.
B.
GRC Panels
1.
Refer to the Design Drawings for details of panel types.
2.
All panels shall be through colored.
3.
The panel units shall be manufactured to sizes indicated on the Shop Drawings, and be within
the specified tolerance deviations.
4.
Shop Drawings shall show the final design while strictly maintaining the design intent visual
requirements.
5.
Bending strength of panels shall be suited to the panel sizes and the performance requirements
for the project generally.
GRC Materials
1.
Portland Cement: In accordance with ASTM C 150; Type I, II, or III.

a)
For surfaces exposed to view in finished structure, use white cement of same type, brand
and source throughout GRC production.

29/07/2013
034900 / 5
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
b)
2.
a)
3.
4.
Metakaolin: In accordance with ASTM C 618, Class N.
Glass Fibers:
Alkali resistant, with a minimum zirconia content of 16%, 25mm to 50mm long, specifically
produced for use in GRC, and complying with PCI MNL 130.
Sand:
a)
Washed and dried silica, complying with composition requirements in accordance with
ASTM C 144; passing 0.85mm sieve with a maximum of 2% passing 0.15mm sieve.
b)
Comply with the requirements of the GRCA `Specification for the manufacture, curing and
testing of GRC products', clause 2.3 as applicable and make provision for additional
aggregate and natural mineral pigments as may be required to achieve the desired color if
necessary.
c)
Ensure that all aggregate is evenly distributed and suspended throughout the mix without
heavy aggregate particulates settling during curing.
Facing Aggregate: In accordance with ASTM C 33, except for gradation, and PCI MNL 130, 6mm
maximum size.
a)
Aggregates: Selected, hard and durable, free of material that reacts with cement or causes
staining, to match sample.
5.
Water: Potable, free from deleterious material that may affect color stability, setting or strength of
GRC and in accordance with chemical limits of PCI MNL 130.
6.
Polymer-Curing Admixture: Acrylic thermoplastic copolymer dispersion in accordance with PCI

MNL 130.
7.
Air-Entraining Admixture: In accordance with ASTM C 260, containing not more than 0.1%
chloride ions.
8.
Chemical Admixtures: In accordance with ASTM C 494/ C 494M, containing not more than 0.1%
chloride ions.
9.
Mix design and grade shall be determined by the Contractor in accordance with GRCA
`Specification for the manufacture, curing and testing of GRC products', clause 3.1, for
acceptance by the Engineer.
10. Mechanical properties of the GRC shall be consistent and suited to the various profiles, shapes
and spans as required to meet the performance criteria.
11. Coloring Agents/ Pigments:
C.
a)
In accordance with ASTM C979 (Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored
Concrete).
b)
Only natural mineral pigments shall be used and must be an alkali and UV resistant,
permanent and fade resistant, integral through color to achieve color of color sample
provided with Tender Documents.
c)
No artificial pigments are permitted to be added.
d)
The color shall be as uniform and streak free as can be achieved using natural mineral
pigments.
e)
To be compatible with all other constituents of the mix such as aggregates and Portland
cement.
f)
The final selection of color will be dependant upon the submitted samples specified herein
and the selection of the Engineer.
Mold Materials
1.
Molds:
a)
Rigid, dimensionally stable, non-absorptive material, warp and buckle free, that will provide
continuous and true GRC surfaces, is nonreactive with GRC and capable of producing
required finish surfaces.
1.
D.
Mold-Release Agent: Commercially produced liquid-release agent that will not bond
with, stain or adversely affect GRC surfaces and will not impair subsequent surface or
joint treatments of GRC.
2.
Form Liners: Units of face design, texture, arrangement and configuration ***indicated/ to match
GRC design reference sample.*** Provide solid backing and form supports to ensure that form
liners remain in place during GRC application. Use with manufacturer's recommended
liquid-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect GRC surfaces and will not
impair subsequent surface or joint treatments of GRC.
3.
Surface Retarder: Chemical liquid set retarder capable of temporarily delaying hardening of
newly placed GRC face mix to depth of reveal specified.
Anchors, Connectors, and Miscellaneous Materials

1.
Carbon-Steel Shapes and Plates: In accordance with ASTM A 36/ A 36M. Finish steel shapes
and plates less than 4.76mm thick as follows:

29/07/2013
034900 / 6
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
2.
a)
Finish: Zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/ A 123M, after fabrication,
or ASTM A 153/ A 153M, as applicable.
b)
Finish: Shop primed with MPI#79 or SSPC-Paint 25 on surfaces prepared in accordance

with SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning," or better.
Carbon-Steel Bars: In accordance with ASTM A 108, AISI Grade 1018. Finish steel bars less
than 4.76mm thick as follows:
a)
Finish: Zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123 or A 123M, after
fabrication, or ASTM A 153/ A 153M, as applicable/ electrode position according to ASTM B
633, SC 3.
b)
Finish: Shop primed with MPI#79 or SSPC-Paint 25 on surfaces prepared in accordance

with SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning" or better.
3.
Malleable-Iron Castings: In accordance with ASTM A 47/ A 47M.
4.
Carbon-Steel Castings: In accordance with ASTM A 27/ A 27M.
5.
Bolts: In accordance with ASTM F 568M or ASTM A 325M.

a)
E.
6.
Reglets: PVC extrusions.
7.
Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.
2.
3.
G.
a)
Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated in accordance with
ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941M, Class Fe/ Zn 5.
b)
Material for Exterior Locations: Alloy Group A4 stainless-steel bolts, in accordance with
ASTM F 738M and nuts in accordance with ASTM F 836M.
Panel Frame Materials

1.
F.
Finish: Zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/ A 123M, after fabrication,
and ASTM A 153/ A 153M, as applicable
Cold-Formed Steel Framing: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, complying with
AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members,"
minimum uncoated steel thickness of 1.34mm ***of web depth indicated***, with stiffened
flanges, U-shaped steel track and of the following steel sheet:
a)
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: In accordance with ASTM A 653/ A 653M, structural-steel

sheet, zinc coating, of grade required by structural performance of framing.
b)
Painted, Non-metallic Coated Steel Sheet: In accordance with ASTM A 1011/ A 1011M, hot
rolled; or ASTM A 1008/ A 1008M, cold rolled; non-metallic coated according to ASTM A
1003/ A 1003M; of grade required by structural performance of framing.
Hollow Structural Sections: Steel tubing, in accordance with ASTM A 500 or ASTM A 513. Finish
hollow structural sections as follows:
a)
Organic Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-Paint 20 on surfaces prepared in accordance with

SSPC-SP 6/ NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
b)
Primer: SSPC-Paint 25 on surfaces prepared in accordance with SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool

Cleaning" or better.
Steel Channels and Angles: In accordance with ASTM A 36/ A 36M, finished as follows:
a)
Organic Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-Paint 20 on surfaces prepared in accordance with

SSPC-SP 6/ NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
b)
Primer: SSPC-Paint 25 on surfaces prepared in accordance with SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool

Cleaning" or better.
GRC Mixes
1.
Backing Mix: Proportion backing mix of Portland cement, glass fibers, sand and admixtures in
accordance with design requirements. Provide nominal glass-fiber content of not less than 5%
by weight of total mix.
2.
Face Mix: Proportion face mix of Portland cement, sand, facing aggregates and admixtures in
accordance with design requirements.
3.
Usually retain mist coat in first paragraph below with backing mix above if no face mix. Delete
mist coat if retaining face mix or if GRC is faced with dimension stone or another veneer.
4.
Mist Coat: Portland cement, sand slurry and admixtures, of same proportions as backing mix
without glass fibers.
5.
Polymer-Curing Admixture: 6% to 7% by weight of polymer-curing admixture solids to dry

Portland cement.
6.
Air Content: 8% to 10%; in accordance with ASTM C 185.
7.
Coloring Admixture: Shall not exceed 10% of cement weight.
Aluminum
1.
Aluminum shall be in accordance with:

a)
Aluminum Extrusions: In accordance with ASTM B 221M, aluminum alloy and temper as
recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish.

29/07/2013
034900 / 7
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
H.
I.
b)
Aluminum Sheet: In accordance with ASTM B 209M, with temper as required for forming, or
as otherwise recommended by metal manufacturer for required finish.
c)
Aluminum Castings: In accordance with ASTM B 26/ B 26M, Alloy 319.
d)
Structural aluminum shall comply with AA ASM 35 and AA ADM 1.
e)
Only appropriate grades, strengths and thicknesses of aluminum shall be used to ensure
that all structural and finishing requirements of the Specification are met. The wall
thicknesses of aluminum extrusions shall be sufficient to ensure their rigidity in the lengths
required in the final installation.
Stainless-Steel
1.
Unless otherwise specified, use austenitic, non magnetic, 1.4401 (316) to suit the application.
2.
Specific grade designations shall be either as specified in the relevant sections of the
3.
Plate: In accordance with ASTM A666, Type 316.
4.
Bar Stock: In accordance with ASTM A 276, Type 316.
5.
Tubing: In accordance with ASTM A269, Type 316, seamless welded.
6.
Sheet: In accordance with ASTM A 240/ A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 316, stretcher-leveled
standard of flatness. Tension leveled.
7.
Finish: In accordance with AISI No. 4 or 6 (satin finish).
8.
Fasteners, Bolts, Screws, Nuts and Fastenings: Stainless steel grade A2 or grade A4. Select the
property Class of fastenings to meet the specified performance requirements
Corrosion-Resistant Coating
1.
Cold-applied, compounded for 0.4mm dry film thickness per coat.
2.
Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components and other
deleterious impurities.
J.
Fastenings: Stainless steel grade 316L.
K.
Sealants:
1.
Where the sealant location involves special requirements, comply with the following:
a)
Where the sealant is required to achieve a period of fire resistance, provide independent
performance certification of the proposed sealants to show the sealant satisfies the required
fire resistance requirement.
End of Section

29/07/2013
034900 / 8
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 035300 CONCRETE TOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1
1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
PRODUCT SELECTION
MATERIALS
MIXING
FABRICATION

29/07/2013
1
1
2
2
2
035300
AECOM Middle East

Concrete Topping
Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 035300 CONCRETE TOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2

1.
2.
3.

1.
Cement sand screeds.
2.
Fine concrete toppings.
3.
Proprietary lightweight aggregate screeds.
Design Drawings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Contractor's Qualifications: A specialist who has at least 5 years' experience performing similar work,
is certified to BS EN ISO 9001 or operates a similar quality system acceptable to the Engineer.
B.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agent qualified according to ASTM C1077 and ASTM
E329 for testing indicated.
C.
Mock-ups:
1.
D.
Provide mock-ups of size required to demonstrate all materials selected and workmanship, to
Engineer's acceptance.
Preconstruction Testing/ Reports

1.
Submit reports of independent tests demonstrating that the products and systems are in
accordance with the specified performance requirements.
2.
The provision of testing data or the carrying-out of tests does not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibilities regarding the durability or service life requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION
A.
Source of Supply: Obtain products from manufacturers with at least 10 years' experience of
producing similar items, and having an experienced technical advisor available for the duration of the
work.
B.
Type SCR-201 Cement Sand Levelling Screed
C.
2.2
1.
Description: Sand-cement concrete topping bonded on to the floor substrate.
2.
Substrate: Concrete slab or as indicated on the Design Drawings.
3.
Thickness: Minimum 35mm or as indicated on the Design Drawings laid to falls/ level.
4.
Provide suitable bonding agent as recommended by the manufacturer.
5.
The surface shall be troweled to achieve the required slip resistance/ abrasion requirements and
coated with a suitable sealer in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Type SCR-301 Un-Bonded Sand Cement Screed

1.
Description: Un-bonded sand-cement concrete topping laid over damp proof membrane (DPM)/
separation layer.
2.
Substrate: Concrete slab or as indicated on the Design Drawings.
3.
Thickness: Minimum 100mm or as indicated on the Design Drawings laid to falls/ level.
4.
DPM/ Separation Layer: As recommended by the manufacturer.
5.
The surface shall be troweled to achieve the required slip resistance/ abrasion requirements and
coated with a suitable sealer in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
A.
Structural Movement
1.
All concrete toppings are to withstand all movements of the structure under all design loads or
combination of loads as specified in the Structural Engineer's specifications and Deflection/
Movement Reports, without any damage, cracking or breaking up of the concrete topping layers.
2.
All concrete toppings are to accommodate all structural expansion joints and construction control
joints.

29/07/2013
035300 / 1
AECOM Middle East

Concrete Topping
Avenue - Phase 2
B.
2.3
3.
Weight of all concrete toppings, including associated reinforcements, shall be co-ordinated with
the structural design of the building to ensure that maximum weights, when wet, shall not be
exceeded.
4.
Loads due to floor finishes over the concrete topping shall be accommodated along with loads
imposed during normal service conditions and maintenance operations. All loads shall be
confirmed and accepted by the Engineer.
Physical Properties
1.
Compressive Strength (at 28 Days): In accordance with ASTM C109.
2.
Flexural Strength (at 28 Days): In accordance with ASTM C580.
3.
Bond Strength to Concrete: In accordance with ASTM D3931.
4.
Day Shrinkage: In accordance with ASTM C531.
MATERIALS
A.
Concrete Toppings: Concrete toppings shall comply with the relevant parts specified in the
International Building Code.
B.
Proprietary Products
1.
C.
Concrete Topping
1.
D.
E.
2.4
2.5
Where any concrete topping shall be described as proprietary, all materials, the mix composition,
proportions, mixing methods, minimum and maximum thicknesses and workmanship shall be in
accordance with the recommendations of the concrete topping manufacturer.
Factory-prepared and dry-packaged mixture of graded aggregate, portland cement or blended
hydraulic cement; plasticizers; and other admixtures to which only water needs to be added at
Project Site.
Curing Materials
1.
Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for application to

fresh concrete.
2.
Absorptive Cover: Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf in accordance with AASHTO M
182.
3.
Moisture-Retaining Cover: Polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet in accordance

with ASTM C171.
4.
Water: Potable.
5.
Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: Type 1, Class B, 25% solids content
(minimum) in accordance with ASTM C309.
Related Materials
1.
Semi-rigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semi-rigid, 100% solids, joint filler in accordance with
ASTM D2240.
2.
Joint-Filler Strips: Asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber in accordance with ASTM D1751, or cork or
self-expanding cork in accordance with ASTM D1752.
3.
Portland Cement: Type I or II in accordance with ASTM C150.
4.
Sand: In accordance with ASTM C404.
5.
Water: Potable.
6.
Acrylic-Bonding Agent: Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene in

accordance with ASTM C1059.
7.
Epoxy Adhesive: Type V, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to
damp surfaces, of class and grade to suit requirements in accordance with ASTM C881/ C 881M.
8.
Insulation: Manufacturer's standard product. Refer to Section 072100 Thermal Insulation for
additional requirements.
a)
The insulation shall be inert, durable, rot-proof and vermin-proof and not be degradable by
moisture, extreme temperatures or water vapor.
b)
The insulation shall not bulge, sag, delaminate or detach during its installation or when
poured-in-place during the life of the Work.
c)
Insulation shall have zero Ozone Depleting Potential (ODP), be CFC and HFC free and
have a Global Warming Potential (GWP) of less than five.
d)
The selected insulation shall comply with all relevant standards and be certified accordingly.
MIXING
A.
Bonding Slurry: Mix portland cement with water to a thick paint consistency.
B.
Floor Topping: Mix concrete floor topping materials and water in appropriate drum-type batch
machine mixer or truck mixer according to manufacturer's written instructions.
FABRICATION

29/07/2013
035300 / 2
AECOM Middle East

Concrete Topping
Avenue - Phase 2
A.
Reinforcement in concrete topping shall be specified in accordance with International Building Code
and manufacturer's recommendations for concrete topping type to the acceptance of the Engineer.
B.
Separating Layer for Unbonded Concrete Floor Toppings: Where indicated on the Design Drawings,
1000 gage polythene separating layer on the structural base and dress up the walls with a 6mm
polythene backer in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
C.
Movement Joints: Coordinate movement joints in concrete topping layer with the movement joint
layout for the associated finish material covering the work of this Work Section in accordance with the
layout developed by the Subcontractor and with locations of movement joints in concrete slab
substrate. Contractor shall determine depth of movement joint installation with all parties.
1.
2.
Control joints shall be movement joints recommended in writing by the manufacturer to

accommodate floor finishes as indicated on the Design Drawings and shall generally comprise
the following:
a)
Metal side plates shall be either aluminum or stainless steel as recommended by the
manufacturer to suit the service conditions. Finishes shall be to the acceptance of the
Engineer.
b)
Wire ties shall be situated in accordance with the manufacturer's written recommendations.
Perimeter movement shall be allowed for at the edges of floor toppings against solid walls. A
6mm closed cell compressible polyethylene strip shall be installed to suit the floor topping depth
with a 2-part polysulphide sealant to the acceptance of the Engineer.
End of Section

29/07/2013
035300 / 3
AECOM Middle East

Concrete Topping
Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 042000 UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1
1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
PRODUCT SELECTION
MATERIALS

29/07/2013
2
2
3
042000
AECOM Middle East

Unit Masonry
Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 042000 UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2

1.
2.
3.

1.
Concrete masonry units.
2.
Mortar and grout.
3.
Steel reinforcing bars.
4.
Masonry joint reinforcement.
5.
Ties and anchors.
6.
Embedded flashing.
7.
Miscellaneous masonry accessories.
Design Drawings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for testing indicated.
B.
1.
A specialist who has at least 5 years' successful experience in performing similar work.
2.
Certification to ISO 9001 or operates an acceptable alternative quality system.
3.
Operatives shall possess a National Vocational Qualification (NVQ) in Trowel Occupations or an

acceptable equivalent qualification.
C.
Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or
a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from a single source
manufacturer for each product required.
D.
Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color,
for exposed masonry, from a single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from a single
source or producer for each aggregate.
E.
Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ ASCE 6/ TMS 602 unless modified by requirements in
the Contract Documents.
F.
Sample Panels: Prior to commencement of the work, a sample panel of each type of walling, with all
options of mortar specified, in panel sizes of nominally 1800mm x 1800mm shall be built on Site. The
sample panels shall be constructed in an agreed location using randomly selected masonry units but
rejecting any that are damaged. Acceptance from the Engineer shall be obtained prior to
commencement of construction for that type. If a panel is rejected, construct other sample panels of
each type until acceptance is obtained from the Engineer.
G.
Mock-ups
1.
H.

1.
I.
To be confirmed by the Engineer.

Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified Independent Testing Agency to perform
preconstruction testing indicated below. Retesting of materials that fail in accordance with
specified requirements shall be done at the Contractor's expense.
a)
Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, according to ASTM C140 for
compressive strength.
b)
Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to ASTM C109/
C109M for compressive strength, ASTM C1506 for water retention, and ASTM C91 for air
content.
c)
Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix required, according to ASTM C1019.
d)
Prism Test: For each type of construction required, according to ASTM C1314.
Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout, include description of type and proportions of
ingredients.

29/07/2013
042000 / 1
AECOM Middle East

Unit Masonry
Avenue - Phase 2
J.
1.
Include test reports for mortar mixes required in accordance with the Specification. Test
according to ASTM C109/ C109M for compressive strength, ASTM C1506 for water retention
and ASTM C91 for air content.
2.
Include test reports, according to ASTM C1019, for grout mixes required in accordance with
compressive strength requirement.
Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type and
mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar
type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to Tables 1 and 2
in ACI 530.1/ ASCE 6/ TMS 602.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION
A.
Source of Supply: Obtain products from manufacturers with at least 10 years' experience of producing
similar items.
B.
Type BLK-301 Common Blockwork
2.2
1.
Description: Common concrete blockwork.
2.
Manufacturer: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
3.
Type: Hollow and solid blocks.
4.
Size: 400mm x 200mm.
5.
Thickness: As indicated on the Design Drawings.
6.
Minimum Average Compressive Strength: To be confirmed by Engineer.
7.
Density: To be confirmed by Engineer.
8.
Thermal Conductivity: To be confirmed by Engineer.
A.
Specific Movements and Deflections

1.
Refer to the Structural Specification.
2.
The work shall be detailed and installed to allow for and withstand all deflections and tolerances
of the main structural elements under all design loads or combination of loads without damage or
any reduction in the performance of the work.
3.
All fastenings shall be capable of providing the correct degree of movement required for the
circumstances involved, to suit deflections specified and to provide adequate stability for the
work.
4.
Movement joints shall be provided to accommodate all movements of the building structure.
5.
Control joints shall be located at all junctions with adjoining work as indicated on the Design
Drawings.
B.
Loads: The work shall be detailed and installed to achieve adequate and satisfactory performance in
accordance with the conditions specified in International Building Code.
C.
Acoustic, General
D.
E.
1.
Refer to the Acoustic Report.
2.
The work shall provide the degree of acoustic insulation as defined by the Specification.
3.
Evidence that the acoustic performance requirements given herein are adhered to shall be
provided.
Fire Requirements
1.
All elements of the work shall be either non-combustible or not easily ignitable with low flame
spread characteristics, and shall not produce excessive quantities of smoke or toxic gases.
2.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: In accordance with UL 723 and ASTM E84.
3.
All requirements for resistance of fire shall be in accordance with the provisions of the NFPA and
the Fire Strategy Report.
4.
The work shall achieve the fire ratings as indicated on the Design Drawings and tested for fire
resistance in accordance with ASTM E119 by a Qualified Testing Agency. Identify products with
appropriate markings of applicable Testing Agency.
5.
Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another
Qualified Testing Agency.
6.
Combustion Characteristics: In accordance with ASTM E136.
7.
Ensure a tight fit between the work and cavity barriers to prevent fire and smoke penetration.
8.
Ensure that insulation used within the building is non-combustible.
9.
Furnish test certificates accordingly, as and when required by the Engineer.
Durability: The work shall be selected for durability in relation to conditions of use and shall meet the
minimum requirements in accordance with the conditions specified in International Building Code.

29/07/2013
042000 / 2
AECOM Middle East

Unit Masonry
Avenue - Phase 2
2.3
MATERIALS
A.
Masonry Units, General

1.
Consistency of Fair-Faced Work:

a)
Agree with the manufacturer and the Engineer, methods for ensuring that the supply of
masonry units to remain visible is of a consistent, even color/ texture range, batch to batch
and within batches.
b)
Check each delivery for consistency of appearance with previous deliveries and with
accepted samples or reference panels; do not use if variation is excessive.
c)
Mix units from different packs and deliveries, which vary in color to avoid undesirable
variations, patches, horizontal stripes and racking back marks in the finished work.
2.
Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to
contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units
where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work.
3.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units in accordance with the requirements for
fire-resistance ratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E119, by equivalent
masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
4.
Concrete Masonry Units:

a)
b)
Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed
faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers,
bonding, and other special conditions.
2.
Provide ***square-edged/ bullnose*** units for outside corners unless otherwise

indicated.
Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with integral water repellent for exposed units
and where indicated.
1.
B.
Integral Water Repellent: Liquid polymeric, integral water-repellent admixture that does
not reduce flexural bond strength. Units made with integral water repellent, when
tested according to ASTM E514 as a wall assembly made with mortar containing
integral water-repellent manufacturer's mortar additive, with test period extended to 24
hours, shall show no visible water or leaks on the back of test specimen.
c)
Exposed Faces: Provide color and texture matching the range represented by the
Engineer's sample.
d)
Faces to Receive Plaster: Where units are indicated to receive a direct application of
plaster, provide textured-face units made with gap-graded aggregates.
e)
CMUs: In accordance with ASTM C90.
f)
Concrete Facing Brick: In accordance with ASTM C1634.
Mortar and Grout Materials:

1.
Portland Cement: In accordance with ASTM C150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for
cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar
color indicated.
2.
Hydrated Lime: In accordance with ASTM C207, Type S.
3.
Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no
other ingredients.
4.
Masonry Cement: In accordance with ASTM C91.
5.
Mortar Cement: In accordance with ASTM C1329.
6.
Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use
in mortar mixes and in accordance with ASTM C979. Use only pigments with a record of
satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.
7.
Colored Cement Product: Packaged blend made from portland cement and hydrated lime and
mortar pigments, all in accordance with specified requirements, and containing no other
ingredients.
8.
a)
Formulate blend as required to produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected from
manufacturer's standard colors.
b)
Pigments shall not exceed 10% of portland cement by weight.
c)
Pigments shall not exceed 5% of ***masonry cement ***or*** mortar cement*** by weight.
Aggregate for Mortar: In accordance with ASTM C144.

a)
For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or
crushed stone.
b)
For joints less than 6mm thick, use aggregate graded with 100% passing the 1.18mm sieve.
c)
White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone.

29/07/2013
042000 / 3
AECOM Middle East

Unit Masonry
Avenue - Phase 2
d)
9.
Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce

required mortar color.
Aggregate for Grout: In accordance with ASTM C404.
10. Epoxy Pointing Mortar: In accordance with ASTM C395, epoxy-resin-based material formulated
for use as pointing mortar for structural-clay tile facing units (and approved for such use by
manufacturer of units); in color indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by the
Engineer from manufacturer's colors.
11. Cold-Weather Admixture: Non-chloride, non-corrosive, accelerating admixture in accordance with
ASTM C494/ C494M, Type C, and recommended by the manufacturer for use in masonry mortar
of composition indicated.
12. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with CMUs
containing integral water repellent by the same manufacturer.
13. Water: Potable.
C.
Reinforcement
1.
Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: In accordance with ASTM A615/ A615M or ASTM A996/
A996M, Grade 420.
2.
Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: In accordance with ASTM A951/ A951M.
3.
Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single
pair of side rods.
4.
Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Multi-wythe Masonry:

a)
5.
D.
Ladder type with 1 No. side rod at each face shell of hollow masonry units more than
100mm wide.
Masonry joint reinforcement for veneers anchored with seismic masonry-veneer anchors.
Ties and Anchors

1.
2.
3.
Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this Work Section that are made from materials
in accordance with the following unless otherwise indicated:
a)
Mill-Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A82/ A82M; with ASTM A641/ A641M, Class 1
coating.
b)
Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A82/ A82M; with ASTM A153/ A153M,
Class B-2 coating.
c)
Stainless Steel Wire: ASTM A580/ A580M, Type 304.
d)
Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/ A653M, Commercial Steel, Z180 zinc coating.
e)
Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A1008/ A1008M, commercial steel, with
ASTM A153/ A153M, Class B coating.
f)
Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, Type 304.
g)
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36/ A36M.
h)
Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A276 or ASTM A666, Type 304.
Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structural Steel Framing: Provide anchors that allow
vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to
plane of wall.
a)
Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped hot-dip galvanized steel wire.
Mill-galvanized wire may be used at interior walls unless otherwise indicated.
b)
Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie hot-dip galvanized steel wire. Mill-galvanized wire
may be used at interior walls unless otherwise indicated.
Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Concrete: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal
adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall.
a)
Connector Section: Dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and attached to
tie section; formed from 1.52mm thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication.
1.
Galvanized sheet may be used at interior walls unless otherwise indicated.
b)
Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie made from hot-dip galvanized steel Mill-galvanized
wire may be used at interior walls unless otherwise indicated.
c)
Corrugated Metal Ties: Metal strips not less than 22mm wide with corrugations having a
wavelength of 7.6mm to 12.7mm and an amplitude of 1.5mm to 2.5mm made from stainless
steel sheet with dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and sized to extend
to within 25mm of masonry face.
1.
4.
Partition Top Anchors: Metal plate with metal rod welded to plate and with closed-end plastic
tube fitted over rod that allows rod to move in and out of tube. Fabricate from steel, hot-dip
galvanized after fabrication.
5.
Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars with ends turned up with cross pins unless otherwise
indicated or bent to configuration indicated.

29/07/2013
042000 / 4
AECOM Middle East

Unit Masonry
Avenue - Phase 2
a)
E.
F.
1.
Unit Type Inserts in Concrete: Cast-iron or malleable-iron wedge-type inserts.
2.
Dovetail Slots in Concrete: Furnish dovetail slots with filler strips, of slot size indicated, fabricated
from galvanized steel sheet.
3.
Anchor Bolts: Headed or L-shaped steel bolts in accordance with ASTM F568M, Property Class
4.6; with ASTM A563M hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized in
accordance with ASTM A153/ A153M, Class C; of dimensions indicated.
4.
Post-installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.
2.
H.
Load Capacity: Capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load
imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in
concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E488, conducted by a Qualified
Independent Testing Agency.
b)
ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941M, Class Fe/ Zn 5 unless otherwise indicated.
c)
Material for Exterior Locations and where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group A1
Group A4 stainless steel bolts, ASTM F738M, and nuts, ASTM F836M.
Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing in accordance with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual" and as follows:
a)
Stainless Steel: In accordance with ASTM A240/ A240M, Type 304.
b)
Copper: In accordance with ASTM B370, Temper H00, cold-rolled copper sheet, or ASTM
B370, Temper H01, high-yield copper sheet.
c)
Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 2400mm long minimum, but not exceeding
3700mm. Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal flashing.
Application: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following:

a)
Where flashing is indicated to receive counterflashing, use metal flashing.
b)
Where flashing is indicated to be turned down at or beyond the wall face, use metal
flashing.
c)
Where flashing is partly exposed and is indicated to terminate at the wall face, use metal
flashing with a drip edge with a sealant stop.
d)
Where flashing is fully concealed, use metal flashing or flexible flashing.
3.
Single-Wythe CMU Flashing System: System of CMU cell flashing pans and interlocking CMU
web covers made from high-density polyethylene incorporating chemical stabilizers that prevent
UV degradation. Cell flashing pans have integral weep spouts that are designed to be built into
mortar bed joints and weep collected moisture to the exterior of CMU walls and that extend into
the cell to prevent clogging with mortar.
4.
Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products
or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other
and to substrates.
Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories

1.
Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips in accordance with ASTM D1056, Grade 2A1;
compressible up to 35%; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene, urethane
or PVC.
2.
Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, in

accordance with ASTM D2000, Designation M2AA-805 or PVC, in accordance with ASTM
D2287, Type PVC-65406 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability
in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.
3.
Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt in accordance with ASTM D226,
Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).
4.
Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry
unit cells and hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 3.77mm steel wire,
hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars indicated.
Masonry Cleaners
1.
I.
a)
Embedded Flashing Materials

1.
G.
Corrosion Protection: Hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153/ A153M.
Miscellaneous Anchors
Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing

mortar/ grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without
discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly accepted for intended use by
cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.
Mortar and Grout Mixes

1.
General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,

retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise
indicated.

29/07/2013
042000 / 5
AECOM Middle East

Unit Masonry
Avenue - Phase 2
a)
Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
b)
Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated.
c)
For exterior masonry, use portland cement-lime mortar.
d)
For reinforced masonry, use portland cement-lime mortar.
e)
Add cold weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view,
regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.
2.
Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure
quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before
delivering to Site.
3.
Mortar for Unit Masonry: In accordance with ASTM C270. Provide the following types of mortar
for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to provide required
compressive strength of masonry.
4.
5.
6.
a)
For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M or Type S.
b)
For reinforced masonry, use Type S or Type N.
c)
For mortar parge coats, use Type S or Type N.
d)
For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for
interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other applications
where another type is not indicated, use Type N.
e)
For interior non-load-bearing partitions, Type O may be used instead of Type N.
Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product or select and proportion pigments with other
ingredients to produce color required. Do not add pigments to colored cement products.
a)
b)
Pigments shall not exceed 5% of masonry cement or mortar cement by weight.
c)
Mix to match Engineer's sample.
Grout for Unit Masonry: In accordance with ASTM C476.

a)
Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) in
accordance with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ ASCE 6/ TMS 602 for dimensions of grout
spaces and pour height.
b)
Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C476, Table 1 or paragraph 4.2.2 for specified
28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 14MPa.
c)
Provide grout with a slump of 203 to 279mm/ 254 to 279mm as measured in accordance
with ASTM C143/ C143M.
Epoxy Pointing Mortar: Mix epoxy pointing mortar in accordance with mortar manufacturer's
written instructions.
End of Section

29/07/2013
042000 / 6
AECOM Middle East

Unit Masonry
Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 042113 BRICK MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1
1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
PRODUCT SELECTION
MATERIALS

29/07/2013
2
2
3
042113
AECOM Middle East

Brick Masonry
Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 042113 BRICK MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
General: Read this Work Section in conjunction with other related Work Sections, Division 01 General
Requirements, the Design Drawings and the Contract Conditions.
B.
C.
D.
1.2
1.
2.
3.

1.
London stock brick.
2.
All required accessories.
Design Drawings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C1093 for testing indicated.
B.
1.
2.
3.
Operatives shall possess a National Vocational Qualification (NVQ) in Trowel Occupations or an

acceptable equivalent qualification.
C.
Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or
a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, ***from a single source
manufacturer for each product required.***
D.
Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color,
for exposed masonry, from a single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from a single
source or producer for each aggregate.
E.
Masonry Standard: In accordance with ACI 530.1/ ASCE 6/ TMS 602 unless modified by requirements
in the Contract Documents.
F.
Sample Panels: Prior to commencement of the work, a sample panel of each type of walling, with all
options of mortar specified, in panel sizes of nominally 1800mm x 1800mm shall be built on Site. The
sample panels shall be constructed in an agreed location using randomly selected masonry units but
rejecting any that are damaged. Acceptance from the Engineer shall be obtained prior to
commencement of construction for that type. If a panel is rejected, construct other sample panels of
each type until acceptance is obtained from the Engineer.
G.
Provide mock-ups, prototypes, quality benchmark installations, testing and inspections in accordance
with Division 01 General Requirements, Section 014000 Quality Requirements.
H.
Mock-ups
1.
I.
Prototypes
1.
J.
First 10m of each type in locations to be agreed incorporating anchorage, reinforcement and
accessories where required.

1.
L.
Quality Benchmark Installation

1.
K.
Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a Qualified Independent Testing Agency to perform

preconstruction testing indicated below. Retesting of materials that fail in accordance with
specified requirements shall be done at the Contractor's expense.
a)
Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to ASTM C109/
C109M for compressive strength, ASTM C1506 for water retention and ASTM C91 for air
content.
b)
Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix required, according to ASTM C1019.
c)
Prism Test: For each type of construction required, according to ASTM C1314.
Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following.

29/07/2013
042113 / 1
AECOM Middle East

Brick Masonry
Avenue - Phase 2
1.
M.
N.
Masonry Units.
a)
Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements.
b)
For masonry units, include data and calculations establishing average net-area compressive
strength of units.
2.
Cementitious Materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer.
3.
Pre-blended, Dry Mortar Mixes: Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
4.
Grout Mixes: Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
5.
Reinforcing bars.
6.
Joint reinforcement.
7.
Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.
Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout, include description of type and proportions of
ingredients.
1.
Include test reports for mortar mixes required in accordance with the Specification. Test
according to ASTM C109/ C109M for compressive strength, ASTM C1506 for water retention
and ASTM C91 for air content.
2.
Include test reports, according to ASTM C1019, for grout mixes required in accordance with
compressive strength requirement.
Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type and
mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar
type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to Tables 1 and 2
in ACI 530.1/ ASCE 6/ TMS 602.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION
A.
Source of Supply: Obtain products from manufacturers with at least 10 years' experience of producing
similar items.
B.
Type BRK-101 London Stock Brick Cladding
2.2
1.
Description: London stock brick, half cut.
2.
3.
Pattern: Herring bone.
4.
Finish: Tumbled.
5.
Colour: Terra Cotta Red.
6.
Fixing: Provide grade 316L stainless steel sub-frame with same grade stainless steel stone fixing
cleats.
A.
Specific Movements and Deflections

1.
Refer to the Structural Specification.
2.
The work shall be installed to allow for and withstand all deflections and tolerances of the main
structural elements under all design loads or combination of loads without damage or any
reduction in the performance of the work.
3.
All fastenings shall be capable of providing the correct degree of movement required for the
circumstances involved, to suit deflections specified and to provide adequate stability for the
work.
4.
Movement joints shall be provided to accommodate all movements of the building structure.
5.
Control joints shall be located at all junctions with adjoining work as indicated on the Design
Drawings.
B.
Loads: The work shall be installed to achieve adequate and satisfactory performance in accordance
with the conditions specified in International Building Code.
C.
Fire Requirements
1.
2.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: In accordance with UL 723 and ASTM E84.
3.
The work shall achieve the specified fire ratings, including all visible and concealed support
framing.
4.
All requirements for resistance of fire shall be in accordance with the provisions of the NFPA and
the Fire Strategy Report.
5.
The work shall achieve the fire ratings as indicated on the Design Drawings and tested for fire
resistance in accordance with ASTM E119 by a Qualified Testing Agency. Identify products with
appropriate markings of applicable Testing Agency.

29/07/2013
042113 / 2
AECOM Middle East

Brick Masonry
Avenue - Phase 2
6.
Qualified Testing Agency.
7.
Combustion Characteristics: In accordance with ASTM E136.
8.
Ensure a tight fit between the work and cavity barriers to prevent fire and smoke penetration.
9.
Ensure that insulation used within the building is non-combustible.
10. Furnish test certificates accordingly, as and when required by the Engineer.
D.
2.3
Durability: The work shall be selected for durability in relation to conditions of use and shall meet the
minimum requirements in accordance with the conditions specified in International Building Code.
MATERIALS
A.
Brick Masonry Units, General

1.
Consistency of Brick Masonry Work:

a)
Agree with the manufacturer and the Engineer, methods for ensuring that the supply of
concrete masonry units to remain visible is of a consistent, even color/ texture range, batch
to batch and within batches.
b)
Check each delivery for consistency of appearance with previous deliveries and with
accepted samples or reference panels; do not use if variation is excessive.
c)
Mix units from different packs and deliveries, which vary in color to avoid undesirable
variations, patches, horizontal stripes and racking back marks in the finished work.
2.
Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to
contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units
where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work.
3.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units in accordance with requirements for
fire-resistance ratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E119, by equivalent
masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
4.
Brick Masonry Units:

a)
b)
Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed
faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers,
bonding, and other special conditions.
2.
Provide square-edged/ bullnose units for outside corners unless otherwise indicated.
Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with integral water repellent for exposed units
and where indicated.
1.
B.
Integral Water Repellent: Liquid polymeric, integral water-repellent admixture that does
not reduce flexural bond strength. Units made with integral water repellent, when
tested according to ASTM E514 as a wall assembly made with mortar containing
integral water-repellent manufacturer's mortar additive, with test period extended to 24
hours, shall show no visible water or leaks on the back of test specimen.
c)
Exposed Faces: Provide color and texture matching the range represented by the
Engineer's sample.
d)
Faces to Receive Plaster: Where units are indicated to receive a direct application of
plaster, provide textured-face units made with gap-graded aggregates.
e)
Concrete Facing Brick: In accordance with ASTM C1634.
Mortar and Grout Materials

1.
Portland Cement: In accordance with ASTM C150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for
cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar
color indicated.
2.
3.
Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no
other ingredients.
4.
Masonry Cement: In accordance with ASTM C91.
5.
Mortar Cement: In accordance with ASTM C1329.
6.
Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in
mortar mixes and in accordance with ASTM C979. Use only pigments with a record of
satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.
7.
Colored Cement Product: Packaged blend made from portland cement and hydrated lime and
mortar pigments, all in accordance with specified requirements, and containing no other
ingredients.
8.
a)
Formulate blend as required to produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected from
manufacturer's standard colors.
b)
Aggregate for Mortar: In accordance with ASTM C144.

29/07/2013
042113 / 3
AECOM Middle East

Brick Masonry
Avenue - Phase 2
9.
a)
For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or
crushed stone.
b)
For joints less than 6mm thick, use aggregate graded with 100% passing the 1.18mm sieve.
c)
White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone.
d)
Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce

required mortar color.
Aggregate for Grout: In accordance with ASTM C404.
10. Epoxy Pointing Mortar: In accordance with ASTM C395, epoxy-resin-based material formulated
for use as pointing mortar for structural-clay tile facing units (and accepted for such use by
manufacturer of units); in color indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by the
Engineer from manufacturer's colors.
11. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with bricks
containing integral water repellent by the same manufacturer.
12. Water: Potable.
C.
D.
Reinforcement
1.
Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: In accordance with ASTM A615/ A615M or ASTM A996/
A996M, Grade 420.
2.
Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: In accordance with ASTM A951/ A951M.
3.
Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single
pair of side rods.
4.
Masonry joint reinforcement for veneers anchored with seismic masonry-veneer anchors.
Ties and Anchors

1.
Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this Work Section that are made from materials
in accordance with the following unless otherwise indicated:
a)
Mill-Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A82/ A82M; with ASTM A641/ A641M, Class 1
coating.
b)
Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A82/ A82M; with ASTM A153/ A153M,
Class B-2 coating.
c)
Stainless Steel Wire: ASTM A580/ A580M, Type 316L.
d)
Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/ A 53M, Commercial Steel, Z180 zinc coating.
e)
Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A1008/ A1008M, commercial steel, with
ASTM A153/ A153M, Class B coating.
f)
Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, Type 316L.
g)
h)
Stainless Steel Bars: ASTM A276 or ASTM A666, Type 304.
2.
wavelength of 7.6mm to 12.7mm and an amplitude of 1.5mm to 2.5mm made from stainless steel
sheet.
3.
Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway through
veneer but with at least 16mm cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires are bent 90 and
extend 50mm parallel to face of veneer.
4.
Individual Wire Ties: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 100mm wide.
5.
6.
a)
Z-shaped ties with ends bent 90 to provide hooks not less than 50mm long may be used
for masonry constructed from solid units.
b)
Where wythes do not align/ are of different materials, use adjustable ties with pintle-and-eye
connections having a maximum adjustment of 32mm.
c)
Wire: Fabricate from stainless steel wire.
Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structural Steel Framing: Provide anchors that allow
vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to
plane of wall.
a)
Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped stainless steel wire.
b)
Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie stainless steel wire.
Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Concrete: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal
adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall.
a)
Connector Section: Dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and attached to
tie section; formed from 2.78mm thick, stainless steel sheet.
1.
b)
Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie made from stainless steel wire.

29/07/2013
042113 / 4
AECOM Middle East

Brick Masonry
Avenue - Phase 2
c)
wavelength of 7.6mm to 12.7mm and an amplitude of 1.5mm to 2.5mm made from stainless
steel sheet with dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and sized to extend
to within 25mm of masonry face.
1.
7.
Partition Top Anchors: Metal plate with metal rod welded to plate and with closed-end plastic
tube fitted over rod that allows rod to move in and out of tube. Fabricate from stainless steel.
8.
Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars with ends turned up with cross pins unless otherwise
indicated.
a)
9.
Corrosion Protection: Hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153/ A153M.
Adjustable Masonry-Veneer Anchors:

a)
General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and compression
forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to wood or metal studs,
and as follows:
1.
Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 445N load in both

tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 1.3mm.
b)
Contractor's Option: Unless otherwise indicated, provide any of the following types of
anchors.
c)
Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie and a metal anchor
section.
d)
1.
Anchor Section: Rib-stiffened, sheet metal plate with screw holes top and bottom, with
projecting tabs having slotted holes for inserting vertical legs of wire tie specially
formed to fit anchor section.
2.
Anchor Section: Sheet metal plate, with screw holes top and bottom and with raised
rib-stiffened strap, stamped into center to provide a slot between strap and plate for
inserting wire tie.
3.
*Anchor Section: Gasketed sheet metal plate, with screw holes top and bottom; top
and bottom ends bent to form pronged legs of length to match thickness of insulation
or sheathing; and raised rib-stiffened strap, stamped into center to provide a slot
between strap and plate for inserting wire tie. Provide anchor manufacturer's standard,
self-adhering, modified bituminous gaskets manufactured to fit behind anchor plate and
extend beyond pronged legs.
4.
Anchor Section: Corrosion-resistant, self-drilling, eye-screw designed to receive wire

tie. Eye-screw has spacer that seats directly against framing and is same thickness as
sheathing and has gasketed, washer head that covers hole in sheathing.
5.
Fabricate sheet metal anchor sections and other sheet metal parts from stainless steel
sheet.
6.
Wire Ties: Triangular-, rectangular-, or T-shaped wire ties fabricated from stainless
steel wire.
Slip-in, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie section and an anchor
section designed to interlock with metal studs and be slipped into place as sheathing is
installed.
1.
e)
Wire-Type Anchor: Bent wire anchor section with an eye to receive the wire tie. Wire
tie has a vertical leg that slips into the eye of anchor section and allows vertical
adjustment. Both sections are made from hot-dip galvanized wire.
Seismic Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a metal anchor section and a

connector section designed to engage a continuous wire embedded in the veneer mortar
joint.
1.
Anchor Section: Rib-stiffened, sheet metal plate with screw holes top and bottom; with
projecting tabs having slotted holes for inserting vertical leg of connector section.
2.
Connector Section: Rib-stiffened, sheet metal bent plate with down-turned leg
designed to fit in anchor section slot and with integral tabs designed to engage
continuous wire. Size connector shall extend at least halfway through veneer but with
at least 16mm cover on outside face.
3.
Anchor Section: Rib-stiffened, sheet metal plate with screw holes top and bottom; with
projecting tabs having slotted holes for inserting vertical legs of wire tie specially
formed to fit anchor section. Size wire tie to extend at least 38mm into veneer but with
at least 16mm cover on outside face.
4.
Connector Section: Sheet metal clip welded to wire tie with integral tabs designed to
engage continuous wire.
5.
Anchor Section: Gasketed sheet metal plate, with screw holes top and bottom; top and
bottom ends bent to form pronged legs to bridge insulation or sheathing and contact
studs; and raised rib-stiffened strap, 16mm wide by 152mm long, stamped into center
to provide a slot between strap and plate for inserting wire tie. Provide anchor
manufacturer's standard, self-adhering, modified bituminous gaskets manufactured to
fit behind anchor plate and extend beyond pronged legs.

29/07/2013
042113 / 5
AECOM Middle East

Brick Masonry
Avenue - Phase 2
E.
F.
6.
Connector Section: Triangular wire tie and rigid PVC extrusion with snap-in grooves for
inserting continuous wire. Size wire tie shall extend at least halfway through veneer but
with at least 16mm cover on outside face.
7.
Fabricate sheet metal anchor sections and other sheet metal parts from stainless steel
sheet.
8.
Fabricate wire connector sections from stainless steel wire.
f)
Polymer-Coated, Steel Drill Screws for Steel Studs: ASTM C954 except manufactured with
hex washer head and neoprene or EPDM washer, length suitable to penetrate steel stud
flange with not less than 3 No. exposed threads, and with organic polymer coating with
salt-spray resistance to red rust of more than 800 hours in accordance with ASTM B117.
g)
Stainless Steel Drill Screws for Steel Studs: Proprietary fastener consisting of carbon-steel
drill point and 300 Series stainless steel shank, in accordance with ASTM C954 except
manufactured with hex washer head and neoprene or EPDM washer, length suitable to
penetrate steel stud flange with not less than 3 No. exposed threads.
Miscellaneous Anchors
1.
Unit Type Inserts in Concrete: Cast-iron or malleable-iron wedge-type inserts.
2.
Dovetail Slots in Concrete: Furnish dovetail slots with filler strips, of slot size indicated, fabricated
from galvanized steel sheet.
3.
Anchor Bolts: Headed or L-shaped steel bolts in accordance with ASTM F568M, Property Class
4.6; with ASTM A563M hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized in
accordance with ASTM A153/ A153M, Class C; of dimensions indicated.
4.
Post-installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.

a)
Load Capacity: Capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load
imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in
b)
ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941M, Class Fe/ Zn 5 unless otherwise indicated.
Embedded Flashing Materials

1.
2.
Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing in accordance with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual and as follows:
a)
Stainless Steel: In accordance with ASTM A240/ A240M, Type 304.
b)
Copper: In accordance with ASTM B370, Temper H00, cold-rolled copper sheet, or ASTM
B370, Temper H01, high-yield copper sheet.
c)
Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 2400mm long minimum, but not exceeding
3700mm. Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal flashing.
d)
Fabricate through-wall metal flashing embedded in masonry from stainless steel, with ribs at
76mm intervals along length of flashing to provide an integral mortar bond.
e)
Fabricate through-wall flashing with snaplock receiver on exterior face where indicated to
receive counterflashing.
f)
Fabricate through-wall flashing with drip edge unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate by
extending flashing 13mm out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 and hemmed.
g)
Fabricate through-wall flashing with sealant stop unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate by
bending metal back on itself 19mm at exterior face of wall and down into joint 6mm to form
a stop for retaining sealant backer rod.
h)
Fabricate metal drip edges and sealant stops for ribbed metal flashing from plain metal
flashing of same metal as ribbed flashing and extending at least 76mm into wall with
hemmed inner edge to receive ribbed flashing and form a hooked seam. Form hem on
upper surface of metal so that completed seam will shed water.
i)
Metal Drip Edge: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 76mm into wall and 13mm
out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 and hemmed.
j)
Metal Sealant Stop: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 76mm into wall and out
to exterior face of wall. At exterior face of wall, bend metal back on itself for 19mm and
down into joint 6mm to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod.
k)
Metal Expansion-Joint Strips: Fabricate from stainless steel to shapes indicated.
Flexible Flashing
a)
Copper-Laminated Flashing: Copper sheet bonded between 2 No. layers of glass-fiber

cloth. Use only where flashing is fully concealed in masonry.
b)
Asphalt-Coated Copper Flashing: Copper sheet coated with flexible asphalt. Use only where
flashing is fully concealed in masonry.
c)
Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable, adhesive

rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film
to produce an overall thickness of not less than 1.02mm.

29/07/2013
042113 / 6
AECOM Middle East

Brick Masonry
Avenue - Phase 2
1.
d)
e)
3.
4.
5.
G.
H.
Elastomeric Thermoplastic Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a

polyester-reinforced ethylene interpolymer alloy.
1.
Monolithic Sheet: Elastomeric thermoplastic flashing.
2.
Self-Adhesive Sheet: Elastomeric thermoplastic flashing with coating of adhesive.
3.
Self-Adhesive Sheet with Drip Edge: Elastomeric thermoplastic flashing, with a coating
of rubberized-asphalt adhesive. Where flashing extends to face of masonry,
rubberized-asphalt coating is held back approximately 38mm from edge. Color: To be
confirmed by the Engineer.
4.
Accessories: Provide preformed corners, end dams, other special shapes, and
seaming materials produced by flashing manufacturer.
EPDM Flashing: Sheet flashing product made from ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer, in

accordance with ASTM D4637, 1mm thick.
Application: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following:

a)
Where flashing is indicated to receive counterflashing, use metal flashing.
b)
Where flashing is indicated to be turned down at or beyond the wall face, use metal
flashing.
c)
Where flashing is partly exposed and is indicated to terminate at the wall face, use metal
flashing with a drip edge or with a sealant stop.
d)
Where flashing is fully concealed, use metal flashing or flexible flashing.
a)
Solder for Stainless Steel: In accordance with ASTM B32, Grade Sn60, with acid flux of type
recommended by stainless steel sheet manufacturer.
b)
Solder for Copper: In accordance with ASTM B32, Grade Sn50, 50% tin and 50% lead.
c)
Elastomeric Sealant: In accordance with ASTM C920.
Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products
or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other
and to substrates.
Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories

1.
Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips in accordance with ASTM D1056, Grade 2A1;
compressible up to 35%; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene, urethane
or PVC.
2.
Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, in

accordance with ASTM D2000, Designation M2AA-805 or PVC, in accordance with ASTM
D2287, Type PVC-65406 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability
in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.
3.
Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt in accordance with ASTM D226,
Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).
Masonry Cleaners
1.
I.
Accessories: Provide preformed corners, end dams, other special shapes and seaming
materials produced by flashing manufacturer.
Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing

mortar/ grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without
discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly accepted for intended use by
cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.
Mortar and Grout Mixes

1.
General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,

retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise
indicated.
a)
Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
b)
Use portland cement-lime unless otherwise indicated.
c)
For exterior masonry, use portland cement-lime.
d)
For reinforced masonry, use portland cement-lime mortar.
2.
Pre-blended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a pre-blended mix.
Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients
before delivering to Site.
3.
Mortar for Unit Masonry: In accordance with ASTM C270. Provide the following types of mortar
for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to provide required
compressive strength of masonry.
a)
For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M/ Type S.
b)
For reinforced masonry, use Type S/ Type N.
c)
For mortar parge coats, use Type S or Type N.

29/07/2013
042113 / 7
AECOM Middle East

Brick Masonry
Avenue - Phase 2
4.
5.
d)
For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for
interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other applications
where another type is not indicated, use Type N.
e)
For interior non-load-bearing partitions, Type O may be used instead of Type N.
Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product or select and proportion pigments with other
ingredients to produce color required. Do not add pigments to colored cement products.
a)
b)
Pigments shall not exceed 5% of masonry cement or mortar cement by weight.
c)
Mix to match Engineer's sample.
d)
Application: Use pigmented mortar for exposed mortar joints if indicated on the Design
Drawings.
Epoxy Pointing Mortar: Mix epoxy pointing mortar in accordance with mortar manufacturer's
written instructions.
a)
Application: Use epoxy pointing mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following units:
1.
Glazed brick.
2.
Glazed structural-clay facing tile.

End of Section

29/07/2013
042113 / 8
AECOM Middle East

Brick Masonry
Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 044200 EXTERIOR STONE CLADDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1
1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
PRODUCT SELECTION
DESIGN CRITERIA
MATERIALS

29/07/2013
2
3
3
5
8
044200
AECOM Middle East

Exterior Stone Cladding
Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 044200 EXTERIOR STONE CLADDING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.

1.
2.
3.
4.
manufacture.
5.
Section Includes
1.
Exterior stone slab wall cladding panels.

a)
C.
1.2
Panels mechanically anchored on prefabricated steel strongback frames.
2.
Stone Cladding Trim units.
3.
Stone Cladding Fins.
Drawing Description References: The reference codes and accompanying descriptions are contained
in the Technical Reference Sheet (TRS) and identify systems/ components/ products indicated on the
Design Drawings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing dimension stone cladding systems
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has a record of
successful in-service performance.
1.
B.
A specialist is certified to ISO 9001 or operates a similar quality system acceptable to the
Engineer, and has a full time experienced foreman who is acceptable to the Engineer.
Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate dimension stone
cladding systems similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of
successful in-service performance.
1.
Fabricator's responsibilities include fabricating dimension stone cladding and providing

professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility.
2.
Engineering Responsibility: Comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional

engineer.
3.
A specialist who is certified to ISO 9001 or operates a similar quality system acceptable to the
Engineer, and has a full time experienced foreman who is acceptable to the Engineer.
C.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing
indicated.
D.
Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain each variety of stone, regardless of finish, from a single quarry
with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.
1.
For stone types that include same list of varieties and sources, provide same variety from same
source for each.
2.
Make quarried blocks available for examination by the Engineer for appearance characteristics.
E.
Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform quality for each
cementitious component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or
producer.
F.
Source Limitations for Other Materials: Obtain each type of stone accessory, sealant and other
material from a single manufacturer for each product.
G.
Preconstruction Stone Testing: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform

preconstruction testing indicated below.
1.
Furnish test specimens that are representative of materials proposed for incorporation into the
work.
2.
Physical Property Tests: For each stone variety proposed for use on Project, tested for
compliance with physical property requirements, other than abrasion resistance, according to
referenced ASTM standards.
3.
Flexural Strength Tests: For each combination of stone variety, thickness, orientation of cut, and
finish, proposed for use on Project, tested according to ASTM C 880, in both wet and dry
conditions.

29/07/2013
044200 / 1
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
4.
Anchorage Tests: For each combination of stone variety, orientation of cut, finish, and anchor
type proposed for use on Project, tested according to ASTM C 1354.
5.
Anchoring System Prototype Tests: For performance of stone anchoring system, evaluated for
compliance with requirements by prototype testing per ASTM C 1201, Procedure B, with a
maximum test load equal to 3 times the design load.
6.
Cladding System Prototype Tests: For performance of dimension stone cladding system,
evaluated for compliance with requirements by prototype testing per ASTM E 72, with a
maximum test load equal to 3 times the design load.
7.
Contractor is required to build test prototypes of representative portion of dimension stone

cladding system corresponding to area indicated on Drawings. Build test prototypes at testing
agency's facilities from same materials proposed for Project, using installers who will perform
same tasks for Project.
8.
Testing agency will report test results in writing to the Engineer and Contractor.
H.
Preconstruction Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers,

for compatibility and adhesion testing according to sealant manufacturer's standard testing methods
and Section 079200 Joint Sealants, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.
I.
Preconstruction Field Testing of Sealants: Before installing joint sealants, field test their adhesion to
joint substrates per requirements specified in Section 079200 Joint Sealants.
J.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to American Welding Society's (AWS) D1.1/
D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code--Steel"; AWS D1.2/ D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum";
and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
K.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
L.
Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Design Drawings.

a)
Show typical components, attachments to building structure, and methods of installation.
b)
Include sealant-filled joint complying with requirements in Section 079200 Joint Sealants.
c)
Include window opening with stone returns and trim.
Prototypes
1.
Prototype for testing purposes. Refer to testing requirements specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION
A.
B.
C.
Type EWS-424 Natural Stone Cladding - Lime Stone

1.
Stone Type: Lime Stone.
2.
Description: Rain screen system cladding.
3.
Cladding Finish: Honed.
4.
Cladding Thickness: 30mm.
5.
Cladding Dimensions: Refer to the Design Drawings.
6.
Anchor and Attachment Method: Standardised mechanical fixing.
7.
Edge to edge joints horizontally to have a routered / recessed 10mm edge.
8.
Wall to receive insulation on external face to provide the required U-value.
Type EWS-425 Natural Stone Cladding - Granite

1.
Stone Type: Granite.
2.
3.
Cladding Finish: Honed.
4.
5.
6.
Anchor and Attachment Method: Standardised mechanical fixing with 316L stainless steel
material.
7.
Type EWS-426 Natural Stone Cladding - Basalt

1.
Stone Type: Basalt.
2.
3.
Cladding Finish: Honed/ Antique flamed.
4.
5.
6.
Anchor and Attachment Method: Standardised mechanical fixing with 316L stainless steel
material.

29/07/2013
044200 / 2
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
7.
2.2
DESIGN CRITERIA
A.
Dimension Stone Cladding System Definition: An exterior wall covering system consisting of
dimension stone panels and trim together with anchors, backup structure, secondary weather barrier
(sheathing), adhesives, fasteners, and sealants used to secure the stone to building structure and to
produce a weather-resistant covering.
1.
Backup structure includes prefabricated steel trusses/ prefabricated steel strongback frames/
prefabricated steel stud frames/ metal-grid system/ and miscellaneous steel framing required to
secure stone to building structure.
B.
Nominal sizes of the natural stone cladding panels and stone fins shall be as indicated on the Design
Drawings.
C.
Stone corners shall be of 2mm Birds Mouth detail.
D.
Horizontal and vertical joints shall be 2mm open joints.
E.
Expansion and movement joints shall appear inconspicuous within the work.
F.
Panels shall incorporate suitable lifting brackets for hoisting panels into position. These shall not be
evident in terms of the final appearance of the work.
G.
System shall include all necessary shims and adjustable brackets necessary to accommodate
tolerances of the structural frame, whilst maintaining the visual intent of the Design Drawings.
H.
Cut-outs/ apertures to allow through fastening of architectural features/ signage to the building
structure as indicated on the Design Drawings, including provision of suitable seals/ sealants to
maintain the performance of the system.
I.
Incorporate services in accordance with the MEP Engineer's specification and drawings; where
necessary preformed apertures shall be created within the panels, including provision of suitable
seals/ sealants to maintain the performance of the system.
J.
All fastenings, framing, supports, brackets, sealants and accessories necessary to complete the work.
2.3
A.
General: Design stone anchors and anchoring systems according to ASTM C 1242.
B.
Structural Performance: Provide dimension stone cladding system capable of withstanding the effects
of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated.
1.
2.
C.
a)
Uniform pressure of 1436 Pa, acting inward or outward.
b)
Uniform pressure as indicated on the Design Drawings.
Equipment Loads: Allow for loads due to window cleaning and maintenance equipment.
Seismic Performance: Provide dimension stone cladding system capable of withstanding the effects of
earthquake motions determined according to ASCE 7.
1.
D.
Seismic Design Criteria: [......].
Thermal Movements: Provide dimension stone cladding system that allows for thermal movements
resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by
preventing displacement of stone, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint
sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on
surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1.
Temperature Change (Range):0C, ambient; 60C, material surfaces.
E.
Thermal Properties: Cavity insulation shall provide a maximum U-value for the whole wall section of
***0.35***W/ mK.
F.
Specific Dead Loads
G.
1.
The work shall accommodate its own dead loading without causing deflections or movements
which adversely affect the system itself or the supporting structure.
2.
Provide dead loading calculations for the installed system. This shall be expressed as the weight
in kN/ m, plus any other dead and imposed loadings transmitted to surrounding construction.
Specific Live Loads

1.
The work shall accommodate the following live loads without any reduction in performance.
a)
The prevailing wind loads to be determined as part of the Detailed Design.
b)
H.
I.
Shrinkage and Creep for concrete frame buildings only: Allow for progressive vertical shortening of

29/07/2013
044200 / 3
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
J.
K.
L.
Safety Factors for Stone: Design dimension stone cladding system to withstand loads indicated
without exceeding allowable working stress of stone determined by dividing stone's average ultimate
strength, as established by testing, by the following safety factors.
1.
Safety Factor for Granite: 3.
2.
Safety Factor for Oolitic Limestone: 8.
3.
Safety Factor for Dolomitic Limestone: 6.
4.
Safety Factor for Travertine: 8.
5.
Safety Factor for Concentrated Stresses: 4 for granite and 10 for stone varieties other than
granite.
Design stone anchors and backup structure to withstand loads indicated without exceeding allowable
working stresses established by the following.
1.
For Structural Steel: American Institute of Steel Construction's (AISC) "Specification for
Structural Steel Buildings - Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design."
2.
For Cold-Formed Steel: American Iron and Steel Institute's (AISI) "North American Specification
for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."
3.
For Cold-Formed Stainless Steel: American Society of Civil Engineers' ASCE 8, "Specification for
the Design of Cold-Formed Stainless Steel Structural Members."
4.
For Aluminum: The Aluminum Association, Inc's AA ADM-1, "The Aluminum Design Manual."
5.
For Cast-in-Place and Post-Installed Fasteners in Concrete: One-fourth of tested capacity when
installed in concrete with compressive strength indicated.
6.
For Post-Installed Fasteners in Masonry: One-sixth of tested capacity when installed in masonry
units indicated.
Limit deflection in each prefabricated assembly caused by indicated loads and thermal movements,
acting singly or in combination with one another, to not more than 1/ 720 of assembly's clear span or
the following, whichever is smaller.
1.
1.5mm, measured in plane of wall.
2.
6mm, measured perpendicular to wall.
M.
Provisions for Fabrication and Erection Tolerances: Allow for fabrication and erection tolerances of
building's structural system.
N.
Provision for Deflection of Building Structure: Allow for the following.
O.
P.
1.
Deflection due to Weight of Dimension Stone Cladding System: Allow for 6mm vertical deflection
in 6m span of structural members supporting dimension stone cladding system.
2.
Live Load Deflection: Allow for 6mm vertical deflection, in 6m span of structural members
supporting dimension stone cladding system, due to live loads imposed on building's structural
frame after stone installation.
Leakage Resistance, Water and Air, General

1.
Prevent airflow from the outside to the inside of the building through joints and junctions to avoid
areas of concentrated airflow.
2.
Air leakage shall be distributed and not concentrated at any one location.
3.
Provide air leakage test results to demonstrate compliance.
Leakage Resistance, Water and Air, for Prefabricated Panels: Provide dimension stone cladding
system that complies with the following.
1.
Air Infiltration: Not more than 0.3L/ s per m of wall area, as measured by testing mockup in
accordance with ASTM E 283 at a differential pressure of 75Pa.
2.
Water Penetration: No uncontrolled water penetration beyond plane of back of dimension stone
cladding system that is not contained or drained back to exterior, as measured by testing mockup
per ASTM E 331 at a differential pressure of 20% of positive design wind load, but not less than
479Pa.
Q.
Control of Corrosion and Staining: Prevent galvanic and other forms of corrosion as well as staining
by isolating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. Use materials
that do not stain exposed surfaces of stone and joint materials.
R.
Moisture Movement
1.
The work shall withstand the following movement without permanent deformation or any
reduction in the specified performance:
a)
Due to changes in the moisture content of its components, resulting from variations in the
moisture content of the air.
b)
Due to drying shrinkage in cladding components or supporting structures, both short term
and long term.
c)
Allowance/ provision shall be made within the design to control the flow of any water that
may collect behind the stone and for directing this water to the outside of the work.

29/07/2013
044200 / 4
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
S.
Capillarity: The Detailed Design shall eliminate the entry of water/ moisture inside the building or
within the construction caused by water migration due to capillary action.
T.
Weather and Water Penetration Resistance
U.
1.
The work shall be weatherproof and watertight, ensuring the prevention of water leakage to
internal faces.
2.
Flashings and junctions shall remain weatherproof and watertight under all structural conditions.
3.
Movement and other fixed joints shall remain rigid and accommodate all thermal, building
structure or other movements and any applicable loads without compromising watertightness.
Acoustic
1.
V.
requirements.
a)
The work shall effectively insulate the internal areas of the building from high levels of noise.
b)
c)
The work shall provide internal sound reduction between adjoining areas on the same floor.
2.
Work Site Performance: Ensure that the interfaces (including all movement and soft joints)
3.
Interfaces between the Work and Other Elements: Provide details of all interfaces allowing
sufficient time for the Contractor to comment, and to allow such comments to be implemented.
4.
Work Self-noise:
a)
The work, including all interfaces, shall be constructed so that any necessary expansion
joints are designed to permit noiseless movement.
b)
Local Factors
1.
and durability.
2.
W.
Durability: The performance criteria shall be satisfied for the full design life of the work, as stated in
the Specification.
X.
Demountability
Y.
2.4
1.
Panels shall be individually and independently removable.
2.
Removal of panels shall not affect the safety of the system.
Fire Resistance
1.
Materials and assemblies contributing to the fire resistance of the system shall provide the
required level of fire resistance.
2.
Insulation shall be non-combustible. Encapsulating membranes shall have a surface spread of

flame rating in accordance with ***UL 723 and ASTM E 84, and the Fire Strategy
documentation.***
MATERIALS
A.
General Requirements of Stone Cladding

1.
The stone types specified are based on the visual requirements of the Engineer. The Contractor
shall confirm the suitability of the stone types specified based on performance requirements and
testing as specified and confirm suitability for all intended purposes and applications. Should the
Contractor deem the stone types inappropriate, in terms of application, the Contractor shall
inform the Engineer in writing, and recommend suitable stone type(s) similar in appearance to
those specified by the Engineer, and provide samples for review and acceptance.
2.
***Arrangements shall be made for the Engineer, and others as necessary, to inspect samples of
stone in the respective quarries which represent the range of variations in appearance. The
acceptance of the Engineer shall be obtained before confirming orders with suppliers or
proceeding with production.***
3.
The stone shall be thoroughly seasoned and free from cracks, vents, fissures or other defects
that may adversely affect appearance, strength, weathering qualities or durability. Stone to be
dressed and worked prior to delivery to Site.
4.
No deleterious constituents or Pyrite shall be permitted.
5.
Stone shall be insusceptible to staining.
6.
Stone finishes shall as described and accepted by sampling.

29/07/2013
044200 / 5
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
7.
The desired colors and textures shall be established through range samples due to their
permissible variations in material characteristics. Present a selection of representative range
samples to the Engineer for viewing, sufficient in number to show the complete range of
variations in colors and textures of the proposed stone prior to commencing production.
8.
Marking of Stone:
a)
B.
C.
1.
The petrographical name of the stone.
2.
The commercial name of the stone.
3.
The name and address of the supplier.
4.
The name and location of the quarry.
5.
The declared value or marking designation classes.
6.
Other information:
a)
Breaking strength.
b)
Breaking strength after freeze/ thaw testing.
c)
Abrasion.
d)
Surface chemical treatments.
Stone Cladding Types

1.
Granite Stone Cladding Type: In accordance with ASTM C 615.
2.
Limestone Stone Cladding Type: In accordance with ASTM C 568.
3.
Travertine Stone Cladding Type: In accordance with ASTM C 1527, Classification I, Exterior.
Stone Cladding Anchors and Fasteners

1.
Fabricate anchors, including shelf angles, from stainless steel, in accordance with ASTM A 666,
Type 316L, temper as required to support loads imposed without exceeding allowable design
stresses. Fabricate dowels and pins for anchors from stainless steel, in accordance with ASTM
A 276, Type 316L.
2.
All sub-frame accessories shall be of stainless steel grade 316L.
3.
Fabricate anchors, including shelf angles, from extruded aluminum, in accordance with ASTM B
221M, alloy and temper as required to support loads imposed without exceeding allowable
design stresses, but not less than strength and durability properties of Alloy 6063-T6.
4.
Cast-in-Place Concrete Inserts: Steel, cast iron, or malleable iron adjustable inserts, with bolts,
nuts, washers, and shims; all hot-dip galvanized or mechanically zinc coated, with capability to
sustain, without failure, a load equal to 4 times the loads imposed as determined by testing per
ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
5.
Post-installed Anchor Bolts for Concrete and Masonry: Provide either chemical anchors,
torque-controlled expansion anchors, or undercut anchors made from stainless-steel
components in accordance with ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Alloy Group A1 or Alloy
Group A4 for bolts and nuts; in accordance with ASTM A 666 or ASTM A 276, Type 304, for
anchors, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 4 times the loads imposed, for
concrete, or 6 times the load imposed, for masonry, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488,
conducted by a qualified independent testing agency
6.
Threaded Fasteners: Heavy hexagon structural bolts, heavy hexagon nuts, and hardened
washers.
7.
D.
The following CE information shall be supplied either on the packaging or on the delivery
note:
a)
For stainless steel and aluminum, use annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts, and washers; in
accordance with ASTM F 738M for bolts; and ASTM F 836M for nuts, Alloy Group A1.
b)
For galvanized steel shelf angles and backup structure, use carbon steel bolts, nuts, and
washers; in accordance with ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6, for bolts; ASTM A 563M,
Grade A, for nuts; and ASTM F 436M for washers; all hot-dip or mechanically zinc coated.
Weld Plates for Installation in Concrete: In accordance with Section 055000 Metal Fabrications.
Framing for Backup Structure

1.
Strongback Frames and Miscellaneous Steel Framing: For framing members in contact with
stone fabricate from same material and finish specified for anchors. For framing members not in
contact with stone, comply with requirements indicated below:
a)
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: In accordance with ASTM A 36/ A 36M, minimum thickness
of 5mm.
b)
Steel Tubing: In accordance with ASTM A 500 (cold formed), or ASTM A 513, Type 5
(mandrel drawn), minimum thickness of 5mm.
c)
Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal channels with continuous slot in accordance
with MFMA-3, made from galvanized steel in accordance with ASTM A 653/ A 653M,
structural steel, Grade 230, with Z275 coating, and not less than 2.74mm nominal thickness
or steel sheet in accordance with ASTM A 1008/ A 1008M, structural steel, Grade 230, not
less than 2.66mm nominal thickness, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with
ASTM A 123/ A 123M.

29/07/2013
044200 / 6
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
2.
Prefabricated Steel Stud Frames: Galvanized steel wall framing in accordance with cold-formed
metal framing requirements specified in the Structural Engineer's specification.
a)
3.
E.
F.
G.
Metal-Grid Systems: Provide manufacturer's standard integrated system that combines metal
struts, fittings, fasteners, and stone anchors and that is engineered expressly for mechanically
installing dimension stone cladding and that complies with the following requirements:
a)
Struts: Cold-formed metal channels with continuous slot in accordance with MFMA-3, of
size and shape required for application indicated, made from either galvanized steel in
accordance with ASTM A 653/ A 653M, with Z275 coating, and not less than 2.74mm
nominal thickness or steel sheet in accordance with ASTM A 1008/ A 1008M, not less than
2.66mm nominal thickness, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 123/
A 123M.
b)
Fittings and Fasteners: System manufacturer's standard components of design, size, and
material required to securely attach struts to building structure, by method indicated or
selected, and stone anchors to struts, as well as to prevent galvanic corrosion. Fabricate
components in contact with stone from same material specified for anchors.
c)
Stone Anchors: Shapes and sizes standard with system manufacturer, complying with
"Stone Cladding Anchors and Fasteners" Article.
Stone Cladding Accessories

1.
Setting Shims: Strips of either resilient plastic or vulcanized neoprene, Type A Shore durometer
hardness of 50 to 70 as determined by ASTM D2240, non-staining to stone, of thickness needed
to prevent point loading of stone on anchors and of depths to suit anchors without intruding into
required depths of pointing materials.
2.
Setting Buttons: Resilient plastic buttons, non-staining to stone, sized to suit joint thicknesses
and bed depths of stone units without intruding into required depths of pointing materials.
3.
Concealed Sheet Metal Flashing: Fabricate from zinc-tin alloy-coated stainless steel in
thicknesses indicated, but not less than 0.4mm thick.
4.
Cementitious Dampproofing for Limestone: Provide cementitious formulations that are

recommended by ILI and that are non-staining to stone, compatible with joint sealants, and
non-corrosive to anchors and attachments.
5.
Weep and Vent Tubes: Provide either medium-density polyethylene tubing or rectangular,
cellular, polypropylene or clear butyrate extrusion, of length required to extend from exterior face
of stone to cavity behind.
6.
Plastic Weep Hole/ Vents: One-piece, flexible extrusion manufactured from UV-resistant
polypropylene copolymer, designed to weep moisture in masonry cavity to exterior, in color
selected from manufacturer's standard.
7.
Wicking Material: Absorbent rope, made from either cotton or UV-resistant synthetic fiber, 6mm
to 10mm in diameter, in length required to produce 50mm exposure on exterior and 450mm in
cavity between wythes.
8.
Sealants for Joints in Dimension Stone Cladding: Manufacturer's standard chemically curing,
elastomeric sealants of base polymer and characteristics indicated below that comply with
applicable requirements in Section 079200 Joint Sealants and do not stain stone.
a)
Provide either Multi-component or Single-component, non-sag, polysulfide sealant.
b)
Provide either Multi-component or Single-component, non-sag, urethane sealant.
c)
Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants as selected by the Engineer from manufacturer's
full range.
d)
Sealant for Filling Kerfs: Same sealant used for joints in dimension stone.
Breather Membrane
1.
The breather membrane shall be water-resistant, water vapor permeable and manufactured from
non-woven, spunbonded high density polyethylene.
2.
Installation: The membrane shall be installed strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
3.
Fasten carefully and neatly to provide a complete barrier to water and wind blown dust.
4.
Horizontal laps to be 100mm, vertical laps 150mm and staggered, to shed water away from the
substrate and structure.
5.
Ensure that the membrane is secured at the reveals/ perimeters of all openings.
Vapor Control Layers

1.
H.
Secondary Weather Barrier (Sheathing): Galvanized steel sheet in accordance with ASTM
A 653/ A 653M, commercial steel, coating designation Z275.
Material: High performance reinforced membranes of foil or plastics, protected both sides by rigid
facings/ linings to give spread of flame classification to meet the performance criteria specified.
Flashings
1.
As indicated on the Design Drawings, aluminum flashings fabricated from 2mm thick sheet shall
be provided. They shall be treated with anti-drumming insulation on the protected face.

29/07/2013
044200 / 7
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
2.
I.
2.5
Flashings shall be polyester powder coated to match adjacent materials.
Externally exposed flashings shall have continuation and interconnecting joints fully complying with
the sealant manufacturer's written recommendations for movement joints; simple butt straps shall not
be accepted.
A.
***Source Quality-Control Testing Service:*** Engage a qualified independent testing agency to

perform source quality-control testing indicated below.
1.
Furnish test specimens ***randomly selected/ selected by testing agency*** from same blocks as
actual materials proposed for incorporation into the work.
2.
Flexural Strength Tests: ASTM C 880, performed on specimens of same thickness, orientation of
cut, and finish as installed stone. One set of test specimens is required to be tested for every
1000 m, but not fewer than 2 sets for each stone variety.
B.
Testing agency will report test results in writing to the Engineer and Contractor.
C.
Source Quality-Control, On Site Testing

1.
2.
D.
Testing of Fastenings, Assembly/ Panel Testing:

a)
The specific test methods and number of tests shall be appropriate to the scope design and
complexity of the project.
b)
As a minimum each type of anchor or fastening shall have at least 15 No. tests carried out
to destruction.
c)
Each panel shall be tested to ultimate failure.
d)
The actual number of tests to be performed and the test conditions (i.e. bedding/ rift
orientation, dry, wet, and cyclic loading) shall be determined by a construction professional
based on the approval test data and available technical performance data available for the
particular fastening(s).
e)
The type of test (shear, pull-out) shall be dictated by the nature of the anchor/ fastening (i.e.
support and/ or gravity). Where appropriate, for instance, tests shall be performed in
different loading directions to simulate positive and negative wind loading with a gravity load
applied.
f)
Test certificates and reports shall be presented in their entirety and are to include all
individual and mean values obtained.
Results of Tests: Results shall confirm the suitability of the selected stone and shall be submitted
to the Engineer for acceptance.
Source Quality Control, Stone Testing

1.
The testing regime shall be agreed between the Engineer and the Contractor, with regard to the
specific service conditions. The regime shall be with an independent body being appointed.
2.
Appointment of Testing Laboratory:

a)
3.
Natural Stone Testing Regime:

a)
4.
For the purpose of testing, a qualified geologist/ stone consultant shall be appointed for the
whole cycle of testing required. The qualified geologist/ stone consultant shall certify that the
samples tested are from the same block(s) selected for the project and continuing custody
of samples together with marking of blocks will be deemed essential. Deliver all samples to
the testing laboratory, including the completion of all customs formalities (if appropriate) and
the payment of all levies or duties.
Selection:
1.
Quarry Assessment: Quarry evaluation, cast-in-place material variability and

characteristics, production facility inspection and quality system assessment shall be
carried out by an independent qualified geologist/ stone consultant experienced in the
use of natural stone for external and internal flooring.
2.
Representative approval testing blocks (3 No.) shall be selected by a qualified

geologist/ stone consultant working for an independent accredited testing laboratory.
Testing shall be performed at an independent accredited testing laboratory. The
material selected for testing shall match the agreed project reference control samples.
3.
The testing laboratory or supplier shall be engaged to select testing samples at the
quarry.
Quarrying supervision:
a)
Quarrying shall be supervised and coordinated by the stone fabricator to ensure that the
as-quarried block orientations will yield finished material with characteristics as specified
herein.
b)
All stone shall be cut from matched blocks with a uniform background color. Matched blocks
shall mean blocks extracted from a single bed of stratum in the quarry. The use of blocks
chosen at random, although similar in general character and color to that of the accepted
stone shall not be permitted except by written permission of the Engineer. Provide
mock-ups, prototypes, quality benchmark installations, testing and inspections in
accordance with Section 014000 Quality Requirements.

29/07/2013
044200 / 8
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
5.
Preliminary Testing:
a)
6.
Production Quality Control Testing:

a)
b)
7.
8.
Test certificates and reports shall be presented in their entirety and are to include all
individual and mean values obtained.
General:
1.
Once production of stone for the project commences the stone shall be tested at an
independent test laboratory acceptable to the Engineer to demonstrate compliance
with the Specification.
2.
Unless otherwise agreed, all test samples for the production testing shall be selected
by an independent qualified stone consultant.
Visual Inspection:
1.
The rough edge of each block shall be sawn off exposing a fresh face. The face shall
be visually inspected by an independent qualified stone consultant for any visible
defects, changes in structure or texture, and general conformance to the aesthetic
criteria defined by the Engineer and illustrated in agreed project reference samples.
2.
Where testing is to be performed on a block, a slab shall be sawn from the block in the
appropriate bedding orientation. From the slab a columnar sample shall be taken
sufficient to prepare all of the proposed tests in the project bedding orientation.
3.
The Engineer shall inspect initial finished units at the Contractor's factory and establish
acceptable visual standards for future reference in inspecting balance of work.
4.
Accepted units shall be given an identification mark by the Engineer. These units are
to be retained until final units have been fabricated, inspected and accepted.
Sealant Testing:
a)
Staining: Perform test on each type of tiling in contact with sealant(s).
b)
Adhesion: Test elastomeric sealants for peel strength.
Grout Staining: Evaluate the risk of staining, as recommended by the manufacturer. Seek advice
of specialist/ manufacturer if discoloration occurs on trial areas.
End of Section

29/07/2013
044200 / 9
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1
1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
PRODUCT SELECTION
MATERIALS
FINISHES, GENERAL

29/07/2013
1
2
4
6
055000
AECOM Middle East

Metal Fabrications
Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2

1.
2.
3.

1.
Metal items as specified herein.
2.
Other metal items indicated on the Design Drawings, but not specified in any other sections.
Design Drawings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
Qualification Data
1.
For qualified professional engineer.
2.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following.

1.
AWS D1.1/ D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
2.
AWS D1.2/ D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."
3.
AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."
4.
AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel."
Certifications
1.
Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless steel certifying that products furnished are
in accordance with requirements.
2.
Welding certificates.
3.
Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers
certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
D.
Mock-ups: Typical work interface with surrounding structure including all fastening details.
E.

1.
Submit reports of independent tests demonstrating that the products and systems are in
accordance with the specified performance requirements.
2.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION
A.
General
1.
B.
C.
D.
Do not use products that bear names, logos or references on visible surfaces.
Source of Supply
1.
Obtain each product from a single manufacturer with at least 10 years' experience of producing
similar items.
2.
Obtain auxiliary materials and components from, or under the direction of, the principal products
manufacturer.
3.
Products visible in the finished work shall be obtained from a single production run to ensure
uniformity.
Type AM-101 Aluminium Flashing

1.
Manufacturer: Locally available manufacturer who can comply with all specified requirements.
2.
Gauge: As required to avoid warping.
3.
Finish: PVDF. Colour to match adjacent work, to the acceptance of the Engineer.
Type AM-102 Aluminium Skirting Profile

1.

29/07/2013
055000 / 1
AECOM Middle East

Metal Fabrications
Avenue - Phase 2
E.
F.
G.
2.
Type: Extruded aluminium profile.
3.
Thickness: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
4.
Finish: 3 layer PVDF. Dark Grey.
Type AM-103 Aluminium "C" Chanel Capping Profiles

1.
Manufacturer: Locally available manufacturer who can comply with all specified requirements.
2.
Size: Varies as required.
3.
Gauge: As required to avoid warping.
4.
Finish: PVDF. Colour to match adjacent work, to the acceptance of the Engineer.
Type AM-501 Cold Formed Metal Accessories

1.
Type: "C" channel profile.
2.
Size: Varies as required.
3.
Web Thickness: 10mm.
4.
Finish: 3 layer PVDF coating. Dark Grey.
Type AM-601 Diagrid Steel - Open

1.
Description: Diagrid Steel open with channel and circular nodes, to specialist design.
2.
Manufacturer:
3.
H.
J.
2.2
Waagner Biro,
b)
Seele,
c)
Novum,
d)
Finish: Jotun Corro Coat PE super durable polyester coating TGIC.
Type AM-602 Diagrid Steel - Glazed

1.
Description: Glazed Diagrid Steel, with 250mm x 150mm tension rod supports, to specialist
design.
2.
Manufacturer:
3.
I.
a)
a)
Waagner Biro,
b)
Seele,
c)
Novum,
d)
Finish: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
Type AM-603 Catenary Mesh Cable

1.
Description: High quality stainless steel wire cable with 316L grade stainless steel fixing.
2.
3.
Type SGN-301 Aluminium Removable Signage Panel

1.
Description: Aluminium removable signage panels as indicated on the Design Drawings.
2.
Manufacturer: Kingspan Group Plc or acceptable equivalent.
3.
Finish: 3 layer PVDF coating.
4.
Colour: Black.
5.
Edge: 10mm shadow gap recess.
6.
Panel to Panel Joint: Butt with no gap.
7.
Sheet Thickness: As rquired to avoid canning effect.
8.
Fixing: Secret fixing.
A.
Specific Movements
1.
The work shall be fabricated and installed to withstand all movements of the building structure
under all specified design loads or combination of loads without damage or any reduction in the
performance of the work.
2.
All fastenings shall be capable of providing adequate adjustment with the minimal use of packing
shims, which shall be agreed with the Engineer.
3.
All necessary movement joints shall be designed to accommodate the maximum movements that
can be derived from the specified design loads and movements. Under maximum movements
the joints shall meet the requirements of the Specification.

29/07/2013
055000 / 2
AECOM Middle East

Metal Fabrications
Avenue - Phase 2
B.
4.
The work shall resist all specified static and dynamic loads likely to be encountered without
causing permanent deformation of components, or the failure of members or seals and shall
transmit such loads safely to the points of support.
5.
The work shall not deflect under loading in any way that is detrimental to any elements of the
work or adjacent structural or building elements.
6.
The work shall accommodate the following movements without any permanent deformation or
D.
F.
G.
The effects of internal/ external wind and pressure loadings.
c)
Changes in dimension and shape of components arising from building movements,

including settlement, creep, twisting and racking.
d)
Movement of any joint whether designed to permit movement or not.
e)
Thermal movements.
The work shall be capable of accommodating the following specified live loads, without any
a)
All loads resulting from movements of the building structure and support structure.
b)
A horizontal line load applied to the work, due to the occupants and vehicles, in accordance
with the International Building Code (IBC) and Structural Engineer's requirements.
c)
Impact loads, or transferred impact loads, that occur during the service life of the work,
without deterioration in performance and without sustaining non-repairable damage.
d)
Loads imposed during replacement.
1.
The maximum allowable deflection of any element of the work, when carrying full design loads,
shall not exceed 15mm or 1/ 175 of their clear span in a direction normal to the plane of that
element, whichever is the lesser value.
2.
The work shall not deflect under loading in any way that is detrimental to any element of
themselves or adjacent structural or building elements.
3.
4.
5.
the work, their support structure or internal finishes.
Structural Integrity
The work indicated on the Shop Drawings and described in the Specification shall be in
accordance with the conditions specified in the IBC, unless stated otherwise.
Specific Fire Performance Requirements

1.
Refer to the ***Fire Strategy Report*** and the NFPA.
2.
Surface Spread of Flame Classification: In accordance with UL 723 and ASTM E84.
Demountability
1.
maintenance and/ or replacement of solid units in the event of breakage or damage.
2.
The removal of units shall not affect the performance or safety of adjacent or any other part of
the work.
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes
acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of
components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
1.
H.
b)
Deflections
1.
E.
Deflection under design loads.
Specific Live Loads

1.
C.
a)
Temperature Change: ***67C, ambient; 100C***, material surfaces.
Durability
1.
The work shall retain its original appearance and performance throughout the life of the building
without failure when maintained in accordance with an agreed maintenance program. Failure
shall be defined as the occurrence of one or more of the following defects arising from
deficiencies in design, material selection or workmanship.
a)
Collapse, damage or excessive deflection resulting from the application of specified loads.
b)
Distortion, displacement or other damage to a woven metal fabric that renders it

unserviceable or unattractive.
c)
Atmospheric corrosion, stress corrosion, bimetallic/ electro-chemical corrosion or other

premature deterioration of a material.

29/07/2013
055000 / 3
AECOM Middle East

Metal Fabrications
Avenue - Phase 2
I.
2.3
d)
Degradation of protective coatings causing galvanized items to suffer corrosion during their
life and painted items to suffer coating breakdown in the period up to first maintenance.
e)
Component parts that may suffer damage under design safety loading shall permit easy
replacement with the minimum amount of disturbance to the building users.
Impact and Abrasion Resistance

1.
The work shall resist abrasion from agreed cleaning methods and maintenance systems without
any noticeable change in surface appearance. Generally, surfaces shall be sufficiently hard to
resist all reasonable impacts from hand-held objects.
2.
Impact tests shall be carried out to all work adjacent to pedestrian areas in accordance with the
conditions specified in the IBC, unless stated otherwise.
3.
The extent of any damage determined through testing shall be recorded and, where possible,
quantified. Details shall be submitted to the Engineer.
4.
Details of tests shall be provided to demonstrate the performance of materials and finishes in
resisting abrasion from pedestrian traffic (hands, rings, luggage, cloth and shoes) and any other
abrasion resulting from adjacent traffic movements.
MATERIALS
A.
General
1.
Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam
marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
2.
Aluminum:
3.
a)
Aluminum panels shall be manufactured such that the grain on each runs in the same
direction.
b)
Aluminum extrusions containing score lines resulting from poorly polished surfaces shall not
be acceptable.
c)
Aluminum sheets shall not suffer bowing, dimpling, oil canning, sagging, pillowing, rippling,
warp, abrupt transitions or other visible deformation or irregularity.
Stainless Steel:
a)
B.
Stress corrosion or cracking shall not occur and all necessary precautions in the fabrication
and installation of stainless steel elements/ materials shall be undertaken, avoiding the
simultaneous presence of any of the following:
1.
Tensile stresses.
2.
Residual stresses after cold working or welding.
3.
Aggressive local environmental conditions.
4.
Metal temperatures that in conjunction with the above may induce stress corrosion
cracking.
b)
Thermal Cutting of Stainless Steel: After cutting, grind off material that is liable to corrode.
c)
Stainless Steel Castings:

1.
Shall be manufactured using the lost wax process or such other process as may be
proposed by the Contractor and accepted by the Engineer.
2.
The surface finish of the castings shall be determined by the submission of samples for
review and acceptance by the Engineer. Samples once accepted should be the
standard required for all subsequent castings to be used in the work.
Ferrous Metals in accordance with the following.

1.
2.
Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, and Plate: ASTM A240/ A240M or ASTM A666, Type 304/ Type
316L.
3.
Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A276, Type 304/ Type 316L.
4.
Rolled Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A786/ A786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A36/
A36M or ASTM A283/ A283M, Grade C or D.
5.
Rolled Stainless Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A793.
6.
Stainless Steel Castings: ASTM A743/ A743M.
7.
Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, cold-formed steel tubing.
8.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/ A53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.
9.
Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) in accordance with MFMA-4.
10. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A48/ A48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A47/ A47M, unless
otherwise indicated.
C.
Non-Ferrous Metals in accordance with the following.

1.
Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B209M, Alloy 6061-T6.

29/07/2013
055000 / 4
AECOM Middle East

Metal Fabrications
Avenue - Phase 2
D.
2.
Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221M, Alloy 6063-T6.
3.
Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B632/ B632M, Alloy 6061-T6.
4.
Aluminum Castings: ASTM B26/ B26M, Alloy 443.0-F.
5.
Bronze Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Bars: ASTM B36/ B36M, Alloy UNS No. C28000 (muntz metal,
60% copper).
6.
Bronze Extrusions: ASTM B455, Alloy UNS No. C38500 (extruded architectural bronze).
7.
Bronze Castings: ASTM B584, Alloy UNS No. C83600 (leaded red brass) or No. C84400 (leaded
semi-red brass).
8.
Nickel Silver Extrusions: ASTM B151/ B151M, Alloy UNS No. C74500.
9.
Nickel Silver Castings: ASTM B584, Alloy UNS No. C97600 (20% leaded nickel bronze).
Fasteners in accordance with the following.

1.
General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304/ Type 316 stainless steel fasteners for
exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating in accordance with ASTM B633 or ASTM
F1941M, Class Fe/ Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
a)
Provide stainless steel fasteners for fastening aluminum.
b)
Provide stainless steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel.
c)
Provide stainless steel fasteners for fastening nickel silver.
d)
Provide bronze fasteners for fastening bronze.
2.
Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM F568M, Property Class 4.6; with hex
nuts, ASTM A563M; and, where indicated, flat washers.
3.
Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A325M, Type 3; with hex nuts, ASTM
A563M, Class 8S3; and, where indicated, flat washers.
4.
Stainless Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless steel bolts, ASTM
F738M; with hex nuts, ASTM F836M; and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group A1/ Group
A4.
5.
Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A563; and,
where indicated, flat washers.
a)
Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being
fastened is indicated to be galvanized.
6.
Eyebolts: ASTM A489.
7.
Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.7M.
8.
Lag Screws: ASME B18.2.3.8M.
9.
Wood Screws: Flat head, ASME B18.6.1.
10. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22M.

11. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.2M.
12. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the
load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in
13. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise
indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A47/ A47M malleable iron or ASTM A27/
A27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized in
accordance with ASTM F2329.
14. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.
a)
ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941M, Class Fe/ Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.
b)
Material for Exterior Locations and where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group A1/
Group A4 stainless steel bolts, ASTM F738M, and nuts, ASTM F836M.
15. Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts) in

accordance with MFMA-4, provide with temporary filler and tee-head bolts, complete with
washers and nuts, all zinc-plated in accordance with ASTM B633, Class Fe/ Zn 5, as needed for
fastening to inserts.
E.
Miscellaneous Materials
1.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
2.
Shop Primers: Provide primers in accordance with Section 099100 Painting.
3.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint in accordance with SSPC-Paint 20 and

compatible with paints specified to be used over it.
4.
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion in accordance with ASTM D1187.

29/07/2013
055000 / 5
AECOM Middle East

Metal Fabrications
Avenue - Phase 2
2.4
5.
Non-shrink, Metallic Grout: Factory-packaged, ferrous-aggregate grout in accordance with ASTM

C1107, specifically recommended by the manufacturer for heavy-duty loading applications.
6.
Non-shrink, Non-metallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout

in accordance with ASTM C1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by the manufacturer
for interior and exterior applications.
7.
Concrete: Comply with the requirements in Structural Specification, Section 033000

Cast-in-Place Concrete for normal-weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day
compressive strength of 20MPa.
FINISHES, GENERAL
A.
B.
General
1.
Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
2.
Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into
surrounding surface.
Steel and Iron Finishes

1.
Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated in accordance with ASTM A153/ A153M for
steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A123/ A123M for other steel and iron products.
a)
2.
a)
3.
4.
Shop prime with primers specified in Section 099100 Painting.
Preparation for Shop Priming:

below:
Prepare surfaces in accordance with requirements indicated
a)
Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/ NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning".
b)
Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/ NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast
Cleaning".
c)
Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning".
Shop Priming: Apply shop primer in accordance with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification
No. 1: Shop, Site, and Maintenance Painting of Steel", for shop painting.
a)
C.
Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion.
Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded
in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.
Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
Aluminum Finishes
1.
Finish designations prefixed by AA in accordance with the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
2.
As-Fabricated Finish: AA-M10 (Mechanical Finish: As fabricated, unspecified).
3.
Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: Non-specular as fabricated;

Chemical Finish: Etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating
0.018mm or thicker) in accordance with AAMA 611.
End of Section

29/07/2013
055000 / 6
AECOM Middle East

Metal Fabrications
Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 055200 METAL RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
SUMMARY
QUALITY ASSURANCE
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
1
1
1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
PRODUCT SELECTION
DESIGN CRITERIA
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:
MATERIALS
FINISHES

29/07/2013
2
2
3
4
6
055200
AECOM Middle East

Metal Railings
Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 055200 METAL RAILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2

1.
2.
Where required to prepare the Shop Drawings, these shall be limited to final detailing of
3.

1.
Purpose-made balustrades and railings.
2.
Proprietary balustrades and railings.
3.
Handrails.
Design Drawings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Contractor's Qualifications: A specialist, who has at least 10 years' successful experience in

performing similar work, or operates a similar quality system acceptable to the Engineer. Welders
shall be certified.
B.
C.
1.
American Welding Code (AWS) D1.1/ D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
2.
American Welding Code (AWS) D1.2/ D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."
Mock-ups
1.
D.
E.
1.3
Not required.

1.
Provide independently certified test literature for each type of accessory. The test result data
shall meet the requirements of the Specification.
2.
Where test results for a material or product are not available, undertake testing to show
compliance with the Specification at an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the
Engineer.
3.
Results and Certificates

1.
substrate materials including aluminum, finishes, glass, glass coatings, gaskets, setting blocks
and backing rods. These certificates shall relate to tests carried out by the sealant manufacturer.
2.
3.
Tests and inspection results shall be submitted immediately they are available.
4.
Submit certificates relating to the materials used in the work as confirmation of tests carried out
in accordance with the relevant Standards, and/ or other national standards as appropriate.
5.
Maintain, until the end of the defects liability period, records of all inspections and tests
performed, material certification, inspection and test plans, drawings, and any other
documentation to substantiate conformity with the Specification, including those carried out by
the Subcontractors.
6.
The records shall be stored in such a way that they are identifiable to the component to which
they refer and are retrievable.
7.
The records shall be available for inspection by the Engineer and copies of records shall be
given to the Engineer upon request. At the end of the defects liability period they shall be
submitted to the Engineer.
A.
General: Install materials and components in weather conditions recommended by the manufacturer.
Do not install any work on surfaces that are frost covered, dirty, wet or contaminated such that a
proper bond, seating or fastening cannot be ensured.
B.
Temperature: Make allowance for differences between design temperature and temperatures on Site
during installation when sizing construction and movement joints.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
29/07/2013
055200 / 1
AECOM Middle East

Metal Railings
Avenue - Phase 2
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION
A.
B.
C.
General
1.
Do not use products that bear names, logos or references on visible surfaces.
2.
Paints: Coordinate the use of primer, decorative and protective coats for items requiring
Site-applied paints with Section 099100 Painting.
Source of Supply
1.
Obtain each product from a single manufacturer with at least 5 years' experience of producing
similar items.
2.
manufacturer.
3.
uniformity.
Type BAL-101 Laminated Glass Balustrade

1.
Description: Glass balustrade with handrail, including all necessary fastenings, bracketing and
accessories required to complete the installation.
2.
Manufacturer:
a)
3.
4.
Posts and Uprights: No posts and uprights.
5.
Handrail: Stainless Steel.

a)
6.
D.
Infill Panels: Single laminated glass, Type GL-105. Refer to Section 088000 - Glazing.
a)
Locate glass centrally in grooves using setting blocks of appropriate thickness.
b)
Insert external and internal gasket sections accurately into grooves.
c)
Fit tight at corners with no gaps.
d)
Fix sill beads securely.
Channel Surround: Anodized marine grade 316L stainless steel.
8.
Beads: Stainless steel, as indicated on the Design Drawings. Fixing shall be to speciallist detail.
9.
Fastenings: All fastenings shall be concealed.
Type BAL-102 Stainless Steel Balustrade

1.
Description: Purpose made stainless steel balustrade with handrail, including all necessary
fastenings, bracketing and accessories required to complete the installation.
2.
Manufacturer: Locally available who can comply with the specifications and acceptable to the
Engineer.
3.
4.
Posts and Uprights: Stainless steel.
5.
Handrail: 50mm dia. stainless steel, Grade 316L.

a)
All ends shall be closed with stainless steel caps with smooth joints.
b)
Finish: Natural. Hairline/ brushed.
Fastenings: All fastenings shall be concealed.
Type BAL-103 Galvanised Steel Balustrade

1.
Description: Purpose made low carbon galvanised steel balustrade with handrail, including all
necessary fastenings, bracketing and accessories required to complete the installation.
2.
Manufacturer: Locally available who can comply with the specifications and acceptable to the
Engineer.
3.
Posts and Uprights: Galvanised steel.
4.
Handrail: Low carbon galvanised steel.
5.
6.
Finish: Super durable polyester coating TGIC.
7.
2.2
7.
6.
E.
Glass: Gulf Glass Industries (GGI) or acceptable equivalent.
a)
Manufacturer: Jotun or acceptable equivalent.
b)
Product Reference: Corro-coat PE.
c)
Colour: Dark grey.
Fixing: Anchor fixed to concrete/ blockwork.
DESIGN CRITERIA

29/07/2013
055200 / 2
AECOM Middle East

Metal Railings
Avenue - Phase 2
A.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all aspects of construction, fabrication, detailing and
installation in accordance with the Specification. This shall include ensuring that all interfacing
requirements relating to the building structure and other systems are accommodated in accordance
with the Structural Engineer's details, and that interfaces with any external envelope elements are fully
weathertight.
B.
Glass to glass external corners shall have joint seals to the manufacturer's recommendation and to
the acceptance of the Engineer.
C.
Glazed/ infill panels shall be as indicated on the Design Drawings and specified herein.
D.
Materials used for fastening shall be stainless steel Type 316. Fastenings shall be concealed or
inconspicuous to the acceptance of the Engineer.
E.
F.
2.3
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:
A.
B.
Specific Movements
1.
The work shall be fabricated and installed to withstand all movements of the building structure
under all specified design loads or combination of loads without damage or any reduction in the
performance of the work.
2.
All fastenings shall be capable of providing adequate adjustment with the minimal use of packing
shims, which shall be acceptable to the Engineer.
3.
All necessary movement joints shall be designed to accommodate the maximum movements that
can be derived from the specified and determined design loads and movements. Under
maximum movements the joints shall meet the requirements of the Specification.
4.
The work shall resist all specified static and dynamic design loads likely to be encountered
without causing permanent deformation of components or the failure of members or seals and
shall transmit such loads safely to the points of support.
5.
The work shall not deflect under loading in any way that is detrimental to any elements of the
work or adjacent structural or building elements.
6.
The work shall accommodate the following movements without any permanent deformation or
reduction in the specified performance.
D.
Deflection under design loads.
b)
The effects of internal/ external wind and pressure loadings.
c)
Changes in dimension and shape of components arising from building movements,

d)
Movement of any joint whether designed to permit movement or not.
e)
Thermal movements.
Specific Dead Loads

1.
C.
a)
The work shall be capable of accommodating the following dead loads without any reduction in
performance:
a)
The work's own dead load shall be accommodated locally and without causing deflections
or movements, which adversely affect the performance or appearance of the system
components.
b)
The dead loads derived from permanent fixtures or services attached to the surfaces of the
work.
Specific Live Loads

1.
Occupancy class shall be [. . . .] as stated in the International Building Code.
2.
The work shall be capable of accommodating the following specified live loads without any
a)
All loads resulting from movements of the building structure and support structure.
b)
A horizontal line load applied to the work, due to the occupants and vehicles.
c)
Impact loads, or transferred impact loads, that occur during the service life of the work,
without deterioration in performance and without sustaining non-repairable damage.
d)
Loads imposed during replacement.
Deflections
1.
The maximum allowable deflection of any element of the work, when carrying full design loads,
shall not exceed 15mm or 1/ 175 of their clear span in a direction normal to the plane of that
element, whichever is the lesser value.
2.
The work shall not deflect under loading in any way that is detrimental to any element of itself or
adjacent structural or building elements.
3.

29/07/2013
055200 / 3
AECOM Middle East

Metal Railings
Avenue - Phase 2
E.
4.
5.
the work, their support structure or internal finishes.
Structural Integrity
1.
Balustrades and handrails indicated on the Design Drawings and described in the Specification
shall be in accordance with ASTM E894 and ASTM E935, unless stated otherwise.
2.
Construction of barriers shall be in accordance with ASTM E894 and ASTM E935, to the
acceptance of the Structural Engineer.
3.
Handrails shall be attached to glass balustrades in such a manner that, should a glass pane
fracture, the handrail will remain in position.
F.
Glass Performance Requirements: Refer to Section 088000 Glazing.
G.
Thermal Movement: The work shall withstand expansion and contraction forces, including differential
rates of movement between different materials, components and color finishes, resulting from
temperature changes.
H.
Durability
1.
I.
2.4
The work shall retain its original appearance and performance throughout the life of the building
without failure when maintained in accordance with an accepted maintenance program. Failure
shall be defined as the occurrence of one or more of the following defects arising from
deficiencies in design, material selection or workmanship.
a)
Collapse, damage or excessive deflection resulting from the application of specified loads.
b)
Distortion, displacement or other damage to a woven metal fabric that renders it

unserviceable or unattractive.
c)
Atmospheric corrosion, stress corrosion, bimetallic/ electro-chemical corrosion or other

premature deterioration of a material.
d)
Degradation of protective coatings causing galvanized items to suffer corrosion during their
life and painted items to suffer coating breakdown in the period up to first maintenance.
e)
Component parts that may suffer damage under design safety loading shall permit easy
replacement with the minimum amount of disturbance to the building users.

1.
The work shall resist abrasion from agreed cleaning methods and maintenance systems without
any noticeable change in surface appearance. Generally, surfaces shall be sufficiently hard
(including glass coatings) to resist all reasonable impacts from hand-held objects.
2.
The extent of any damage determined through testing shall be recorded and, where possible,
quantified. Details shall be submitted to the Engineer.
3.
Details of tests shall be provided to demonstrate the performance of materials and finishes in
resisting abrasion from pedestrian traffic (hands, rings, luggage, cloth and shoes) and any other
abrasion resulting from adjacent traffic movements.
MATERIALS
A.
Steel and Iron

1.
Tubing: In accordance with ASTM A500, cold formed.
2.
Pipe: In accordance with ASTM A53/ A53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight
(Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads.
a)
B.
Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated on the Shop
Drawings.
3.
Plates, Shapes, and Bars: In accordance with ASTM A36/ A36M.
4.
Cast Iron: Either gray iron, in accordance with ASTM A48/ A48M, or malleable iron, in
accordance with ASTM A47/ A47M, unless otherwise indicated on the Shop Drawings.
5.
Expanded Metal: In accordance with ASTM F1267.
6.
Perforated Metal: Cold-rolled steel sheet, in accordance with ASTM A1008/ A1008M, or
hot-rolled steel sheet, in accordance with ASTM A1011/ A1011M.
7.
Perforated Metal: Galvanized-steel sheet, in accordance with ASTM A653/ A653M, Z275 coating,
commercial steel Type B.
8.
Woven-Wire Mesh: Intermediate-crimp, woven-wire mesh in accordance with ASTM A510M.
Stainless Steel
1.
Tubing: In accordance with ASTM A554,Grade MT 304/ Grade MT 316L.
2.
Pipe: In accordance with ASTM A312/ A312M, Grade TP 304/ Grade TP 316L.
3.
Castings: In accordance with ASTM A743/ A743M, Grade CF 8 or CF 20/ Grade CF 8M or CF

3M.
4.
Plate and Sheet: In accordance with ASTM A240/ A240M or ASTM A666, Type 304/ Type 316L.

29/07/2013
055200 / 4
AECOM Middle East

Metal Railings
Avenue - Phase 2
C.
D.
5.
Expanded Metal: In accordance with ASTM F1267, Type I (expanded), Type II (expanded and
flattened), Class 3 (corrosion-resistant steel), made from stainless steel sheet, in accordance
with ASTM A240/ A240M or ASTM A666, Type 304/ Type 316.
6.
Perforated Metal: Stainless steel sheet, in accordance with ASTM A240/ A240M or ASTM A666,
Type 304/ Type 316L.
7.
Woven-Wire Mesh: Intermediate-crimp, woven-wire mesh, in accordance with ASTM A580/

A580M, Type 304/ Type 316.
Glass
1.
Laminated safety of thickness designed to suit the specified performance requirements.
2.
Exposed edges of glass to be polished and chamfered.
3.
Include glazing accessories.
4.
Provide glass in accordance with the applicable requirements of Section 088000 Glazing.
Fastenings/ Fasteners
1.
Refer to Section 050523 Metal Fastenings.
2.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide fasteners of stainless steel Type 304 for interior and Type
316 for exterior use.
3.
Ungalvanized-Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners in accordance with ASTM B633 or ASTM
F1941M, Class Fe/ Zn 5 for zinc coating.
4.
Hot-Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel fasteners in
accordance with ASTM A153M or ASTM F2329 for zinc coating.
5.
Stainless Steel Railings: Type 304 stainless steel fasteners for interior applications; Type 316
stainless steel fasteners for exterior applications.
6.
Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and
class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of
construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.
7.
Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components:
8.
9.
a)
Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them
to other work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard fastening
method for railings indicated in the Specification.
b)
Provide Phillips or hex socket, as selected by the Engineer, flat-head machine screws for
exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated on the Shop Drawings.
Post-Installed Anchors: Unless otherwise specified in the Structural Specification provide

torque-controlled expansion anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 6
times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when
installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E488, conducted by a
Qualified Independent Testing Agency.
a)
Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated in accordance with

ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941M, Class Fe/ Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.
b)
Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group A4
stainless steel bolts, ASTM F738M, and nuts, ASTM F836M.
Fastening components shall be in accordance with all statutory requirements and be to the
acceptance of the applicable municipality and Structural Engineer both as to strength and type
and shall be designed to carry all dead, live and wind loading under due consideration of any
applicable thermal movements.
10. All necessary fastenings shall be installed for the work.

11. Direct contact between aluminum or aluminum alloys and treated wood shall be avoided, unless
with the prior acceptance of the Engineer.
12. Visible fastenings shall match approved samples.
13. Unless otherwise specified, the following basic requirements shall be adhered to:
a)
Rigidity: Only fastenings that are suited to the likely stresses, movements and vibrations in
use without allowing any wobble, creaks or deflection of any fixtures or fittings shall be
used.
b)
Removability: Items that require accessibility or removal shall be fixed with bolts.
E.
Inserts: Stainless steel Type 304 or Type 316 of suitable design and strength to suit application.
F.
Shims: Horseshoe type made from stainless or suitably coated steel where concealed. Use sleeve
type spacers of stainless steel for visible shims.
G.
Isolating Materials: Self-adhesive PVC tape, polyester powder coat or 2-pack epoxy paint as
recommended by the manufacturer to suit application.
H.
Sealants: Refer to Section 079200 Joint Sealants.
I.
Gaskets
1.
Gaskets shall be made of either Ethylene Propylene material (EPDM/ EP) or of Silicone.

29/07/2013
055200 / 5
AECOM Middle East

Metal Railings
Avenue - Phase 2
J.
2.5
2.
All visible glazing gaskets shall have factory-formed corners. All other gaskets shall have
overlapping joints with appropriate sealant in between.
3.
The gasket system shall comprise both extruded and molded elements. These shall perform and
appear as a single element.
4.
All gaskets shall be fabricated to the most appropriate grade and hardness. Design and select all
gaskets in order to:
a)
Be most appropriate to the extrusion design.
b)
Ensure that glass retention and weatherproofing requirements are maintained by dry solid
materials and/ or structural silicone.
c)
Ensure that they do not permanently distort over the working life of the Works
5.
Provide written confirmation from the gasket manufacturer that the gasket material and designs
are wholly suitable for their specific use in any part of the Works and are compatible with all other
materials and sealants used within the installation and at interfaces with other materials/
components.
6.
The color of all gaskets shall be black unless specified otherwise.
7.
Gaskets shall not shrink nor warp and shall not deteriorate between the periods stated in the
Contractor's stated times for replacement.
8.
Gasket corners in frames shall be preformed and factory vulcanized in ladders.
The choice of seals and gaskets shall not result in any reduction in sound insulation performance.
FINISHES
A.
General
1.
Carry out welding, cutting and machining before applying protective coating and finishes.
2.
Prime visible surfaces of non-ferrous metals. Prime all surfaces, including joint faces, of ferrous
metal fabrications. Do not paint surfaces within 50mm of Site welds; prepare and finish after
connections are completed.
3.
Apply finishes to visible surfaces of non-ferrous and ferrous metals in accordance with the paint
manufacturer's instructions.
4.
Prime paint items to receive Site-applied paint in accordance with Section 099100 Painting.
B.
Site-Applied Paint: In accordance with Section 099100 Painting.
C.
Factory-Applied Finishes: In accordance with Section 050513 Shop Applied Coatings for Metal.
D.
Steel and Iron Finishes

1.
E.
Galvanized Railings:
a)
In accordance with ASTM A123/ A123M for hot-dip galvanized railings.
b)
In accordance with ASTM A153/ A153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware.
Stainless Steel Finishes

1.
180-Grit Polished Finish: Oil-ground, uniform, directionally textured finish unless otherwise
specified by the Engineer.
2.
320-Grit Polished Finish: Oil-ground, uniform, fine, directionally textured finish unless otherwise
3.
Polished and Buffed Finish: Oil-ground, 180-grit finish followed by buffing finish unless otherwise
4.
When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter
and leave surfaces chemically clean.
End of Section

29/07/2013
055200 / 6
AECOM Middle East

Metal Railings
Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 072100 THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1
1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
PRODUCT SELECTION
MATERIALS

29/07/2013
1
1
2
072100
AECOM Middle East

Thermal Insulation
Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 072100 THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2

1.
2.
components, systems, etc. indicated on the Design Drawings, necessary to demonstrate their
safe installation.
3.

1.
Foam-plastic board insulation.
2.
Mineral-wool blanket insulation.
3.
Loose-fill insulation.
4.
Vapor retarders.
Design Drawings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.
2.
B.
C.
Sustainability Standards Certifications: As referenced in applicable Work Sections.
D.
Mock-ups: As referenced in applicable Work Sections.
E.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E84

by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION
A.
Source of Supply: Use products of the same type for similar items and from the same manufacturer.
B.
Refer to applicable Work Section product selection descriptions for insulation product selections.
2.2
A.
Fire: Insulation materials inside the building to be non-combustible when tested in accordance with
NFPA 101, and shall not emit toxic fumes in a fire.
B.
Vapor Barriers
C.
1.
The work shall effectively prevent the passage of water vapor into the system.
2.
Vapor barriers shall be installed as a fully sealed and airtight assembly without holes or tears.
3.
Vapor barrier membranes, vapor barrier facings and encapsulating membranes to have fire
propagation rating and a fire spread rating in accordance with ASTM E84 and NFPA 101
requirements.
Breather Membranes
1.
Breather membranes shall comply with the conditions specified in the International Building Code
(IBC) and municipality codes.
2.
The work shall provide an effective air permeable membrane.
3.
The breather membrane shall permit the passage of air through the system without giving rise to
risk of interstitial condensation.
D.
Thermal Resistance: Provide the specified thermal performance of insulation materials in accordance
with the tests specified in the International Building Code (IBC) and municipality codes.
E.
Thermal Movement
1.
temperature differentials occurring. The Design shall cater for all temporary and permanent
2.

29/07/2013
072100 / 1
AECOM Middle East

Thermal Insulation
Avenue - Phase 2
3.
F.
Thermal Performance Requirements: The average thermal transmittance (U-value) for the work shall
be ***0.35W/ mK*** or better.
G.
Vapor Permeability
1.
Insulating materials used inside the building to prevent the occurrence of interstitial
condensation.
2.
Unless otherwise specified, design vapor barrier materials with water vapor resistance and water
vapor transmission values as recommended in the International Building Code (IBC) and
municipality codes.
H.
Fiber Release: Insulating materials used inside the building shall not release harmful fiber or dust
particles into the atmosphere when subject to air movements of up to 20m/ s.
I.
Acoustic Performance
1.
J.
2.3
Acoustic materials in partitions and ceilings shall provide the minimum sound absorbing
coefficients, as determined by tests in accordance with the conditions specified in the
International Building Code (IBC), under installed conditions, and as specified in applicable Work
Sections.
Durability: Insulating materials to maintain their performance throughout the Design Life of the
building, without becoming dislodged, compressed or saturated.
MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
Foam-Plastic Board Insulation, in accordance with the following.

1.
Extruded-Polystyrene (XPS) Board Insulation: ASTM C578, with maximum flame-spread and
smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, in accordance with ASTM E84.
2.
Molded-Polystyrene or Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Board Insulation: ASTM C578, with

maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, in
accordance with ASTM E84.
3.
Foil-Faced, Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C1289, with maximum flame-spread and
smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, in accordance with ASTM E84.
4.
Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation
securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates.
Mineral-Wool Board Insulation, in accordance with the following.

1.
Unfaced, Mineral-Wool Board Insulation: ASTM C612; with maximum flame-spread and
smoke-developed indexes of 15 and zero, respectively, in accordance with ASTM E84; passing
ASTM E136 for combustion characteristics.
2.
Foil-Faced, Mineral-Wool Board Insulation: ASTM C612; faced on one side with foil-scrim or
foil-scrim-polyethylene vapor retarder; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed
indexes of 25 and 5, respectively, in accordance with ASTM E84.
Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation, in accordance with the following.

1.
Recycled Content Product: Where indicated in applicable Work Sections provide post-consumer
recycled content plus of pre-consumer recycled content for a total recovered materials content
not less than 75%.
2.
Unfaced, Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: ASTM C665, consisting of fibers; with maximum
flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, in accordance with
ASTM E84; passing ASTM E136 for combustion characteristics.
3.
Reinforced-Foil-Faced, Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: ASTM C665, faced with foil scrim,
foil-scrim kraft, or foil-scrim polyethylene.
Loose-Fill Insulation, in accordance with the following.

1.
Cellulosic-Fiber Loose-Fill Insulation: ASTM C739, chemically treated for flame-resistance,

processing, and handling characteristics.
a)
2.
Glass-Fiber Loose-Fill Insulation: ASTM C764, with maximum

smoke-developed indexes of 5, in accordance with ASTM E84.
a)
E.
Recycled Content Product: Where indicated in applicable Work Sections provide

post-consumer recycled content plus of pre-consumer recycled content for a total
recovered materials content not less than 75%.
flame-spread
and
Recycled Content Product: Where indicated in applicable Work Sections provide

post-consumer recycled content plus of pre-consumer recycled content for a total
recovered materials content not less than 75%.
Spray Polyurethane Foam Insulation, in accordance with the following.

1.
Closed-Cell Polyurethane Foam Insulation: ASTM C1029, Type II, with maximum flame-spread
and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, in accordance with ASTM E84.
a)
2.
Minimum density of 24kg/ m, thermal resistivity of 43K x m/ W at 24C.
Open-Cell Polyurethane Foam Insulation: Spray-applied polyurethane foam using water as a

blowing agent, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450,
respectively, in accordance with ASTM E84.

29/07/2013
072100 / 2
AECOM Middle East

Thermal Insulation
Avenue - Phase 2
a)
F.
G.
1.
Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D4397, with maximum permeance rating of 7.5ng/ Pa x s x
m.
2.
Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: 2 No. outer layers of polyethylene film laminated to an

inner reinforcing layer consisting of either nylon cord or polyester scrim.
3.
Fire-Retardant, Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: 2 No. outer layers of polyethylene film

laminated to an inner reinforcing layer consisting of either non-woven grid of nylon cord or
polyester scrim, with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes in accordance with ASTM E84.
4.
Foil-Polyester-Film Vapor Retarders: 2 No. layers of polyester film laminated to an inner layer of
aluminum foil, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes per ASTM E84.
5.
Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder

manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
6.
Vapor-Retarder Fasteners: Pancake-head, self-tapping steel drill screws; with fender washers.
7.
Single-Component Non-sag Urethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Type I, Grade NS, Class 25, Use
NT related to exposure, and Use O related to vapor-barrier-related substrates.
8.
Adhesive for Vapor Retarders: Product recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer and has
demonstrated capability to bond vapor retarders securely to substrates indicated.
Insulation Fasteners
1.
Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of

holding insulation securely in position indicated with self-locking washer in place.
2.
Adhesively Attached, Angle-Shaped, Spindle-Type Anchors: Angle welded to projecting spindle;

capable of holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position indicated with self-locking
washer in place.
3.
Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from galvanized-steel sheet, with

beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold insulation securely in place, but
not less than 38mm or in diameter.
a)
H.
Minimum density of 6.4kg/ m, thermal resistivity of 24K x m/ W at 24C.
Vapor Retarders, in accordance with the following.
Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure
permanent retention of cap in the following locations:
1.
Where indicated.
2.
Ceiling plenums.
4.
Insulation Standoff: Spacer fabricated from galvanized mild-steel sheet for fitting over spindle of
insulation anchor to maintain air space between face of insulation and substrate to which anchor
is attached.
5.
Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to
substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates.
Accessories
1.
Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Type as recommended by the insulation manufacturer to suit
the application.
2.
Supports and Anchors for Insulation: Provide mechanical or adhesive attachment devices as
recommended by the manufacturer to meet the performance requirements.
3.
Joint Tape for Insulation Facings: Soft aluminum foil backing with transparent synthetic rubber
adhesive, minimum 0.05mm thick, width to suit the application, type as recommended by the
insulation manufacturer.
4.
Sealant for Sheet Membrane Vapor Barrier: Non-sag urethane type, with demonstrated capability
to bond vapor retarders securely to substrates, and as recommended by vapor barrier
manufacturer.
5.
Adhesive Tape for Sheet Membrane Vapor Barrier: Type as recommended by the vapor barrier
manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor barrier.
6.
Fastenings for Sheet Membrane Vapor Barrier: Purpose made to suit the application, type as
recommended by the vapor barrier manufacturer.
End of Section

29/07/2013
072100 / 3
AECOM Middle East

Thermal Insulation
Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 072400 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM

(EIFS)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1
1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
PRODUCT SELECTION
MATERIALS
MIXING
FINISHES

29/07/2013
1
2
3
4
4
072400
AECOM Middle East

Exterior Insulation And Finish System (Eifs)
Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 072400 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM

(EIFS)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.

1.
2.
3.

1.
C.
1.2
Exterior insulation and finish system (EIFS) applied over concrete, masonry, exterior cement
board, gypsum sheathing and plywood sheathing.
Design Drawings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
1.
A specialist, who is an applicator certified by the EIFS manufacturer and with at least 10 years
successful experience in performing similar work.
2.
Mock-ups
1.
C.
Provide mock-ups for each type, of size adequate to demonstrate all materials and workmanship,
and to the Engineer's acceptance.
Pre-construction Testing/ Reports

1.
Submit reports of independent tests demonstrating that the products and systems comply with
the specified performance requirements.
2.
Engineer.
3.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION
A.
Source of Supply: Obtain EIFS from single source from a single EIFS manufacturer and from sources
accepted by EIFS manufacturer as compatible with system components.
B.
Type EWS-601 Exterior Insulation Finish System (EIFS)

1.
Description: A non-load-bearing, exterior wall cladding system that consists of an insulation

board attached adhesively, mechanically, or both to the substrate; an integrally reinforced base
coat; and a textured protective finish coat.
2.
Manufacturer: STO or acceptable equivalent.
3.
Product Reference: StoTherm K or M or acceptable equivalent.
4.
Structural Background:
5.
6.
a)
Primary: Block wall, refer to the Design Drawings.
b)
Secondary: Framework to receive the system shall be to the manufacturer's details.
Insulation: Expanded polystyrene (EPS) insulation, adhesive or mechanically fixed to substrate

as recommended by the manufacturer.
a)
Insulation shall comply with Local Authority requirements.
b)
Fire Performance: Class 0.
c)
Thickness: As required to achieve specified U-Value.
System:
a)
Reinforcing Base Coat: Cement free reinforcing plaster. StoArmat classic or acceptable
equivalent.
b)
Reinforcing Mesh: Sto-Shield mesh or acceptable equivalent.
c)
Decorative Coat: 6mm Stolit stippled acrylic render or acceptable equivalent.

29/07/2013
072400 / 1
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
d)
7.
C.
2.2
Armour Angle: Manufacturer's standard.
b)
Drip Edge Bead: Manufacturer's standard.
c)
Mesh Angle Beads: PVC. Manufacturer's standard.
d)
Seal Tape: Precompressed waterproof sealing tape. Manufacturer's standard.
Color/ Aggregete: White - 31337.
9.
Locate construction/ movement/ expansion joints where indicated on the Design Drawings or
where recommended by the manufacturer. All joints shall be shown on the Shop Drawings.
Type EWS-602 Exterior Insulation Finish System (EIFS) with Granitex Finish
As above with StoGranitex or acceptable equivalent finish.
Type EWS-603 Exterior Insulation Finish System (EIFS)with Brick Slip Finish
1.
E.
a)
8.
1.
D.
Sealer: Manufacturer's waterproof, clear acrylic-based sealer for protecting finish coat.
Starter Tracts: Manufacturer's standard profile.
Similar to EWS-601, top finish manufactured from synthetic render, providing the same durable,
weatherproof properties as Stolit, but with a simulated brick appearance.
Type EWS-803 Decorative Profiles

1.
Description: Decorative Profile features for facade application as indicated on the Design
Drawings.
2.
Manufacturer: STO or acceptable equivalent.
3.
Product Reference: StoDeco Profile.
4.
Material: Homogeneous material consisting of hollow silicate microspheres.
A.
Serviceability: The work shall provide a flat, smooth, uniform and stable surface, weathertight under
anticipated conditions, without de-bonding, cracking or deterioration affecting appearance.
B.
Movement: The work shall accommodate movement in the substrate without causing damage or
failure to the applied finishes.
C.
Durability: The work shall retain its performance throughout its Design Life without causing damage or
deterioration to the finish appearance.
D.
Thermal Performance: Thermal transmittance (U-value): The construction (assembly of work) shall
provide an average U-value of ***0.35***W/ mK or better.
E.
Bond Integrity: Free from bond failure within EIFS components or between system and supporting wall
construction, resulting from exposure to fire, wind loads, weather, or other in-service conditions.
F.
Weathertightness: Resistant to water penetration from exterior into EIFS and assemblies behind it or
through them into interior of building that results in deterioration of thermal-insulating effectiveness or
other degradation of EIFS and assemblies behind it, including substrates, supporting wall
construction, and interior finish.
G.
Provide EIFS having physical properties and structural performance that comply with the following.
1.
Abrasion Resistance: Consisting of minimum 25.4mm thick EIFS mounted on minimum 12.7mm
thick gypsum board; cured for a minimum of 28 days; and showing no cracking, checking, or loss
of film integrity after exposure to 500L of sand when tested in accordance with ASTM D968,
Method A.
2.
Accelerated Weathering: 5 No. samples in accordance with ICC-ES AC219 showing no cracking,
checking, crazing, erosion, rusting, blistering, peeling, delamination, or other characteristics that
might affect performance as a wall cladding after testing for 2000 hours when viewed under 5
No. times magnification in accordance with ASTM G153 or ASTM G154, ASTM G153 or ASTM
G155 as applicable.
3.
Mildew Resistance of Finish Coat: Sample applied to 50.8mm x 50.8mm clean glass substrate,
cured for 28 days, and showing no growth when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273 and
evaluated according to ASTM D3274.
4.
Salt-Spray Resistance: No deleterious affects when tested according to ICC-ES AC219.
5.
Tensile Adhesion: No failure in the EIFS, adhesive, base coat, or finish coat when tested in
accordance with EIMA 101.03/ ICC-ES AC219.
6.
Water Penetration: Sample consisting of minimum 25.4mm thick EIFS mounted on minimum
12.7mm thick gypsum board, cured for 28 days, and showing no water penetration into the plane
of the base coat to expanded-polystyrene board interface of the test specimen after 15 minutes
at 299Pa of air pressure difference or 20% of positive design wind pressure, whichever is
greater, across the specimen during a test period when tested per EIMA 101.02.
7.
Water Resistance: 3 No. samples, each consisting of minimum 25.4mm thick EIFS mounted on
minimum 12.7mm thick gypsum board; cured for 28 days; and showing no cracking, checking,
crazing, erosion, rusting, blistering, peeling, or delamination after testing for 14 days in
accordance with ASTM D2247.
8.
Wind-Driven-Rain Resistance: Resist wind-driven rain according to ICC-ES AC219.

29/07/2013
072400 / 2
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
9.
Impact Resistance: Sample consisting of 25.4mm thick EIFS when constructed, conditioned, and
tested in accordance with EIMA 101.86; and meeting or exceeding the following:
a)
Standard Impact Resistance: 2.8 to 5.6J.
b)
Medium Impact Resistance: 5.7 to 10.1J.
c)
High Impact Resistance: 10.2 to 17J.
d)
Ultra-High Impact Resistance: More than 17J.
10. Structural Performance Testing: EIFS assembly and components shall comply with ICC-ES
AC219 when tested in accordance with ASTM E330.
H.
2.3
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide EIFS and system components with the following
fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical EIFS and system components in
accordance with test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable
testing agency.
1.
Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Provide materials and construction tested for fire resistance in
accordance with ASTM E119.
2.
Full-Scale Multistory Fire Test: Tested mockup, representative of completed multistory wall
assembly of which EIFS is a part, complies with UBC Standard 26-4 for test method and required
fire-test-response characteristics of exterior non-load-bearing wall panel assemblies containing
foam-plastic insulation.
3.
Full-Scale Diversified Fire Test: Tested mockup, representative of completed multistory wall
assembly of which EIFS is a part, showing no significant contribution to vertical or horizontal
flame spread in accordance with ASTM E108 modified for testing vertical walls.
4.
Intermediate-Scale Multistory Fire Test: Tested mockup, representative of completed multistory

wall assembly of which EIFS is a part, complies with NFPA 285, UBC Standard 26-9 for test
method and required fire-test-response characteristics of exterior non-load-bearing wall panel
assemblies containing foam-plastic insulation.
5.
Radiant Heat Exposure: No ignition of EIFS when tested according to NFPA 268.
6.
Potential Heat: Acceptable level when tested according to NFPA 259.
7.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide insulation board, adhesives, base coats, and finish
coats with flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 450 or less, in
accordance with ASTM E84, UBC Standard 8-1.
MATERIALS
A.
Compatibility: Provide adhesive, fasteners, board insulation, reinforcing meshes, base and finish-coat
systems, sealants, and accessories that are compatible with one another and with substrates and
accepted for use by EIFS manufacturer for Project.
B.
Exterior Cement Board: Fiber cement board in accordance with ASTM C1186, Type A, for exterior
applications.
1.
Fasteners: Wafer-head or flat-head steel drill screws in accordance with ASTM C954, with an
organic-polymer coating or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of
more than 500 hours in accordance with ASTM B117.
C.
Primer/ Sealer: EIFS manufacturer's standard substrate conditioner with VOC content of 250g/ L or
less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), designed to seal
substrates from moisture penetration and to improve the bond between substrate of type indicated
and adhesive used for application of insulation.
D.
Flexible-Membrane Flashing: Cold-applied, fully self-adhering, self-healing, rubberized-asphalt and

polyethylene-film composite sheet or tape and primer; EIFS manufacturer's standard or product
recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer.
E.
Molded, Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Board Insulation: In accordance with ASTM C578, Type I; EIFS
manufacturer's requirements; and EIMA's "EIMA Guideline Specification for Expanded Polystyrene
(EPS) Insulation Board" for most stringent requirements for material performance and qualities of
insulation, including dimensions and permissible variations, and the following.
F.
1.
Aging: Before cutting and shipping, age insulation in block form by air drying for not less than six
weeks or by another method approved by EIMA that produces equivalent results.
2.
Flame-Spread and Smoke-Developed Indexes: 25 and 450 or less, respectively, in accordance

with ASTM E84.
3.
Dimensions: Provide insulation boards maximum 610mm x 1219mm and in thickness indicated,
but not more than 102mm thick or less than thickness allowed by ASTM C1397.
4.
Foam Shapes: Provide with profiles and dimensions indicated on the Design Drawings.
Reinforcing Mesh: Balanced, alkali-resistant, open-weave, glass-fiber mesh treated for compatibility
with other EIFS materials, made from continuous multiend strands with retained mesh tensile strength
of not less than 21dN/ cm in accordance with ASTM E2098 and EIMA 105.01; in accordance with
ASTM D578 and the following.
1.
Standard-Impact Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 136g/ m.
2.
Intermediate-Impact Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 339g/ m.

29/07/2013
072400 / 3
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
G.
3.
High-Impact Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 509g/ m.
4.
Heavy-Duty Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 678g/ m.
5.
Strip Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 127g/ m.
6.
Detail Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 136g/ m.
7.
Corner Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 244g/ m.
Base-Coat Materials: EIFS manufacturer's standard mixture complying with the following.
1.
H.
Water: Potable.
I.
Mechanical Fasteners: EIFS manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant fasteners consisting of

thermal cap, standard washer and shaft attachments, and fastener indicated below; selected for
properties of pullout, tensile, and shear strength required to resist design loads of application
indicated; capable of pulling fastener head below surface of insulation board; and of the following
description.
J.
K.
1.
For attachment to steel studs, provide steel drill screws in accordance with ASTM C954.
2.
For attachment to light-guage steel framing members not less than 0.45 mm in thickness, provide
steel drill screws in accordance with ASTM C1002.
3.
For attachment to wood framing members and plywood sheathing, provide steel drill screws in
accordance with ASTM C1002, Type W.
4.
For attachment to masonry and concrete substrates, provide sheathing dowel in form of a plastic
wing-tipped fastener with thermal cap, sized to fit insulation thickness indicated and to penetrate
substrate to depth required to secure anchorage.
5.
For attachment, provide manufacturer's standard fasteners suitable for substrate.
6.
Refer also to Section 050523 Metal Fastenings.
Trim Accessories: Type as designated or required to suit conditions indicated and to comply with EIFS
manufacturer's written instructions; manufactured from UV-stabilized PVC; and complying with ASTM
D 1784, manufacturer's standard Cell Class for use intended, and ASTM C 1063.
1.
Types as designated or required to suit conditions indicated and to comply with EIFS
2.
Manufactured from UV-stabilized PVC in accordance with ASTM D1784, manufacturer's

standard Cell Class for use intended, or an alternative acceptable to the Engineer.
3.
In accordance with ASTM C1063.
4.
Casing Bead: Prefabricated, one-piece type for attachment behind insulation, of depth required
to suit thickness of coating and insulation, with face leg perforated for bonding to coating and
back leg.
5.
Drip Screed/ Track: Prefabricated, one-piece type for attachment behind insulation with face leg
extended to form a drip, of depth required to suit thickness of coating and insulation, with face leg
perforated for bonding to coating and back leg.
6.
Expansion Joint: Prefabricated, one-piece V profile; designed to relieve stress of movement.
7.
Window Sill Flashing: Prefabricated type for both flashing and sloping sill over framing beneath
windows; with end and back dams; designed to direct water to exterior.
8.
Parapet Cap Flashing: Type for both flashing and covering parapet top with design in accordance
with ASTM C1397.
Elastomeric Sealants
1.
2.
2.4
Elastomeric Sealant Products: Provide EIFS manufacturer's listed and recommended chemically
curing, elastomeric sealant that is compatible with joint fillers, joint substrates, and other related
materials, and complies with requirements for products and testing indicated in ASTM C1481 and
with requirements in Section 079200 Joint Sealants for products corresponding to description
indicated below:
a)
Multicomponent, nonsag urethane sealant.
b)
Single-component, nonsag, neutral-curing silicone sealant.
c)
Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system shall have a VOC content of 250g/ L or
less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Preformed Foam Sealant Products: Provide sealant compatible with adjacent materials and
complying with requirements in Section 079200 Joint Sealants.
MIXING
A.
2.5
Factory-mixed non-cementitious formulation of polymer-emulsion adhesive and inert fillers that is

ready to use without adding other materials.
General: Comply with EIFS manufacturer's requirements for combining and mixing materials. Do not
introduce admixtures, water, or other materials except as recommended by EIFS manufacturer. Mix
materials in clean containers. Use materials within time period specified by EIFS manufacturer or
discard.
FINISHES

29/07/2013
072400 / 4
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
A.
The finish shall be one of the manufacturer's exterior ready mixed 100% acrylic resin containing
quartz aggregates or silicone resin based wall coatings or acceptable equivalent.
B.
Type, texture, color and aggregate sizes shall be as indicated on the Design Drawings and/ or as
sample acceptable to the Engineer.
C.
Finishes shall be formulated with Dirt Pickup Resistance (DPR) and Proven Mildew Resistance (PMR)
cross linked acrylic technology or equivalent agreed for long-term durability and low maintenance.
D.
Color selection: The lightness value of the exterior finish color to be applied over mineral wool shall be
20% or greater or agreed equivalent. All synthetic resin finish renders/ plasters shall have maximum
light fastness properties.
E.
Uniformity of Color and Texture

1.
Once samples of coatings have been accepted do not change type or proportion of constituent
materials.
2.
Ensure that supplies of materials are sufficient to give consistent and uniform color and texture.
End of Section

29/07/2013
072400 / 5
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 074113 METAL ROOF PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1
1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
PRODUCT SELECTION
DESIGN CRITERIA
MATERIALS

29/07/2013
2
2
3
5
074113
AECOM Middle East

Metal Roof Panels
Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 074113 METAL ROOF PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
General: Read this Work Section in conjunction with other related Work Sections, the Design
Drawings and the Contract Conditions.
B.
C.
1.
2.
3.

1.
1.2
Insulated metal roof.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer and Installer's Qualifications

1.
Manufacturer: A specialist with at least 10 years' successful experience in performing similar

work.
2.
Installer: A firm experienced in installing metal roof panels similar in material, design, and extent
to that indicated for this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance, and employs
workers trained by the manufacturer.
3.
B.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified in accordance with ASTM E329 for testing indicated.
C.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide metal roof panels having insulation core material with the
following surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products according to
ASTM E84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable
testing agency.
D.
1.
Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
2.
Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide metal roof panels identical to those of assemblies
tested for fire resistance in accordance with ASTM E119 by a Qualified Testing Agency. Identify
products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1.
qualified testing agency.
2.
Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E136.
E.
F.
Mock-ups
1.
G.
Prototypes
1.
H.
J.
Typical bay demonstrating interfaces/ demountability and relocatability for all types.

1.
I.
First installed structural bay of each type in location to be agreed with and to the acceptance of
the Engineer.
Certifications
1.
substrate materials including aluminum, finishes, glass, glass coatings, gaskets, setting blocks
and backing rods. These certificates shall relate to tests carried out by the sealant manufacturer.
2.
Satisfactory independent evidence and samples shall be required to prove that alternative
coloring processes to those specified shall provide an equal or superior standard of performance
and life expectancy.

1.
Provide independently certified test literature for each type of accessory. The test result data
shall meet the requirements of the Specification.
2.
Engineer.

29/07/2013
074113 / 1
AECOM Middle East

Metal Roof Panels
Avenue - Phase 2
3.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of metal roof panels from single source from a single
manufacturer.
B.
Type RFS-[...] Insulated Metal Deck Roof

1.
Description: Insulated metal deck roof, fully sealed and laid to fall.
2.
Manufacturer: Kingspan or acceptable equivalent.
3.
Product Reference: Topdeck or acceptable equivalent.
4.
Panel:
a)
1.
Thickness: 0.7mm.
2.
Finish: Polyester Coated.
b)
Insulation: Polyisocyanurate, thickness as required to comply with the U-value requirement.
c)
External Weather Membrane: High performance PVC single ply membrane.
C.
Fixing: One step fix fasteners.
D.
Accessories
1.
2.
Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components approved by roof panel manufacturer and as
required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, corner units,
ridge closures, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match
material and finish of metal roof panels unless otherwise indicated.
a)
Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal roof
panels.
b)
Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or

closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 25mm thick, flexible closure strips; cut or
premolded to match metal roof panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or
necessary to ensure weathertight construction.
c)
Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material
recommended by manufacturer.
Flashing and Trim:

a)
Formed from same material as roof panels, pre-painted with coil coating, minimum 0.45mm
thick.
b)
Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished
appearance.
c)
Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings,
ridges, fasciae, and fillers.
d)
Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal roof panels.
e)
Electrical continuity shall be achieved between conductive parts. Provision shall be made
for lightning protection integration requirements.
f)
Aluminum flashings shall be treated with anti-drumming insulation on the hidden face.
g)
Longitudinal joints shall have lapped or interconnecting joints, which shall be fully weather
sealed. Simple butt joints and butt straps shall not be acceptable. Joints and sealants shall
be designed to be capable of accommodating thermal movements of all flashings.
3.
Gutters: Formed from same material roof panels. Match profile of gable trim, complete with end
pieces, outlet tubes, and other special pieces as required. Fabricate in minimum 2400mm long
sections, of size and metal thickness as ***indicated on the Design Drawings/ according to
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual".*** Furnish gutter supports spaced a maximum of
900mm o.c., fabricated from same metal as gutters. Provide wire ball strainers of compatible
metal at outlets. Finish gutters to match ***metal roof panels*** ***roof fascia and rake trim***.
4.
Downspouts: Formed from same material as roof panels. Fabricate in 3000mm long sections,
complete with formed elbows and offsets, of size and metal thickness as ***indicated on the
Design Drawings/ according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"***. Finish
downspouts to match gutters.
5.
Roof Curbs: Fabricated from same material as roof panels, minimum 1.2mm thick; with bottom of
skirt profiled to match roof panel profiles, and welded top box and integral full-length cricket.
Fabricate curb subframing of minimum 1.5mm thick, angle, C, or Z-shaped steel sheet.
Fabricate curb and subframing to withstand indicated loads, of size and height indicated. Finish
roof curbs to match metal roof panels.
a)
2.2
Deck: Trapezoidal steel deck
Insulate roof curb with rigid insulation of suitable thickness.
DESIGN CRITERIA

29/07/2013
074113 / 2
AECOM Middle East

Metal Roof Panels
Avenue - Phase 2
A.
installation to comply with the Specification. This shall include ensuring that all interfacing
with the Structural details, and that interfaces with any external envelope elements are fully
weathertight.
B.
Systems shall include supports, bracketry, fastenings, seals, sealants, compressible fills, clips,
spacers, isolators, gaskets and all other accessories/ components necessary to complete the
installation.
C.
D.
Materials used for fastening shall be stainless steel in appropriate grade. Fastenings shall be
concealed or inconspicuous to the acceptance of the Engineer.
E.
2.3
A.
General Performance: Metal roof panels shall comply with performance requirements without failure
due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
B.
Specific Movements
C.
1.
The work shall withstand all movement of the structure under all design loads or combination of
loads without damage or reduction in performance.
2.
Structural Performance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of
gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, based
on testing in accordance with ASTM E 1592.
1.

a)
2.
1.
Self-weight of materials and components.
2.
Weight of attached or supported services and building maintenance equipment.

a)
3.
The work shall be capable of accommodating the following dead loads without any
Aluminum gauge and substrate construction shall accommodate the following live loads
without any reduction in performance:
1.
Loads associated with normal maintenance access traffic and in addition any
accidental loads imposed by persons falling against or onto the elements.
2.
Increased weight due to water absorption and sand.
3.
Loads repeatedly imposed by negative and positive wind pressures.
4.
There shall be no fracture or permanent deformation of any part, nor any deterioration
of the subsequent performance of the work resulting from live loads imposed.
Wind Loads:
a)
structural integrity and performance of the Work.
b)
Design Wind Pressures and Loads: Refer to the Structural Specification.
D.
Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for
wind-uplift-resistance class indicated.
E.
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature
changes. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and
nighttime-sky heat loss.
F.
1.
Temperature Change (Range): 67C, ambient; 100C, material surfaces.
2.
temperature differentials occurring. The Design shall cater for all temporary and permanent
conditions envisaged for the Work.
3.
The Work shall be capable of accommodating changes in dimension and shape of its
4.
Moisture Movement
1.
a)
b)

29/07/2013
074113 / 3
AECOM Middle East

Metal Roof Panels
Avenue - Phase 2
G.
Thermal Performance Requirements

1.
The average thermal transmittance (U-value) for the work shall be ***0.35***W/ mK or better.
H.
Thermal Performance: Provide insulated metal roof panel assemblies with thermal-resistance value
(R-value) indicated when tested in accordance with ASTM C518.
I.
Solar Performance Requirements: Exposure to sunlight during the service life of the work shall not
result in degradation of appearance or performance.
J.
Solar Performance
K.
L.
1.
Exposure to sunlight during the lifetime of the work shall not reduce the performance nor
adversely affect the visual appearance of any element/ component. Take into consideration
expected solar performance under varying conditions of solar radiation and external/ internal air
velocity.
2.
Submit independently certified test data in respect of solar and visible light performance
confirming compliance with the Specification.
3.
All insulation shall be adequately protected from ultraviolet light degradation.
Air Infiltration: Air leakage through assembly of not more than 0.3L/ s per m of roof area when tested
according to ASTM E1680 at the following test-pressure difference.
1.
Test-Pressure Difference: Positive and negative 75Pa.
2.
Positive Preload Test-Pressure Difference: Greater than or equal to 720Pa and the greater of
75% of building live load or 50% of building design positive wind-pressure difference.
3.
Negative Preload Test-Pressure Difference: 50% of design wind-uplift-pressure difference.
Water Penetration: No water penetration when tested in accordance with ASTM E1646 at the
following test-pressure difference.
1.
Test-Pressure Difference: 20% of positive design wind pressure, but not less than 300Pa and not
more than 575Pa.
2.
Positive Preload Test-Pressure Difference: Greater than or equal to 720Pa and the greater of
75% of building live load or 50% of building design positive wind-pressure difference.
3.
Negative Preload Test-Pressure Difference: 50% of design wind-uplift-pressure difference.
M.
Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E2140.
N.
remain dry.
O.
1.
P.
a)
The Work shall provide the sound insulation levels specified, which shall be achieved on
Site for each type, inclusive of all services penetrations and interfaces with other elements.
b)

1.
2.
Q.
Sound Insulation:

a)
b)
Surface Spread of Flame: In accordance with UL 723 and ASTM E84.

a)
b)
Fire and smoke stops shall be positively fixed in position in such a manner that they will not
become dislodged in the event of a fire.
Durability
1.
General:
a)
b)
2.
Impact and Abrasion Resistance: Generally, surfaces shall be sufficiently hard to resist heavy
impacts from hand-held objects without any noticeable change to the surface appearance. The
Work shall resist abrasion from cleaning methods and maintenance systems without any
noticeable change in surface appearance.
3.
Demountability:
a)
Elements of the Work shall be individually and independently removable ensuring access
for maintenance and/ or replacement of panels in the event of damage.
b)
part of the Work.

29/07/2013
074113 / 4
AECOM Middle East

Metal Roof Panels
Avenue - Phase 2
2.4
MATERIALS
A.
Metalwork General
1.
B.
All materials and components shall be durable and to the minimum standards set out in the
Specification and the International Building Code.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip process
and prepainted by the coil-coating process in accordance with ASTM A755/ A755M.
1.
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: In accordance with ASTM A653/ A653M, Z275 coating
designation; structural quality.
2.
Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: In accordance with ASTM A792/ A792M, Class
AZM150 coating designation, Grade 275; structural quality.
C.
Aluminum Sheet: Coil-coated sheet, in accordance with ASTM B209M, alloy as standard with
manufacturer, with temper as required to suit forming operations and structural performance required.
D.
Copper Sheet: In accordance with ASTM B370, cold-rolled copper sheet, H00 temper.
E.
Panel Sealants
1.
Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100% solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape
with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, non-sag, nontoxic, non-staining tape.
2.
Joint Sealant: In accordance with ASTM C920; elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone
sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal roof panels
and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal roof panel manufacturer.
3.
Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: In accordance with ASTM C1311.
F.
Isolating Tape: A type recommended for the purpose by the manufacturer. Apply to those surfaces of
supports that would otherwise be in contact with work or accessories after fastening.
G.
Miscellaneous Metal Framing
H.
I.
1.
Miscellaneous Metal Framing, General: In accordance with ASTM C645, cold-formed

metallic-coated steel sheet, hot-dip galvanized or coating with equivalent corrosion resistance
unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Fasteners for Miscellaneous Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding
power, and other properties required to fasten miscellaneous metal framing members to
substrates.
1.
Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs,
and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with
heads matching color of metal roof panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating.
Provide EPDM, PVC, or neoprene sealing washers.
2.
Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 0.4mm dry
film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type non-corrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur
components, and other deleterious impurities.
Fastenings
1.
Fastening components shall comply with all statutory requirements (and be to the acceptance of
the applicable municipality and/ or Structural Engineer) both as to strength and type and shall be
designed to carry all dead, live and wind loading under due consideration of any applicable
thermal movements.
2.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 316L stainless steel fasteners for exterior use and
zinc-plated fasteners with coating in accordance with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941 (ASTM
F1941M), Class Fe/ Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
3.
Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A307, Grade A (ASTM F568M,
Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A563 (ASTM A563M); and, where indicated, flat
washers.
4.
Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A325, Type 3 (ASTM A325M, Type 3);
with hex nuts, ASTM A563, Grade C3 (ASTM A563M, Class 8S3); and, where indicated, flat
washers.
5.
Stainless Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless steel bolts, ASTM
F738M; with hex nuts, ASTM F836M; and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group 2 (A4).
6.
Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A563; and,
where indicated, flat washers.
a)
7.
Frame Anchors: ASTM A879/ 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z (12G) coating designation; mill
phosphatised.
a)
8.
Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being
fastened is indicated to be galvanized.
For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet in accordance with ASTM A1008/ A1008M
or ASTM A1011/ A1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A153/ A153M, Class B.
Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanised according to ASTM A153/ A153M.

29/07/2013
074113 / 5
AECOM Middle East

Metal Roof Panels
Avenue - Phase 2
9.
Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application

indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for
attaching hollow metal frames of type indicated.
10. All aluminum fastening brackets and cleats shall be manufactured from the appropriate grade of
alloy. If visible, they shall be finished to match the metal panels and framing members.
11. All non-visible supporting aluminum sub-constructions shall be corrosion protected. Mill finished
aluminum shall not be used. Aluminum sub-constructions shall be separated from concrete by
bitumen paint or similar acceptable method. Austenitic stainless steel to ASTM A240/ A240M
may be used in lieu of aluminum for any supporting sub-constructions.
12. All screw fastenings and attachments shall be secured against vibrating loose.
End of Section

29/07/2013
074113 / 6
AECOM Middle East

Metal Roof Panels
Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 074200 WALL PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1
1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
PRODUCT SELECTION
DESIGN CRITERIA
MATERIALS
FINISHING

29/07/2013
1
2
2
4
5
074200
AECOM Middle East

Wall Panels
Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 074200 WALL PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.

1.
2.
3.

1.
C.
1.2
Terracotta Cladding.
Design Drawings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
Manufacturer and Installer's Qualifications

1.
Manufacturer: A specialist with at least 10 years successful experience in manufacturing similar

work as those specified in this Work Section.
2.
Installer: A firm experienced in installing metal panels similar in material, design, and extent to
that indicated for this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance, and employs
workers trained by the manufacturer.
3.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide metal wall panels identical to those of assemblies
tested for fire resistance in accordance with ASTM E119 by a Qualified Testing Agency. Identify
1.
C.
Mock-ups
1.
D.
Preconstruction Testing
1.
2.
3.
Include for testing by an accredited independent testing specialist or provide independently

certified test data to demonstrate compliance with the Specification for the following:
a)
Load testing.
b)
Deflection testing.
c)
Wind loads.
d)
Thermal performance.
e)
Air permeability.
f)
Capillarity.
g)
Weather and water resistance.
h)
Acoustic performance.
Off-Site testing:
a)
The Contractor may provide data from previous independently certified tests to demonstrate
that the Contractor's proposed systems meet the performance requirements of the
Specification. The information shall be to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.
b)
The provision of testing data or the carrying out of tests does not relieve the Contractor of
his responsibilities regarding the performance requirements, durability or service life
requirements.
c)
If suitable data to demonstrate compliance with the performance requirements is not

available, provide prototypes of each type and have them independently tested in
accordance with the testing criteria indicated in the Specification.
d)
certificates.
On-Site testing: The Contractor shall include for all on-Site testing specified herein.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION

29/07/2013
074200 / 1
AECOM Middle East

Wall Panels
Avenue - Phase 2
A.
B.
Source of Supply
1.
Obtain from a single manufacturer having at least 10 years experience of producing similar
products.
2.
Products visible in the finished work shall be produced from a single production run to ensure
uniformity.
Terracotta
1.
2.2
Type EWS-706 Terracotta Fins

a)
Description: Special shape ceramic elements for facade.
b)
Manufacturer: NBK Keramik GmbH & Co.
c)
Product Reference: TERRART-BAGUETTE.
d)
Size: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
e)
Corners: Mitre-cut.
f)
Colour: To be selected by the Engineer.
DESIGN CRITERIA
A.
weathertight.
B.
Systems shall include supports, brackets, fastenings, seals, sealants, compressible fills, clips,
installation.
C.
D.
Cladding Support System: Provide a structural steel cladding support system, as suitably required,
having due regard for any requirements in excess of primary structure indicated on the Structural
Engineer's drawings and also any requirements indicated on the Design Drawings. The support
system shall comply with the Structural Specification, including protective coatings.
E.
Materials used for fastening shall be stainless steel Type 316. Fastenings shall be concealed or
F.
G.
2.3
A.
General Performance
1.
B.
Wall panel assemblies shall comply with performance requirements without failure due to
defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

1.
Provide wall panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads and
stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, based on testing in accordance with ASTM
E1592/ ASTM E330:
a)
1.
b)
2.
1.
Metal wall panel: Assemblies shall withstand wind loads with horizontal deflections no
greater than 1/ 240 of the span.
2.
Metal faced composite wall panel assemblies shall withstand wind loads with horizontal
deflections no greater than 1/ 175 of the span at the perimeter and 1/ 60 of the span
anywhere in the panel.

a)
C.
Deflection Limits:
Specific Movements:
a)
3.
Uniform pressure of 1436Pa, acting inward or outward.
1.
2.
Thermal Movements

29/07/2013
074200 / 2
AECOM Middle East

Wall Panels
Avenue - Phase 2
1.
2.
3.
4.
Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing
buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of
connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of
materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
a)
D.
Moisture Movement
1.
E.
Temperature Change (Range): [....].
a)
b)
Due to the expansion of absorbed or retained moisture caused by freezing.
c)

1.
Thermal Performance Requirements: The average thermal transmittance (U-value) for the work
shall be ***0.35***W/ mK or better.
2.
Solar Performance Requirements: Exposure to sunlight during the service life of the work shall
not result in degradation of appearance or performance.
3.
a)
Air leakage through assembly of not more than 0.3L/ s per m of wall area when tested in
accordance with ASTM E283 at the following test-pressure difference:
1.
4.
Condensation: No condensation shall take place either on internal or external surfaces, or within
conditions.
5.
remain dry.
6.
a)
with ASTM E331 at the following test-pressure difference:
1.
b)
F.
1.
2.


1.
G.
Sound Insulation:
a)
The Work shall provide the sound insulation levels specified, which shall be achieved on
Site for each type, inclusive of all services penetrations and interfaces with other elements.
b)

1.
2.

a)
b)

a)

29/07/2013
074200 / 3
AECOM Middle East

Wall Panels
Avenue - Phase 2
b)
H.

1.
2.
3.
2.4
General:
a)
b)

a)
appearance.
b)
c)
d)
in resisting abrasion from pedestrian traffic (hands, rings, luggage, cloth, shoes, etc.) and
any other abrasion resulting from adjacent traffic movements.
Demountability:
a)
b)
part of the work.
MATERIALS
A.
B.
Panel Materials
1.
Terracotta.
2.
Glass: Refer to section 088000 Glazing.
Site-Installed Thermal Insulation

1.
C.
Refer to Section 072100 Thermal Insulation.
1.
Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs,
and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with
heads matching color of metal wall panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating.
Provide EPDM, PVC, or neoprene sealing washers.
2.
Metal Framing:
3.
4.
a)
Miscellaneous Metal Framing, General: In accordance with ASTM C645, cold-formed

metallic-coated steel sheet, ASTM A653/ A653M, G40 (Z120) hot-dip galvanized/ G60
(Z180) hot-dip galvanized or coating with equivalent corrosion resistance unless otherwise
indicated.
b)
Fasteners for Miscellaneous Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance,
holding power, and other properties required to fasten miscellaneous metal framing
members to substrates.
c)
Aluminum Extrusions: In accordance with ASTM B221/ ASTM B221M, alloy and temper
recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish as indicated.
Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete wall panel assembly including
trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers,
closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of wall panels, unless otherwise
indicated.
a)
Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same metal as metal wall
panels.
b)
Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material
recommended by manufacturer.
c)
Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or

closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 25mm thick, flexible closure strips; cut or
pre-molded to match metal wall panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or
necessary to ensure weathertight construction.
Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.46mm minimum thickness, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel
sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating. Provide flashing
and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations
include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings,
rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish
system as adjacent metal wall panels.

29/07/2013
074200 / 4
AECOM Middle East

Wall Panels
Avenue - Phase 2
5.
Panel Sealants:
a)
b)
Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100% solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant

tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic,
nonstaining tape 13mm wide and 3mm thick.
c)
d. Joint Sealant: In accordance with ASTM C920; elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or

silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal
wall panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal wall panel
manufacturer.
e.
d)
6.
Welding Electrodes: Alloy and type required for strength and compatibility of metals welded.
7.
Gasket Extrusions: Provide neoprene gasket extrusions or acceptable equivalent as a

sustainable option to uPVC to the acceptance of the Engineer.
a)
***Non-Polluting Materials: Provide non-polluting materials that comply with the

requirements as stated in Credit SM-1 within the UPC's Pearl Building Rating System:
Design and Construction document.***
8.
Inserts: Stainless steel grade 1.4401 (316) of suitable design and strength to suit application.
9.
Shims: Horseshoe type made from stainless or suitably coated steel where concealed. Use
sleeve type spacers of stainless steel for visible shims.
10. Breather Membrane Material: Spun bonded polypropylene or similar to meet the performance
requirements.
11. Profile Fillers: Type(s) supplied by the manufacturer accurately matching sheet profile and
perforated ventilation and drainage of condensation at centers of crowns/ troughs as appropriate.
12. Fire Resisting Profile Fillers: Type(s) supplied by the manufacturer accurately matching sheet
profile.
13. Vapor Control Layer Material: High performance reinforced membranes of foil or plastics,
protected both sides by rigid facings/ linings to give a Class spread of flame to meet the
performance criteria specified.
14. Isolating Tape: A type recommended for the purpose by the manufacturer. Apply to those
surfaces of supports that would otherwise be in contact with work or accessories after fastening.
D.
Fastenings
1.
General: Provide factory-formed metal wall panels designed to be site assembled by lapping.
2.
All necessary fastenings shall be installed for the work.
3.
Direct contact between aluminum or aluminum alloys and treated timber shall be avoided, unless
4.
Visible fastenings shall match accepted samples.
5.
Unless otherwise specified, the following basic requirements shall be adhered to:
6.
E.
2.5
a)
used.
b)
Fasteners: Type and alloy as required for proper strength and to prevent galvanic action with
materials fastened. Exposed fasteners shall have countersunk ***Phillips*** head with finish to
match adjacent surface.
Supports
1.
Aluminum split battens on softwood packing pieces to take panelling out to the designed wall
thickness; fixed to partitions or solid wall. Fastenings to suit metal stud or solid partitions as
appropriate.
2.
Softwood split battens fixed to partitions or solid wall. Fastenings to suit metal stud or solid
partitions. Battens to be as follows:
a)
Regularized softwood free from decay and active insect attack and with no knots wider than
half the width of the section.
b)
Moisture content at the time of fastenings shall not exceed 18%.
c)
Battens screwed to studs as appropriate or screwed and plugged to solid walls.
d)
Support system shall be capable of maintaining a consistent overall wall thickness.
FINISHING
A.
General
1.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

29/07/2013
074200 / 5
AECOM Middle East

Wall Panels
Avenue - Phase 2
2.
Carry out welding, cutting and machining before applying protective coating and finishes.
3.
Prime visible surfaces of non-ferrous metals. Prime all surfaces, including joint faces, of ferrous
metal fabrications. Do not paint surfaces within 50mm of Site welds; prepare and finish after
connections are completed.
4.
Apply finishes to visible surfaces of non-ferrous and ferrous metals in accordance with the paint
manufacturer's instructions.
5.
Prime paint items to receive Site-applied paint in accordance with Section 099100 Painting.
6.
Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are

acceptable if they are within of the range of accepted samples. Noticeable variations in the
same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if
they are within the range of accepted samples and are assembled or installed to minimize
contrast.
7.
Site Applied Paint: In accordance with Section 099100 Painting.
8.
Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
End of Section

29/07/2013
074200 / 6
AECOM Middle East

Wall Panels
Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 074213 METAL WALL PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1
1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
PRODUCT SELECTION
DESIGN CRITERIA
MATERIALS

29/07/2013
1
3
3
5
074213
AECOM Middle East

Metal Wall Panels
Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 074213 METAL WALL PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.

1.
Supply, deliver, install and warrant the work in strict compliance with materials and workmanship
requirements of the Specification.
2.
safe installation.
3.
Section Includes
1.
C.
1.2
Metal cladding panels.
Design Drawings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.
A specialist with at least 10 years successful experience in performing similar work.
2.
B.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified in accordance with ASTM E329 for testing indicated.
C.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide metal wall panels identical to those of assemblies
tested for fire resistance in accordance with ASTM E119 by a qualified testing agency. Identify
1.
D.
Mock-ups
1.
E.
Preconstruction Testing
1.
All fastenings shall be tested by an independent Testing Authority acceptable to the Engineer.
2.

certified test data to demonstrate compliance with the Specification for the following:
3.
4.
a)
Load testing.
b)
Deflection testing.
c)
Wind loads.
d)
Thermal performance.
e)
Air permeability.
f)
Capillarity.
g)
Weather and water resistance.
h)
Acoustic performance.
i)
Electrical continuity testing.
Off-Site Testing
a)
The Contractor may provide data from previous independently certified tests to demonstrate
that the Contractor's proposed systems meet the performance requirements of the
Specification. The information shall be to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.
b)
The provision of testing data or the carrying out of tests does not relieve the Contractor of
his responsibilities regarding the performance requirements, durability or service life
requirements.
c)
If suitable data to demonstrate compliance with the performance requirements is not

available, provide prototypes of each type and have them independently tested in
accordance with the testing criteria indicated in the Specification.
d)
certificates.
On-Site testing: The Contractor shall include for all on-Site testing specified herein.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION

29/07/2013
074213 / 1
AECOM Middle East

Metal Wall Panels
Avenue - Phase 2
A.
B.
Source of Supply
1.
Obtain each type of metal wall panel from a single source from a single manufacturer.
2.
manufacturer.
3.
uniformity.
Metal Panel Cladding

1.
Description: Proprietary cladding system with metal panels fixed to insulated metal panel
substrate on secondary metal framework.
2.
Manufacturers: Kingspan or acceptable equivalent.
3.
Product Reference: Benchmark Metallic Facade System
4.
Fire Properties: Class 1 surface spread as per BS 476-7.
5.
Panels
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
6.
1.
Panel Type: Shingle, 0.9mm thick.
2.
Finish: Mill finish, Precoat, Embossed, 3 layer PVDF pure white colour.
Type EWS-302 Aluminium Panel Cladding

1.
Panel Type: Classing 2 - Metal sheet facade finish.
2.
Finish: To be confirmend by the Engineer.

1.
Panel Type: Tmber painted aluminium cladding panel.
2.
Finish: Manufacturer's timber look coating.

1.
Panel Type: Interlocking plank.
2.

1.
2.

1.
2.
Type EWS-307 Copper Panel Cladding

1.
Panel Type: Copper interlocking plank.
2.
Finish: Copper finish.
Type EWS-309 Corten Steel Panel Cladding

1.
Panel Type: Pre-coated weathered steel interlocking plank.
2.
Finish: Manufacturer's chemically whethered finish.
Insulated Metal Panel for substrate

a)
b)
c)
C.
Type EWS-301 Aluminium Shingle Cladding
Liner Sheets: S220GD+ZA hot-dip zinc/ aluminium Galfan coated steel to BS EN10214.
1.
External Sheet Thickness: 0.63mm.
2.
Internal Sheet Thickness: 0.4mm.
Finish:
1.
External Sheet: Outside manufacturer's special coating, and inside polyester powder
coating.
2.
Internal Sheet: Polyester coating on both sides.
Insulation: Polyisocyanurate foam.

1.
Thickness: As required to acheive specified U-Value.
2.
Seals: All side joints shall have factory applied seals fitted into the grooves to
automatically seal the joints between panels.
Type EWS-704 Picture Perforated Aluminium Panel Cladding

1.
Description: Bespoke picture perforated, openwork aluminium cladding.
2.
Manufacturer: Locker Group (NZ) Ltd., or acceptable equivalent.
3.
Sheet Thickness: To be determined by the manufacturer to suit the purpose and location.

29/07/2013
074213 / 2
AECOM Middle East

Metal Wall Panels
Avenue - Phase 2
D.
4.
Fixing: Panels shall be secret fixed to standardized secondary metal framing and shall be hung
from the building structure,
5.
Back Lighting: Provide lighting as back-lit and the lighting installation shall be concealed from the
public view and shall have easy access for maintenance.
Type EWS-804 Timber Printed Aluminium Cladding

1.
Description: Timber printed aluminium sheet cladding on stainless steel support framework.
2.
Manufacturer: AluMetal LLC., or acceptable equivalent.
3.
Product reference: Modern Geometric Timber Screen.
4.
Finish: Timber coating.
5.
Colour and Texture: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
6.
Accessories:
7.
E.
Breather membrane: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
b)
Thermal insulation: For achieving an overall construction U Value of [...] W/ m2 K and to

comply with minimum DM standards.
c)
Vapour control layer: As required to substrate including taping and sealing.
Fixing: Marine quality stainless steel sub-frame and secret fixings to manufacturers
recommendations. Use spacers to avoid cross corrosion from carbon steel to marine quality
stainless steel fixings .
Wall Panel Accessories

1.
2.2
a)
Provide components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly including trim, copings,
fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and
similar items. Match material and finish of metal wall panels, unless otherwise indicated.
DESIGN CRITERIA
A.
weathertight.
B.
Systems shall include supports, brackets, fastenings, seals, sealants, compressible fills, clips,
installation.
C.
D.
Cladding Support System: Provide a structural steel cladding support system, as suitably required,
having due regard for any requirements in excess of primary structure indicated on the Structural
Engineer's drawings and also any requirements indicated on the Design Drawings. The support
system shall comply with the Structural Engineer's steelwork specification, including protective
coatings.
E.
The work shall comply with the visual requirements indicated on the Design Drawings and provide a
consistent finish to all surfaces.
F.
The Contractor shall propose grades and thickness to suit service conditions and meet performance
requirements.
G.
Materials used for fastening shall be stainless steel grade 316. Fastenings shall be concealed or
H.
I.
2.3
A.
General Performance
1.
B.
Metal wall panel assemblies shall comply with performance requirements without failure due to
defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

1.
Provide metal wall panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads
and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, based on testing in accordance with
ASTM E1592:
a)
1.
b)
2.
Uniform pressure of 957 Pa/ 1436 Pa, acting inward or outward.
Deflection Limits: Metal wall panel assemblies shall withstand wind loads with horizontal
deflections no greater than 1/ 180 or 1/ 240 of the span.
Specific Movements:

29/07/2013
074213 / 3
AECOM Middle East

Metal Wall Panels
Avenue - Phase 2
3.
a)
b)

a)
C.
1.
2.
Thermal Movements
1.
Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing
buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of
connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of
materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
a)
D.
2.
3.

1.
Moisture Movement:
a)
2.
3.
1.
2.
Due to the expansion of absorbed or retained moisture caused by low temperatures.
3.

a)
The average thermal transmittance (U-value) for the work shall be ***0.35W/ mK*** or
better.
b)


a)
4.
a)
Air Infiltration: Air leakage through assembly of not more than 0.3L/ s per m of wall area
when tested in accordance with ASTM E283 at the following test-pressure difference:
1.
5.
Condensation: No condensation shall take place either on internal or external surfaces, or within
the interstitial construction thickness of the work under the temperature and humidity conditions
prevalent in the region.
6.
remain dry.
7.
a)
with ASTM E 331 at the following test-pressure difference:
1.
b)
1.
2.


29/07/2013
074213 / 4
AECOM Middle East

Metal Wall Panels
Avenue - Phase 2
E.
F.

1.
2.
Sound Insulation: The Work shall provide the sound insulation levels specified, which shall be
achieved on Site for each type, inclusive of all services penetrations and interfaces with other
elements.
3.
Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) shall be in accordance with ASTM C423.

1.
Refer to the Fire Strategy Report.
2.
3.
G.
b)
Surface spread of flame: In accordance with UL 723 and ASTM E84.

a)
b)

1.
2.
3.
2.4
a)
General:
a)
b)

a)
appearance.
b)
c)
d)
Demountability:
a)
b)
part of the work.
MATERIALS
A.
Panel Materials
1.
2.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip
process and pre-painted by the coil-coating process in accordance with ASTM A755/ A755M.
a)
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: In accordance with ASTM A653/ A653M, G90 Z275
coating designation; structural quality.
b)
Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: In accordance with ASTM A792/ A792M, Class
AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40 / Class AZM150 coating designation, Grade 275;
structural quality.
Aluminum Sheet:
a)
Coil-coated sheet, in accordance with ASTM B209M, alloy as standard with manufacturer,
with temper as required to suit forming operations and structural performance required.
b)
Only appropriate grades, strengths and thicknesses of aluminum shall be used to ensure
that all structural and finishing requirements of the Specification are met. The wall
thicknesses of aluminum extrusions shall be sufficient to ensure their rigidity in the lengths
required in the final installation.
3.
Copper Sheet: In accordance with ASTM B370, cold-rolled copper sheet, H00 temper.
4.
Stainless Steel Sheet: In accordance with ASTM A240/ A240M, Type 304 (for internal use) or
Type 316 (for external use), fully annealed.
a)

29/07/2013
074213 / 5
AECOM Middle East

Metal Wall Panels
Avenue - Phase 2
5.
B.
b)
Sheet: Tension levelled.
c)
Tubes: Continuously welded, seamless after final finishing.
d)
Fasteners, Bolts, Screws, Nuts and Fastenings: Stainless steel grade A2 or grade A4.
Select the property Class of fastenings to meet the specified performance requirements.
Panel Sealants:
a)
b)
Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100% solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant

tape with release-paper backing.
Provide permanently elastic, non-sag, non-toxic,
non-staining tape 13mm wide and 3mm thick.
c)
Joint Sealant: In accordance with ASTM C920; elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or

silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal
wall panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal wall panel
manufacturer.
d)
1.
Panel Fasteners:
a)
2.
C.
Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and other
suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with
heads matching color of metal wall panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied
coating. Provide EPDM, PVC, or neoprene sealing washers.
Metal Framing:
a)
Miscellaneous Metal Framing, General: In accordance with ASTM C 645, cold-formed

metallic-coated steel sheet, ASTM A653/ A653M, G40 (Z120) hot-dip galvanized or ASTM A
653/ A 653M, G60 (Z180) hot-dip galvanized or coating with equivalent corrosion resistance
b)
"C" channel profile with 10mm web thickness, coated with 3 layer PVDF coating.
c)
Fasteners for Miscellaneous Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance,
holding power and other properties required to fasten miscellaneous metal framing
members to substrates.
d)
Aluminum extrusions: In accordance with ASTM B221/ ASTM B221M, alloy and temper
recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish as indicated.
Fastenings
1.
General: Provide factory-formed metal wall panels designed to be site assembled by lapping.
2.
All necessary fastenings shall be installed for the work.
3.
Direct contact between aluminum or aluminum alloys and treated timber shall be avoided, unless
4.
Visible fastenings shall match accepted samples.
5.
Unless otherwise specified, the following basic requirements shall be adhered to:
6.
a)
used.
b)
Fasteners: Type and alloy as required for proper strength and to prevent galvanic action with
materials fastened. Exposed fasteners shall have countersunk ***Phillips*** head with finish to
match adjacent surface.
D.
Inserts: Stainless steel grade 1.4401 (316) of suitable design and strength to suit application.
E.
Vapor Control Layer Material: High performance reinforced membranes of foil or plastics, protected
both sides by rigid facings/ linings to give a Class spread of flame to meet the performance criteria
specified.
F.
Isolating Tape: A type recommended for the purpose by the manufacturer. Apply to those surfaces of
supports that would otherwise be in contact with work or accessories after fastening.
G.
Refer also to Section 050523 Metal Fastenings.

End of Section

29/07/2013
074213 / 6
AECOM Middle East

Metal Wall Panels
Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 075400 MEMBRANE ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
SUMMARY
QUALITY ASSURANCE
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
WARRANTIES
1
1
1
1
1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
PRODUCT SELECTION
MATERIALS
2
2
3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
EXAMINATION
PREPARATION
INSTALLATION
SITE QUALITY CONTROL
CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
PROTECTION
MAINTENANCE

29/07/2013
5
5
5
7
8
8
9
075400
AECOM Middle East

Membrane Roofing
Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 075400 MEMBRANE ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.
2.
3.

1.
D.
1.2
Membrane roof.
Design Drawings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Standards: Comply with the requirements of National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA)
Roofing Manual publications.
B.
Contractor's Qualifications: A specialist, who has at least 5 years' experience performing similar work,
is an approved/ licensed installer of the membrane manufacturer for the specified materials.
C.
Mock-ups
1.
D.
Prototypes
1.
E.
1.3

1.
F.
First structural bay of each type in location to be agreed with and to the acceptance of the
Engineer.

1.
2.
Engineer.
3.

A.
Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's unopened containers or packages fully identified with
name and qualifying information.
B.
Storage: Store materials in a clean, dry area protected from water and direct sunlight. Store materials
away from excessive heat. Do not exceed the allowable structural capacity of the storage area.
Observe manufacturer's recommended temperature limits.
C.
Handling: Handle in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Replace materials that are
damaged, contaminated or otherwise unfit for use. Do not open packaging or remove labels until just
prior to installation.
1.4
A.
Do not proceed with the work during inclement weather, when the temperature is below 5C, the wind
speed is in excess of 7m/ sec, or when the weather forecasts are unfavourable, unless suitable
procedures have been agreed with the manufacturer.
B.
Surfaces to receive the membrane shall be completely dry and free of entrapped moisture detrimental
to the installation.
1.5
WARRANTIES
A.
Material Source and Warranty

1.
The components of the system shall be covered by a single source warranty. Therefore,
guarantees shall be obtained on the basis of a "back to back" type agreement provided jointly by
the membrane manufacturer and the Contractor for the complete roofing system(s). The warranty
shall cover the entire roof assembly and be obtained for the full warranty period with an
insurance company backing based upon a single whole term premium paid at the inception of the
policy with no requirement for periodic renewal premiums.

29/07/2013
075400 / 1
AECOM Middle East

Membrane Roofing
Avenue - Phase 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION
A.
B.
Source of Supply
1.
Obtain products from manufacturers having at least 10 years' experience of producing similar
materials. Materials and components shall be obtained from or under the direction of the
membrane manufacturer.
2.
Products visible in the finished work shall be from a single production run to ensure uniformity.
Type RFS-201 Reinforced Bitumen Membrane Roofing

1.
Description: 3 layer membrane roof covering system with loose laid ballast including all
necessary accessories attached to structural deck. All as indicated on the Design Drawings.
2.
3.
Product Reference: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
4.
Reinforced Bitumen Membrane.

a)
Thickness: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
b)
Color: Black.
c)
Fully bonded.
5.
Insulation: Extruded polystyrene insulation. Thickness as needed to achieve required U-value.
6.
Filter layer: Provide manufacturer's standard.
7.
Stone Ballast (RFS-601):

a)
8.
9.
2.2
White colored stone ballast.
Paving Slabs
a)
600mm x 600mm precast concrete paving slabs on support pedestals for access areas.
b)
Color: Natural.
c)
d)
Joints shall be open as indicated on the Design Drawings.
Ancillary Items:
a)
Pressed metal flashings with mill/ anodized/ polyester powder coated/ PVDF finish to all
upstands and perimeter conditions as required.
b)
Drainage outlets with compatible leaf/ gravel guards.
c)
Ballast stops in lieu of parapet upstands as required to restrain the spread of ballast and
provide an uninterrupted roof finish.
d)
Vapor control layer, sub-layers/ interlayers, sealants (color coordinated where visible),
fastenings, fillets, adhesives and other auxiliary accessories recommended by the system
manufacturer to complete the installation and compatible with membrane roofing.
A.

1.
2.
Movement: The work shall be capable of accommodating the following movements without any
permanent deformation or reduction in the specified performance:
a)
Due to deflection under design loads.
b)
Due to the effects of repeated wind loading.
c)
Due to changes in dimension and shape components arising from building movements,
d)
Due to moisture movement.
e)
Reference shall be made to the Structural Specification for the anticipated movement of the
Building Structure and relevant elements. The precise characteristics of the adjacent
structure and any provision for structural support in the work shall be ascertained.
Live/ Imposed Loads:

a)
The work (paving slabs, ballast, insulation and all aspects of the waterproofing system) shall
be capable of accommodating the following live loads without any reduction in performance
for the design life specified.
1.
Vertically applied loads acting on the surface of the work arising from maintenance and
cleaning operations.
2.
Roof loads to be calculated for a roof with access for cleaning and maintenance.
3.
Impact loads, or transferred impact loads, that occur during their service life, without
deterioration in performance and without sustaining non-repairable damage.
4.
The loads created by rainwater.

29/07/2013
075400 / 2
AECOM Middle East

Membrane Roofing
Avenue - Phase 2
5.
B.
1.
Thermal Performance:
a)
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
The average thermal transmittance of the roof shall be ***0.25W/ mK*** or better.
Watertightness:
a)
Provide a secure, free draining and completely waterproof system.
b)
The work shall provide the absolute prevention of water leakage inside the building through
the roof finishes, abutments with adjacent work, penetrations for services and all interface
conditions.
c)
Unless otherwise agreed, all roof finishes shall be installed such that no track migration of
water is possible beneath the principal waterproofing membrane.
d)
All waterproof membranes shall form continuous waterproofing barriers either fully bonded
or mechanically fastened or ballasted to their substrates as specified.
Drainage:
a)
The work shall be laid to sufficient falls, with a minimum of 2%, to ensure effective disposal
of water to outlets provided.
b)
Provide all drainage outlets and provide flow rate calculations.
c)
Ensure that all roof outlets are suitable and compatible for the roofing membrane(s) used.
Condensation:
a)
No condensation shall take place either on internal surfaces or adjacent or external surfaces
of the work under the temperature and humidity conditions prevailing on Site.
b)
Determine the interstitial condensation risk of all roof types with the calculation method to
ensure that damage due to interstitial condensation does not occur. Calculations shall be
submitted for acceptance by the Engineer, based on the atmospheric data given.
c)
Vapor control barrier: Install, as necessary, a vapor/ control barrier and associated
protection to provide a continuous line of protection. At interfaces between the work by other
trades the interfaces shall not result in material breakdown or other failure of seals at these
locations.
Solar Performance:
a)
Exposure to sunlight during the lifetime of the work shall not reduce the performance nor
adversely affect the visual appearance of any element/ component. Take into consideration
expected solar performance under varying conditions of solar radiation and external/
internal air velocity.
b)
confirming compliance with the Specification.
c)
All insulation shall be adequately protected from ultraviolet light degradation.
Moisture Movement:
a)
The work shall withstand the following movements without permanent deformation or any
1.
7.
C.
2.3
Due to changes in the moisture content of their components, resulting from variations
in the moisture content of the air, either inside or outside the building.
Local Factors:
a)
Visit the Site in order to become familiar with local requirements. Local microclimatic
conditions shall be taken into account and grades of materials assessed as suitably durable
for the location shall be selected.
b)
likely to have an adverse effect upon materials intended for the work. More appropriate
1.
D.
Loads imposed by water testing (including within gutters).
Sound Reduction Requirements: Refer to the Acoustic Report.
Fire Performance
1.
Combustion: The work shall incorporate materials of limited combustibility that do not give off
toxic fumes.
2.
MATERIALS
A.
Vapor Control Layers

1.
As recommended by the system manufacturer.
2.
Products shall have suitable gauges, moisture vapor transmission rates given in g/ m hr values,
and moisture vapor resistances given in MNs/ g values.

29/07/2013
075400 / 3
AECOM Middle East

Membrane Roofing
Avenue - Phase 2
B.
C.
D.
E.
Polyethylene Vapor Barrier

1.
Polyethylene Film: In accordance with ASTM D4397, minimum 0.15mm thick, with maximum
permeance rating of 7.5 ng/ Pa x s x m.
2.
Product shall be flexible when cold, resistant to chemicals and ageing and be rot-proof.
3.
Suitable tapes for jointing.
Bituminous Vapor Barrier

1.
Products shall be polyester based with expandable aluminium core and Styrene Butadiene
Styrene (SBS) coating.
2.
Fully adhered/ bonded in a suitable grade of bitumen.
Sheet Membranes
1.
High performance sheet membranes shall include fleece backing to prevent ghosting of joints in
underlying system components or substrates.
2.
Where required by the particular system, the membrane shall be suitable for exposure to UV
light/ solar properties.
3.
Joints shall be lapped and hot-air welded, unless confirmed otherwise by the system
manufacturer.
4.
Color shall be as described.
Insulation: Refer to Section 072100 Thermal Insulation.

1.
F.
G.
H.
Determine the type, thickness and density of the insulation and any integral or separate overlay
to satisfy the following criteria:
a)
Insulation shall meet the requirements of the International Building Code and be suitable for
the roof construction in accordance with the system description.
b)
Insulation shall be tapered to provide the necessary roof gradients, as indicated on the
Design Drawings.
c)
The thermal transmittance of the roof shall be no more than the values specified.
d)
The compressive strength of the insulation shall be capable of supporting the overlaying
materials, pedestrian maintenance access loading and temporary loading during
replacement of mechanical plant. Compressive strength shall be tested.
e)
The insulation when laid shall be suitably even, stable and robust and capable of receiving
other system components as required.
f)
g)
The insulation shall not bulge, sag, delaminate or detach during its installation or
poured-in-place during the life of the work.
h)
Insulation shall have zero Ozone Depleting Potential (ODP), be CFC and HFC free and
have a Global Warming Potential (GWP) of less than 5.
Sub-layers/ Interlayers
1.
As recommended by the system manufacturer.
2.
Polyester, polypropylene or glassfiber based fleeces, or similar, installed as various sub-layers/

interlayers (filter layers/ protection layers/ cushion layers/ levelling layers/ separation layers/ slip
layers and others as applicable) to the required system installations and with suitable values to
achieve the requirements of the Specification.
3.
Fleece type shall be compatible with and suitable for the type and condition of interfacing
component/ substrate.
4.
Where necessary, the sub-layers shall be suitable for exposure to UV light/ solar properties.
Stone Ballast
1.
River washed, smooth, round aggregate graded 20mm to 40mm nominal diameter, free from
fractures, loam, sand or other foreign substances.
2.
Ballast shall be solar reflective and of type to be agreed by the Engineer.
3.
Ballast shall be of a type that ensures that birds cannot pick it up.
Ballast Stops
1.
Stainless steel minimum Type 316L, or similar, of suitable dimensions.
2.
Inclusive of factory formed drainage apertures, whilst retaining the ballast.
3.
Provide all fastenings mechanisms.
I.
Primers: As recommended for the purpose by the manufacturer.
J.
Bonding Compound: As recommended for the purpose by the manufacturer to suit the conditions and
type of surface.
K.

29/07/2013
075400 / 4
AECOM Middle East

Membrane Roofing
Avenue - Phase 2
L.
Aluminum Flashings:
1.
Aluminum flashings shall be formed from aluminum alloy sheets, fabricated from the most
appropriate grade and thickness of material, in a temper suitable for the particular type of
application and degree of forming to be used. In addition, the alloy shall be selected to satisfy the
requirements of the chosen finishing process.
2.
Aluminum flashings shall provide a visually flat surface and eliminate distortion and permanent
deformation caused by solar radiation.
3.
Flashings shall be finished as described.
4.
Longitudinal joints shall have lapped or interconnecting joints that shall be fully weather-sealed.
Simple butt joints and butt straps shall not be acceptable. Joints and sealants shall be designed
to be capable of accommodating thermal movements of all flashings.
5.
Electrical continuity shall be achieved between conductive parts. Provision shall be made for
lightning protection integration requirements.
6.
Aluminum flashings shall be treated with anti-drumming insulation on the hidden face.
M.
Angle Fillets: Type(s) recommended by the system manufacturer, not less than 50mm x 50mm.
N.
Protection Boards: Suitable protection boards shall be provided.
O.
Roof Ventilators: Suitable roof ventilators shall be provided.
P.
Walkway Membrane: Walkway membrane tiles shall be laid on reinforcement as recommended by the
manufacturer.
Q.
Outlets
1.
Outlets and leaf/ gravel guards shall be accepted by the roofing system manufacturer and
Services Engineer.
2.
Outlets shall not cold bridge the work.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
3.3
Verification of Conditions: Prior to commencing installation, examine the substrate, adjacent

construction and conditions in which the work will be installed. Verify surfaces to receive the work of
this Work Section. Notify the Engineer of unsatisfactory conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
General: Perform preparatory work in accordance with the membrane manufacturer's

recommendations. Do not cut or drill work of other Sections, without acceptance from the Engineer.
B.
Deck Preparation: Provide temporary drainage at the low points of the roof to ensure dry working
conditions.
C.
Suitability of Base
1.
All surfaces to be covered shall be firmly fastened, clean, dry, smooth, free from frost,
unacceptable curing compounds, form release agents and other surface contaminants voids and
protrusions.
2.
The base shall have even falls with no areas subject to ponding.
3.
All preliminary work including formation of upstands, curbs, box gutters, sumps, grooves, chases,
pipe sleeves, expansion joints and fastening of battens, fillets, anchoring plugs and strips shall
be complete and satisfactory.
4.
The substrate shall be thoroughly swept prior to application of the roof membrane.
5.
The substrate shall be blown clean using an air compressor to remove any remaining loose
debris.
D.
Protection: Cover or otherwise protect adjoining surfaces from damage or soiling during the execution
of the work.
E.
Setting Out: Accurately set out the work, particularly in relation to interfaces with other adjacent or
related work.
F.
Inspection
1.
Protection board and surfaces (screed topping, concrete slabs and concrete upstands by others)
to receive the work shall be examined and verified as acceptable and proper for the application.
In particular the following shall be verified:
2.
Structural adequacy of deck.
3.
Substrate falls.
4.
Proper deck falls.
5.
Proper drains and other flashing details. (Note: Rainwater outlets shall be compatible with the
membrane finish to the roof.)
6.
Structural movement joints.
INSTALLATION

29/07/2013
075400 / 5
AECOM Middle East

Membrane Roofing
Avenue - Phase 2
A.
B.
Standards
1.
The installation shall be carried out by fully trained, competent and certified tradesmen.
2.
Comply with manufacturer's recommendations at all times unless specifically adjusted by the
Specification.
3.
Any ancillary products or accessories, where not specified, shall be types recommended for the
purpose.
4.
When installing the roofing covering using mechanical fasteners, adhesive or tape, the
recommendations of the manufacturer shall be followed:
5.
Allow solvents to evaporate naturally from the adhesive.
6.
The perimeter of the roofing covering membrane shall be sealed with mechanical fastenings at
all roof edges, changes of plane, curbs and upstands.
7.
Lay out membrane panels in a fashion so that Site and flashing splices are installed to shed
water.
8.
Lay out membrane panels to ensure uniformity of coverage and that all joints are correctly
formed.
Single Ply Membrane

1.
C.
D.
E.
Method of Attachment:
a)
***Fully bonded/ adhered, or:
b)
Mechanically fastened using suitable fasteners and galvanized fastening bars or

washers.***
2.
Do not commence installation until all roof defects have been corrected.
3.
Ensure adequate overlapping, staggering of laps and full bonding to ensure watertightness.
4.
Ensure that membrane is fully dressed into drainage outlets providing a watertight junction.
5.
Ensure that membrane is fully dressed around all penetrations and projections providing a
watertight junction.
6.
Before laying the membrane, ensure that all preliminary work, including formation of upstands,
curbs, box gutters, sumps, grooves, chases, expansion joints and the fixing of anchoring plugs/
strips, flashings, copings, roof outlets, pipe sleeves and ventilators, is complete and satisfactory.
7.
Protect day joints with a lapped and fully bonded strip of felt.
***Plywood Overlay***
1.
Ensure that boards are acceptably level. Remove or fill any excessive irregularities.
2.
Lay sheets parallel to the perimeter edges with cross-joints staggered and a 0.5mm to 1mm
maximum gap between sheets or as recommended by manufacturer's installation instructions.
3.
Fasten with annular ring shanked galvanized, sherardized or stainless steel nails, located and
spaced at intervals as recommended by the waterproofing membrane manufacturer.
4.
Ensure that fastenings are driven well in, with the heads set flush with the surface, not protruding
above the surface.
5.
Lay boards in brick pattern with long edges at 90 to troughs in deck, with 2mm maximum gaps
between boards and with end joints centered over crowns or as recommended by manufacturer's
installation instructions.
6.
Ensure that fastenings do not protrude above surface of board. Fastenings shall be of a type
recommended for the purpose by the fastenings manufacturer.
7.
Fasten mechanically to crowns of metal deck.
Insulation
1.
Lay above/ under the entire membrane, as required.
2.
Accurately cut boards to accommodate abutments and roof configuration.
3.
Provide insulation to curbs and upstands.
4.
Underlay with filter fabric, lapping sheets at a minimum of 300mm or as recommended by

manufacturer's installation instructions.
5.
Lay evenly, with no overlapping at sheet joints.
6.
Sweep and thoroughly clean off all dirt and debris from roof before laying.
7.
The insulation shall be kept dry during its installation.
Vapor Barrier/ Control Layer

1.
Lay sheets with fully bonded side and end laps. Joints in second layer (if any) to be staggered by
half a sheet. Leave adequate free edge for sealing perimeter of insulation.
2.
Fully seal at penetrations using bonding or taping methods recommended by the manufacturer.

29/07/2013
075400 / 6
AECOM Middle East

Membrane Roofing
Avenue - Phase 2
F.
G.
H.
3.
At all edges, abutments, upstands, curbs and other penetrations, dress the vapor control layer up
sufficiently to provide a minimum 25mm seal when overlapped by the roof covering or turn back
a minimum of 150mm over the insulation and seal down.
4.
Dress membrane:
a)
Vapor barrier into gutters as detailed on the Design Drawings to form fully weatherproof
junctions.
b)
Insulation up pipework and other penetrations and provide weather flashings as detailed on
the Design Drawings. Insulation boards shall be loose laid or mechanically bonded (to the
metal deck) in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
c)
Include all associated primers, separating layers, sealing products and methods, protection
layers, capping sheets, surface treatments, reinforcement layers including flashings, angle
fillets, upstands and all fastenings to meet the performance requirements as recommended
by the membrane manufacturer.
5.
Mechanically fasten membrane panels strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations. Ensure that fastener heads are flush to the batten fastenings. Locate and
space batten bars strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
6.
Adhesive fasten membrane panels strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations. Compress the bonded half of the membrane onto the adhesive-coated
substrate. Repeat process to bond the other half of the membrane.
Fastenings/ Adhesives
1.
Apply primers by mopping, brushing or spraying to achieve an even and full cover.
2.
Allow primer to dry thoroughly prior to covering.
3.
Heat and lay roof covering bonding compounds at a temperature sufficient to ensure full bonding
over the whole surface. Do not overheat.
4.
Bond heat sensitive insulation materials with cold bituminous adhesive as recommended by the
manufacturer.
5.
Use mechanical fasteners, adhesive or tape as recommended by the manufacturer. Refer to

Section 050523 Metal Fastenings.
Skirtings/ Upstands
1.
Form all upstands to manufacturer's recommendations.
2.
Return insulation up all upstands as required.
3.
Fasten protection boarding to protect insulation to all upstands. Protection boarding, insulation
and flashings shall be designed and detailed to withstand wind loads/ pressures as specified.
4.
Ensure that the membrane is dressed up (and over) all upstands to form continuous
waterproofing as required.
5.
Submit details of all upstands for acceptance by the Engineer.
Outlets
1.
Allow for connection of roof membrane to roof outlets by hot-air welding, or in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations, and ensure that the system, where applicable, permits the
sealing of the vapor control layer to the outlet body.
2.
Confirm compatibility of the roof membrane with the roof outlet and assume responsibility for the
watertightness of the connection.
I.
Ballast/ Coverings: Ballast shall be spread evenly to a depth of 50mm and sufficient to prevent
floatation of insulation, flush with top of paving slabs if precast.
J.
***Green Roof Landscaping***
3.4
1.
The supporting build-up of drainage layer, filter sheet, substrate and any hard landscaping shall
be completed before installing the plants.
2.
The drainage layer and moisture mat shall be thoroughly soaked prior to planting.
3.
Selected sedum plants shall be planted at a minimum rate of ***25*** plants/ m. There shall be a
minimum of 6 No. varieties planted within each m. The plants shall be pre-watered in their trays
immediately prior to removal and planting.
4.
Fertilise with suitable slow release green roof fertiliser at a rate recommended by the supplier.
5.
Plants shall be gently watered in, and the substrate kept moist for the initial 4 to 6 weeks, to
ensure that the plants establish themselves.
6.
***Sedum plugs shall generally be planted in late September/ early October or late March/ early
April. Sedum plants shall not be planted during the months of June, July and August.***
SITE QUALITY CONTROL

A.
Waterproofing and Watertightness

1.
Test the watertightness of the roof using one or a combination of the following, as appropriate, to
the acceptance of the Engineer:
a)
A proprietary electronic testing system.

29/07/2013
075400 / 7
AECOM Middle East

Membrane Roofing
Avenue - Phase 2
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.5
b)
A ponding test by flooding the entire roof area with water to a minimum depth of 50mm for a
period of 48 hours to check the integrity of the installation.
c)
A simulated rain test.
2.
Details of the system and a proposed method statement shall be submitted for acceptance at
least one month prior to the proposed testing on Site.
3.
Prior to testing, ensure that the work has been completed to a stage where the integrity of the
membrane can be tested, that obvious defects have been made good and that the roof has been
cleared of all materials, debris and dust.
4.
Testing shall be carried out when all work to the roof areas is complete, including that of all
associated and interfacing trades.
Electronic Roof Integrity Test

1.
Testing shall be carried out by an accredited independent testing authority. The results of each
test shall be recorded and issued at the end of each test.
2.
A schedule of the program for roof testing to be carried out shall be submitted, giving forewarning
of when tests are to be carried out.
3.
Testing shall be carried out before insulation (inverted roof types only) and ballast is laid.
4.
If any leaks/ defects are discovered, mark the location on the roof, prepare a report and submit it
together with proposals for remedial measures.
5.
After making good of any defects, retest locally to verify integrity of repair.
6.
On completion certify the waterproof integrity of the roof and carry out a flood test.
Flood Testing
1.
Prior to testing, thoroughly check that all necessary roofing work is complete and obvious defects
have been remedied.
2.
Externally cover and seal all outlets and protect against damage from water pressure with
temporary curbs. Do not use plugs to seal outlets.
3.
Carefully flood to a minimum depth of 50mm, but in no case higher than existing curb levels, and
leave for a period of 48 hours. Regularly inspect for leaks.
4.
On completion of testing, slowly drain roofs ensuring that outlets do not overload or flood.
5.
Where leaks have occurred, submit detailed proposals for remedial measures. After acceptance
and completion of proposed work the flood test is to be reinstated. Only when a flood tested roof
area has shown no leakage for a period of 7 days shall further work on that part of the roof be
permitted.
6.
Any area that cannot be flood tested shall be pressure hose tested.
7.
Invite the Engineer to witness the tests.
Simulated Rain Test

1.
Rain Test: Subject the designated area of roof to a 15-minute rain test using a spray rack
containing sufficient hose nozzles to deliver the acceptable equivalent of 75mm of rain per hour.
2.
Check for leaks using endoscopy or other non-destructive methods, or by opening up the
construction as directed. Perform repairs or replacements as necessary.
3.
Perform additional tests and inspections as directed.
Performance under Testing

1.
There shall be no leakage through the work at any time during the test.
2.
If leaks occur, the water shall be drained completely and the membrane installation repaired and
re-tested. Any part of the work that is adversely affected shall be replaced or repaired.
3.
At completion of the test there shall be no standing water in locations intended to remain dry.
Certify the waterproof integrity of the roof.
4.
All tests are to be witnessed by the Engineer.
CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

A.
Cleaning: Upon completion remove debris, wastes and unused materials from the Site and dispose of
safely. Clean surfaces soiled resulting from installation.
B.
Roof areas shall be left clean with all outlets clear.
C.
All work necessary to provide a weathertight finish shall be satisfactorily completed.
D.
Defects shall be repaired without delay, to minimize damage and nuisance.
E.
A representative of the membrane manufacturer shall inspect the work and notify the Contractor of
any defects. All defects shall be corrected.
3.6
PROTECTION
A.
Temporary Protection
1.
Do not use the roof as a working platform unless fully protected.

29/07/2013
075400 / 8
AECOM Middle East

Membrane Roofing
Avenue - Phase 2
2.
Do not allow petroleum-based solvents or other chemicals harmful to bitumen to come into
contact with the roof surface.
3.
No building materials shall be stored on the roof.
4.
Finished roof areas shall be adequately protected from damage by subsequent building
operations.
5.
Fasten suitable protection boarding to upstands/ curbs. Such protection shall withstand all wind
loadings.
B.
Suspend work in severe or continuously wet weather unless an effective temporary roof is provided
over the working areas.
C.
If unavoidable wetting of the construction does occur, take prompt action to minimise and make good
any damage.
D.
Protect the work during subsequent construction operations from deterioration or damage until
Taking-Over.
3.7
MAINTENANCE
A.
***Green Roof Maintenance During Establishment***

1.
Allow for post-installation maintenance for a period of 2 years to the full establishment of a
flourishing green roof.
2.
The post-installation maintenance shall consist of a minimum of 2 visits per year by the
appropriate labour force, which shall be dictated by the roof area. No irrigation shall be required
once the plant layer is established:
a)
At the end of Autumn, strim the roof surface to remove all dead vegetation, rake off debris
and cart away.
b)
****In early Spring:

1.
Inspect substrate surface and vegetation barriers and remove all unwanted grasses,
weeds and saplings.
2.
Any bare areas of substrate shall be re-seeded and lightly raked over, or re-planted.
3.
Ensure that perimeters and roof outlets are free from weeds and other blockages.
4.
Periodically, as required, fertilise with a suitable slow release green roof fertiliser at a
rate recommended by the supplier.***
End of Section

29/07/2013
075400 / 9
AECOM Middle East

Membrane Roofing
Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 079200 JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1
1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
PRODUCT SELECTION
MATERIALS

29/07/2013
2
2
2
4
079200
AECOM Middle East

Joint Sealants
Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 079200 JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2
1.
2.
3.

1.
Silicone joint sealants.
2.
Urethane joint sealants.
3.
Polysulfide joint sealants.
4.
Latex joint sealants.
5.
Solvent-release-curing joint sealants.
6.
Preformed joint sealants.
7.
Acoustical joint sealants.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for
installation of units required for this Project.
B.
C.
Mock-ups
1.
D.
As indicated in other relevant work sections.
Prototypes
1.
As indicated in other relevant work sections.
E.
Quality Benchmark Installation: First completed full height structural bay of each type of system in
location to be agreed with and to the acceptance of the Engineer.
F.

1.
2.
Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint sealant manufacturers, for
testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.
a)
Use either ASTM C1087 or the manufacturer's standard test method to determine whether
priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum
adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates.
b)
Submit not fewer than ***8*** pieces of each kind of material, including joint substrates,
shims, joint sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.
c)
Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the work.
d)
For materials failing tests, obtain joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions for
corrective measures including use of specially formulated primers.
e)
Testing shall not be required if joint sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data that
are based on previous testing, not older than 24 months, of sealant products for adhesion
to, and compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted.
Preconstruction Site-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, Site test their adhesion to
Project joint substrates as follows:
a)
Locate test joints where indicated on the Project or, if not indicated, as directed by the
Engineer.
b)
Conduct Site tests for each application indicated below:

1.
Each kind of sealant and joint substrate indicated.
c)
Notify the Engineer 7 days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be erected.
d)
Arrange for tests to take place with joint sealant manufacturer's technical representative
present.
1.

29/07/2013
Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint
Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM
C1521.
079200 / 1
AECOM Middle East

Joint Sealants
Avenue - Phase 2
a)
For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately;
extend cut along 1 side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure
for opposite side.
e)
Report whether sealant failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data
on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail
adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained.
f)
Evaluation of Preconstruction Site-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing

adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with
requirements, shall be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to
joint substrates during testing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION
A.
2.2
Source of Supply: Use the same type of product for each item of work and obtain from a single
manufacturer with at least 10 years' experience of producing similar products. Products visible in the
finished work shall be produced from a single production run to ensure uniformity.
A.
General
1.
General: Comply with the performance requirements specified in Division 01 General

Requirements.
2.
Sealed joints shall withstand exposure to environmental conditions to which they will be
subjected whilst accommodating anticipated joint movement.
a)
2.3
Temperature Change (Range): -5C to 60C.
3.
Compatibility: Sealants, joint fillers, backer rods and primers in contact with one another shall be
compatible and not cause staining of joint surfaces.
4.
Adhesion: Sealants and joint fillers shall firmly bond to the joint surfaces and resist anticipated
imposed loads and joint movements without displacement. Elastometric sealants shall attain a
minimum 66.8N peel strength in tension.
5.
Durability and Appearance: Sealants and joint fillers to be serviceable and maintain their
performance for the duration of their service life without the following failures or defects.
a)
Adhesive or cohesive failure.
b)
Spalling of joint edges.
c)
Slumping or folding of surface.
d)
Extrusion beyond surfaces adjacent to joint.
e)
Inclusions.
f)
Crazing of surface greater than 0.1mm in depth.
g)
Staining of adjacent surfaces.
h)
Blistering of the surface.
i)
Puncture of surface.
j)
Chalking or color change.
k)
Change in 'Shore A' durometer hardness of more than 15% of 7-day value.
l)
Displacement.
m)
Chemical attack.
MATERIALS
A.
General
1.
Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by joint sealant manufacturer, based on testing and Site experience.
2.
Low Emitting Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing
system shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of
Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various
Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers".
3.
Liquid Applied Joint Sealants: In accordance with ASTM C920 and other requirements indicated
for each liquid applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C920
classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.
a)
Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that will
be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing
according to ASTM C1247. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless
otherwise indicated.

29/07/2013
079200 / 2
AECOM Middle East

Joint Sealants
Avenue - Phase 2
B.
4.
Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be non-staining to porous

substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C1248 and have
not stained porous joint substrates indicated for the Project.
5.
Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in
repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.
6.
Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by the Engineer from manufacturer's full range
and indicated within the applicable Work Sections.
Silicone Joint Sealants in accordance with the following:

1.
Single-Component, Non-sag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade
NS, Class 100/ 50, for Use NT.
2.
NS, Class 50, for Use NT.
3.
4.
Single-Component, Non-sag, Acid-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade
5.
Single-Component, Non-sag, Traffic-Grade, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C920,

Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/ 50, for Use T.
6.
Single-Component, Pourable, Traffic-Grade, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C920,

Type S, Grade P, Class 100/ 50, for Use T.
7.
Multicomponent, Non-sag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type M, Grade
8.
Multicomponent, Pourable, Traffic-Grade, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C920,

Type M, Grade P, Class 100/ 50, for Use T.
9.
Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Non-sag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM

C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.
10. Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Acid-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S,
Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.
C.
Urethane Joint Sealants in accordance with the following:

1.
Single-Component, Non-sag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class
100/ 50, for Use NT.
2.
Single-Component, Non-sag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50,
for Use NT.
3.
Single-Component, Non-sag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25,
for Use NT.
4.
Single-Component, Non-sag, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade
NS, Class 25, for Use T.
5.
Single-Component, Pourable, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S,

Grade P, Class 25, for Use T.
6.
Multicomponent, Non-sag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 50,
for Use NT.
7.
Multicomponent, Non-sag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25,
for Use NT.
8.
Multicomponent, Non-sag, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type M, Grade
9.
Multicomponent, Non-sag, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type M, Grade
10. Immersible, Single-Component, Non-sag, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C920,
Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Uses T and I.
11. Immersible, Single-Component, Pourable, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C920,
Type S, Grade P, Class 25, for Uses T and I.
12. Immersible Multicomponent, Non-sag, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type
M, Grade NS, Class 25, for Uses T and I.
13. Immersible Multicomponent, Pourable, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type
M, Grade P, Class 25, for Use T and I.
D.
Polysulfide Joint Sealants in accordance with the following:

1.
Single-Component, Non-sag, Polysulfide Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class
25, for Use NT.
2.
Multicomponent, Non-sag, Polysulfide Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25,
for Use NT.
3.
Multicomponent, Non-sag, Traffic-Grade, Polysulfide Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type M, Grade

29/07/2013
079200 / 3
AECOM Middle East

Joint Sealants
Avenue - Phase 2
E.
4.
Multicomponent, Pourable, Traffic-Grade, Polysulfide Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type M, Grade
P, Class 25, for Use T.
5.
Immersible, Multicomponent Non-sag, Traffic-Grade, Polysulfide Joint Sealant: ASTM C920,

Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use T and Use I.
Latex Joint Sealants in accordance with the following:

1.
F.
G.
H.
1.
Acrylic-Based Joint Sealant: ASTM C1311.
2.
Butyl-Rubber-Based Joint Sealant: ASTM C1311.
Preformed Joint Sealants

1.
Preformed Silicone Joint Sealants: Manufacturer's standard sealant consisting of precured

low-modulus silicone extrusion, in sizes to fit joint widths indicated, combined with a
neutral-curing silicone sealant for bonding extrusions to substrates.
2.
Preformed Foam Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard preformed, precompressed, open-cell

foam sealant manufactured from urethane foam with minimum density of 160kg/ m and
impregnated with a nondrying, water-repellent agent. Factory produce in precompressed sizes in
roll or stick form to fit joint widths indicated; coated on one side with a pressure-sensitive
adhesive and covered with protective wrapping.
Acoustical Joint Sealants

1.
I.
J.
2.4
Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C834, Type OP, Grade NF.
Solvent-Release-Curing Joint Sealants in accordance with the following:
Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard non-sag, paintable, non-staining latex sealant
in accordance with ASTM C834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission
through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing
representative assemblies according to ASTM E90.
Joint Sealant Backing

1.
General: Provide sealant backings of material that are non-staining; are compatible with joint
substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers and are approved for applications indicated
by sealant manufacturer based on Site experience and laboratory testing.
2.
Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C1330, provide Type C (closed-cell material with a surface
skin), Type O (open-cell material), Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin) or any of the
preceding types, as approved in writing by joint sealant manufacturer for joint application
indicated within the applicable Work Sections and of size and density to control sealant depth
and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.
3.
Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by the sealant
manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint
surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
1.
Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate
tests and Site tests.
2.
Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants

and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or
harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote
optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
3.
Masking Tape: Non-staining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints.

A.
Structural Silicone Testing and Maintenance.

1.
2.
General:
a)
Comply with the requirements of the Specification with respect to the testing of the structural
silicone application.
b)
Provide the Engineer with documentary evidence that the selection of sealant takes into
account any relevant recommendations by the sealant manufacturer as to the use of the
sealant.
Submit to the Engineer adhesion test data of production samples as tested in accordance with
ASTM C794. These shall establish adhesion performance over the temperatures specified in the
Specification.
a)
Where the structural silicone bonds glass to the cladding framework, the weakest element in
the line of stress shall have a minimum strength of 600kPa or 6 times the design strength,
whichever is the greater, in accordance with ETAG 01/ 015 or ETAG 002 documents which
set out the requirements for use of structural silicone. This criterion shall be proven with a
statistical confidence of 99%. For each combination of substrate and design conditions,
provide a report from the sealant manufacturer for the tests performed in the following
manner:

29/07/2013
079200 / 4
AECOM Middle East

Joint Sealants
Avenue - Phase 2
1.
Assemble and fully cure under production conditions (not laboratory conditions) a
minimum of 12 No. samples. Each sample shall be a minimum of 150mm long. The
sample shall be made of actual substrate material, including but not limited to, glass
with actual coating (low E and/ or fritting) and aluminum sections with finishes. The
joint geometry shall be as accepted by the Engineer.
2.
Double-sided tape or other spacer material shall be installed such that it does not add
to the silicone joint strength.
3.
Weather seals shall not be installed on the samples.
4.
After full cure the samples shall be totally immersed in tap water at room temperature
for 7 days.
5.
Samples shall be tested in a tensometer 25 hours after removal from the water
immersion tank.
6.
Each sample shall be subjected to a tensile load test. The crosshead speed shall be
50mm/ min. Continue testing until failure occurs or until 830kPa or 6 times the design
load, whichever is the greater, is applied to the samples. Report the maximum stress
and mode of failure including percentage area of cohesive failure and any area of voids
in the sealant for each sample. Adhesive failure area or void cross section area parallel
to the substrate face greater than 20% is unacceptable.
7.
A statistical analysis of results shall indicate a design stress of not less than 600kPa or
6 times the design stress of the sealant, whichever is the greater, with a confidence of
99% over the temperature range as described in the Specification.
8.
If the sample set does not meet the requirements of the above criteria, the design of
the failed element shall be revised and subjected to a re-test. This procedure shall
continue until the above requirements have been met.
9.
Prepare a report of the above testing. No fabrication shall commence until the results
have been accepted by the Engineer.
10. Retain all test results with regard to the structural silicone glazing for a minimum period
of 15 years from project completion. These shall be made available to the Engineer on
request.
B.
Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency.

1.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM

C1021 to conduct the testing indicated.
2.
Test according to SWRI's Sealant Validation Program for compliance with requirements specified
by reference to ASTM C920 for adhesion and cohesion under cyclic movement,
adhesion-in-peel, and indentation hardness.
End of Section

29/07/2013
079200 / 5
AECOM Middle East

Joint Sealants
Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 081110 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1
1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
PRODUCT SELECTION
DESIGN CRITERIA
MATERIALS

29/07/2013
1
2
3
4
081110
AECOM Middle East

Metal Doors And Frames
Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 081110 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2

1.
2.
3.

1.
Interior metal steel doors and frames.
2.
Exterior metal steel doors and frames.
3.
Metal bi-fold panel doors.
Design Drawings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.
A Specialist with successful experience in performing similar work, and is certified to a quality
system acceptable to the Engineer. Use applicators licensed by the product manufacturer for
chemically treated material.
2.
B.
Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency accredited as an acoustical

laboratory according to the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program of NIST.
C.
Mock-ups: Provide mock-ups for each type, of size required to demonstrate all materials selected and
D.

1.
Provide certification to demonstrate that doors and frames have been previously tested to meet
the requirements of the Specification.
2.
Test certificates shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities regarding the performance
and service life requirements of the doors and frames.
3.
If test certificates are not made available, include for the testing of the door assemblies and/ or
doorsets.
4.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency, for each type of hollow metal door and frame assembly.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION
A.
Metal Doors General: Provide doors not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth
surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings.
C.
Type DRS-201 Metal Door

1.
Interior hollow metal steel door with hollow metal steel frame.
2.
Door Material: Metal sheet.
3.
Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane,

polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core, based on performance
requirements and to the acceptance of the Engineer.
a)
Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise ratings.
4.
Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Manufacturer's standard.
5.
Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 1.0mm thick, end closures or channels of
same material as face sheets.
6.
Face sheets fabricated from galvanized cold-rolled steel sheet. Thickness 1.2mm.
7.
Door Finish: Manufacturer's standard primer, with manufacturer's standard factory-applied paint
finish. Refer to Section 050513 Shop Applied Coatings for Metal.
a)
8.
Door Finish Color and Gloss: To be confirmed be the Engineer.
Door Thickness: To be confirmed by the Engineer.

29/07/2013
081110 / 1
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
9.
Door Frame: Hollow metal.

a)
Width: Refer to the Design Drawings.
b)
Sheet Thickness: 1.5mm.
c)
Finish: Manufacturer's standard primer.

1.
d)
e)
Color and Gloss: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
Jamb Anchors:
1.
Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not
less than 1.0mm thick with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 50mm wide by
250mm long; or wire anchors not less than 4.5mm thick.
2.
Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than
1.0mm thick.
3.
Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors.
4.
Post-installed Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 9.5mm

diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to
wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.
Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, as follows:

1.
For Hollow Metal Frames: Not less than 1.0mm thick.
2.
Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with 2 No. holes to receive fasteners.
3.
Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips,

allowing not less than 50mm height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish
floor surface.
10. Hollow Metal Door and Frame Accessories:
D.
2.2
a)
Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical
anchors.
b)
Ceiling Struts: Minimum 6.4mm thick by 25.4mm wide steel.
c)
Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.4mm thick.
Type DRS-202 Stainless Steel Doors

1.
Description: Stainless steel doors as indicated on the Design Drawings.
2.
3.
Material: Stainless steel grade 316L

a)
Facing Sheet Thickness: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
b)
4.
Core: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
5.
Door Thickness:
6.
Frame: Stainless steel grade 316L.
DESIGN CRITERIA
A.
B.
Source Limitations
1.
Obtain metal steel work from a single source from a single manufacturer.
2.
Alternatively, the frames may be manufactured by a source recommended in writing by the door
leaf manufacturer.
3.
Obtain sliding metal fire doors from single source from single manufacturer.
4.
Obtain sound-control door assemblies, including doors, frames, sound-control seals, hinges
(when integral for sound control), thresholds, and other items essential for sound control, from
single source from single manufacturer.
Door hardware shall be as in the Door Hardware Schedule and Section 087100 Door Hardware of the
Specification. The doorset manufacturer shall ensure that the door hardware does not negate the
certification of the work.
1.
Refer to the MEP Specification requirements with regard to door operations, security and
additional devices.
2.
All doorsets shall be checked at all levels with regard to security and the relevant security
symbols.
C.
The Contractor, in liaison with the manufacturer, shall ensure that the work as specified incorporates
all necessary seals, sealants, fasteners, accessories and ancillary items are supplied as required in
accordance with and to achieve the requirements of the Specification.
D.
Unless stated otherwise all door assemblies referred to herein shall be doorsets (as defined herein) in
which door hardware apertures, seals, slots and vision panels are factory formed prior to prefinishing.
E.
Unless stated otherwise, all door assemblies shall be factory prefinished.

29/07/2013
081110 / 2
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
F.
The Specification shall be read in conjunction with the Door Schedule, the Design Drawings and
Acoustic Report to convey the following, specific information.
1.
Configuration, including but not limited to:

a)
Single leaf.
b)
Double leaf (equal pair).
c)
Leaf and half (unequal pair).
d)
Single swing.
e)
Double swing.
f)
Door reference.
g)
Dimensions.
h)
Fire performance rating.
i)
Acoustic performance rating (where a value is known).
j)
Facing type, general.
k)
Vision panels.
G.
Performance, as indicated on the associated Door Schedule, of the doorset/ assembly type shall vary
dependent on location. The Contractor shall use the applicable manufacturer's details of the required
visual range to achieve the stated performance.
H.
UL labels shall be permanently fastened on each door and frame which is within the size limitations
established by NFPA and UL for labeling.
I.
Ensure that all doorsets are clearly marked on the hinge edge, with their door number and
performance, enabling them to be reconciled with their intended location.
J.
Sound Rating: Provide sound-control door assemblies identical to those of assemblies tested as
sound-retardant units by an acoustical testing agency.
2.3
A.
Strength of Doors and Frames

1.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Ensure that the work, including door hardware, meets, unless otherwise stated, the 'heavy duty'
category as defined within ANSI/ SDI A250.8.
Metal Steel Finishes

1.
Shop Primer Finish: In accordance with ANSI/ SDI A250.10 for acceptance criteria.
2.
Factory-Applied Paint Finish: In accordance with ANSI/ SDI A250.3 for performance and
acceptance criteria.
Standard Metal Doors

1.
Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: Where indicated, provide doors fabricated with

thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than ***[....]*** when tested according to ASTM
C1363.
2.
Provide louvers for interior doors, where indicated, that comply with Steel Door Institute (SDI)
111C.
Hygrothermal Performance
1.
All materials, core materials, edgings, facing materials and adhesives and associated work shall
be selected to satisfy the design life requirements for the environmental conditions as specified in
Division 01 General Requirements.
2.
All adhesives, fastenings and associated elements of the work shall have moisture resistant
properties to match core materials.
Acoustics
1.
Refer to the Acoustic Report and the Door Schedule for specific acoustic values.
2.
STC Rating shall be provided as indicated and as determined by ASTM E413 when tested in an
operable condition according to ASTM E90.
3.
Sound-rated doors shall be provided with frames as specified. The frames shall be sealed into
the partition opening, such that there is no noise leakage around the frame.
4.
Acoustic seals to suit acoustic ratings as scheduled shall be included.
5.
Sound-rated doors shall be supplied complete with perimeter (including threshold) seals and
door hardware to ensure that the seals operate effectively. No light shall be visible on either side
of the doorset when viewed in darkness with a light source on the other side.
6.
Open keyholes and other openings shall not occur in sound-rated doorsets.
7.
Doors shall close quietly without 'slamming noise'.
Fire-Rated Door Assemblies

1.
Provide assemblies in accordance with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing
agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to
NFPA 252 and UL 10C.

29/07/2013
081110 / 3
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
2.
Temperature-Rise Limit: Where indicated, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted
temperature end point of not more than 250C above ambient after 30 minutes of standard
fire-test exposure.
3.
Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light (Sidelight) Frame Assemblies: Assemblies in accordance with NFPA

80 that are listed and labeled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257
or UL 9. Label each individual glazed lite.
4.
Smoke-Control Door Assemblies: In accordance with NFPA 105 or UL 1784.
5.
Electrical Components, Devices and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
G.
Disabled Requirements: Opening Pressures: Ensure that the maximum opening pressures required to
open fire-rated or non-fire-rated doors on disabled access routes are in accordance with the
requirements of the IBC.
H.
Durability: The work shall remain free of damage, permanent distortion impairing function or
unacceptable changes in appearance as follows.
1.
Damage arising from forces applied under normal conditions of use (repetitive stresses) and
anticipated abuse, including:
a)
Breakage of components and assemblies.
b)
Loss of rigidity or loosening up of joints.
c)
Cracking or splitting of wood and veneer.
d)
Indentation.
e)
Improper functioning of hardware resulting in impaired door operation.
2.
Distortion arising from moisture changes, temperature changes and applied forces including
cupping, bowing or twisting which prevents the ability of the door in accordance with the fire,
smoke and sound requirements.
3.
Appearance changes arising from damage, distortion or shrinkage including opening of joints,
excessive surface indentations, color changes or yellowing of coatings.
I.
J.
Hardware: Provide hardware in accordance with Section 087100 Door Hardware.
2.4
MATERIALS
A.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: In accordance with ASTM A1008/ A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B;
suitable for exposed applications.
B.
Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: In accordance with ASTM A1011/ A1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B;
free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
C.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: In accordance with ASTM A653/ A653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type
B; with minimum ZF120 zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating designation.
D.
Door and Frame Stops and Moldings
E.
1.
Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.8mm thick, fabricated from same material as door
face sheet in which they are installed.
2.
Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 16mm high
3.
Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.8mm thick, fabricated from same material as
frames in which they are installed.
4.
Terminated Stops: Where indicated on interior door frames, terminate stops 152mm above finish
floor with a ***45/ 90*** angle cut, and close open end of stop with steel sheet closure. Cover
opening in extension of frame with welded steel filler plate, with welds ground smooth and flush
with frame.
Frame Anchors: In accordance with ASTM A879/ A879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 12G coating
designation; mill phosphatized.
1.
For anchors built into exterior walls, provide either steel sheet in accordance with ASTM A1008/
A1008M or ASTM A1011/ A1011M, or after fabrication, hot-dip galvanized units according to
ASTM A153/ A153M, Class B.
F.
Inserts, Bolts and Fasteners: For items to be built into exterior walls, provide hot-dip galvanized units
according to ASTM A153/ A153M.
G.
Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated,
fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow
metal frames of type indicated. The Contractor shall confirm with the Structural Engineer, these type
of fasteners are permitted for Project implementation.
H.
Mineral Fiber Insulation: In accordance with ASTM C665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing);
consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 96 to 192kg/ m density; with maximum
flame-spread and smoke-development indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E136 for
combustion characteristics.

29/07/2013
081110 / 4
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
I.
For Grouted Frames: Provide grout in accordance with ASTM C476, with a slump of not more than
102mm as measured according to ASTM C143/ C143M. Provide corrosion-resistant coating, for
fire-rated frames verify with manufacturer coating does not diminish intended fire rating.
1.
Corrosion-Resistant Coating: Provide cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 0.4mm dry
film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type non-corrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur
components, and other deleterious impurities.
J.
Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088000 Glazing. As required by sound-control door
assembly manufacturer in accordance with sound-control requirements.
K.
Paint: Provide as indicated in the Finish Schedule and the Design Drawings. For factory-finished
items, refer to Section 050513 Shop Applied Coatings for Metal. For Site-applied finish coat color
selection, refer to Section 099100 Painting.
End of Section

29/07/2013
081110 / 5
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 081416 WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1
1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
PRODUCT SELECTION
DESIGN CRITERIA
MATERIALS
FABRICATION
FABRICATION TOLERANCES
FINISHING

29/07/2013
1
2
3
4
5
8
8
9
081416
AECOM Middle East

Wood Doors
Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 081416 WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.
2.
3.
4.

1.
D.
1.2
Wood doors.
Design Drawings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors and associated wood paneling from single manufacturer.
B.
Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with Wood and Door Manufacturers
Association (WDMA) I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors."
C.
Contractor's Qualifications: A Specialist with successful experience in performing similar work, and is
certified to a quality system acceptable to the Engineer. Use applicators licensed by the product
manufacturer for chemically treated material.
D.
Mock-ups: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
E.
Prototypes
1.
F.
Door type as indicated by the Engineer, including interface with surrounding walling including all
specified seals and associated features and ironmongery.

1.
An area determined by the Engineer of each element of the work fully installed, completed and to
the acceptance of the Engineer.
G.
Provide independently certified evidence that all specified variants of components comply with
specified performance requirements.
H.

1.
Provide certification to demonstrate that doors have been previously tested to meet the
2.
and service life requirements of the wood doors.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION
A.
General: Provide applicable hardware products as installation templates for use to enable shop/
factory machining and fitting, such as but not limited to lock cases, strikes, hinges and closers, to the
door and frame manufacturers for all door types and frames.
B.
Type DRS-101 Carved Wood Doors
C.
1.
Description: Carved solid wood door as indicated on the Design Drawings.
2.
3.
Wood Species: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
4.
Thickness: Refer to Design Drawings.
5.
Type DRS-102 Stile and Rail Wood Doors

1.
Description: Stile and Rail wood door as indicated on the Design Drawings.
2.
3.
4.

29/07/2013
081416 / 1
AECOM Middle East

Wood Doors
Avenue - Phase 2
5.
D.
E.
Type DRS-103 Bifolding Wood Doors

1.
Description: Bifolding wood door as indicated on the Design Drawings.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Wood Door Frames

1.
General: Provide wood door frames in profiles and widths indicated, refer to the Door Schedule
and the Design Drawings.
2.
Interior Wood Frames and Jambs:

a)
Transparent Finish.
b)
Grade: Premium.
c)
Wood Species and Cut: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
d)
e)
Factory Transparent Finish:

1.
Finish: WDMA TR-4 conversion varnish or TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane.
2.
Staining: As selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer's full range.
3.
Effect: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
4.
Sheen: Satin/ Semi-gloss.
f)
For frames or jambs wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue
for width.
g)
Fire-Rated Type: Products fabricated from fire-retardant particleboard or fire-retardant

medium-density fiberboard with veneered, exposed surfaces and rated and labeled by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings
indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.
1.
3.
4.
Interior Wood Frames and Jambs:

a)
Opaque Finish.
b)
Grade: Premium.
c)
Finish: To be confirmed by the Engineer. Refer to Section 099100 Painting.

a)
F.
Factory Opaque Finish:

1.
Finish: WDMA OP-4 conversion varnish or OP-6 catalyzed polyurethane.
2.
Color: As selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer's full range.
3.
Sheen: Satin/ Semi-gloss/ Gloss.
Vision Panels
1.
Vision Panels: Refer to the Design Drawings and Door Schedule for dimensions/ locations.
2.
Wood Beads for Vision Panel Openings in Wood Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard wood
beads as follows unless otherwise indicated.
3.
2.2
Fire Rating: To match adjacent wall.
a)
Wood Species: Same species as door faces.
b)
Profile: Manufacturer's standard shape.
c)
At wood core doors with fire-protection ratings, provide wood beads and metal glazing clips
approved for such use.
Wood-Veneered Beads for Vision Panel Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard
wood-veneered noncombustible beads matching veneer species of door faces and approved for
use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated. Include concealed metal glazing clips where
required for opening size and fire-protection rating indicated.
DESIGN CRITERIA
A.
All door leaves and door frames shall be by the same manufacturer. Alternatively, the frames may be
manufactured by a source recommended in writing by the door leaf manufacturer.
B.
All doorsets shall be pre-hung and to be certified to achieve the performance criteria.
C.
Door hardware shall be as the Door Hardware Schedule and Section 087100 Door Hardware of the
Specification. The doorset manufacturer shall ensure that the door hardware does not negate the
certification of the work.
1.
Refer to the MEP Specification with regard to door operations, security and additional devices.

29/07/2013
081416 / 2
AECOM Middle East

Wood Doors
Avenue - Phase 2
D.
All doorsets shall be checked at all levels with regard to security and the relevant security symbols.
E.
The Contractor, in liaison with the manufacturer, shall ensure that the work as specified incorporates
all necessary seals, sealants, fastenings, accessories and ancillary items are supplied as required in
F.
Provide vision panels where indicated on the Door Schedule and the Design Drawings.
G.
Unless stated otherwise all door systems referred to herein shall be doorsets (as defined herein) in
H.
Unless stated otherwise, all door systems shall be factory prefinished.
I.
The Specification shall be read in conjunction with the Door Schedule, Design Drawings and Acoustic
Report to convey the following, specific information.
1.
Configuration, including, but not limited to:

a)
Single leaf.
b)
c)
Leaf and half (unequal pair).
d)
Single swing.
e)
Double swing.
f)
Door reference.
g)
Dimensions.
h)
i)
j)
k)
Vision panels.
J.
Performance, as indicated on the associated Door Schedule, of the doorset/ assembly type shall vary
dependent on location. The Contractor shall use the applicable manufacturer's details of the required
visual range to achieve the stated performance.
K.
UL labels shall be permanently fastened on each door and frame which is within the size limitations
established by NFPA and UL for labeling.
L.
2.3
A.
Strength of Doors and Frames

1.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Ensure that the work, including door hardware, meets, unless otherwise stated, the 'heavy duty'
category as defined within Window & Door Manufacturers Association Standard WDMA IS-1A,
'Architectural Wood Flush Doors'.
Door Facing Performance

1.
Hardboard Faces: In accordance with American Hardboard Association AHA A135.4, Class 1
(tempered) or Class 2 (standard).
2.
MDF Faces: In accordance with ANSI A208.2, Grade 150 or 160.
1.
All materials, core materials, lippings, facing materials and adhesives and associated work shall
be selected to satisfy the design life requirements for the environmental conditions as specified in
Division 01 General Requirements.
2.
All adhesives, fastenings and associated elements of the work shall have moisture resistant
Acoustics
1.
Refer to the Acoustic Report and the Door Schedule for specific acoustic values.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Doors shall close quietly without 'slamming noise'.
Fire-Rated Wood Doors

1.
Provide doors in accordance with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing
agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure in accordance
with NFPA 252 and UL 10C.

29/07/2013
081416 / 3
AECOM Middle East

Wood Doors
Avenue - Phase 2
F.
G.
2.4
Ensure doors and frames are fabricated in accordance with NFPA 80.
b)
Ensure fire seals and all associated materials are installed in accordance with NFPA 80.
2.
Fire-Rated door assemblies shall achieve the fire rating indicated within the Door Schedule read
in conjunction with ***Fire Strategy Report***.
3.
Ensure door assembly installation is in accordance with Dubai Civil Defence requirements.
4.
Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide
certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with standard construction
requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size.
5.
Temperature-Rise Limit: Where indicated, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted
temperature end point of not more than 250C above ambient after 30 minutes of standard
fire-test exposure.
6.
7.
Provide all cavity barriers as required.
8.
9.
Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke- and draft-control assemblies are
required, provide assemblies that meet requirements when tested according to UL 1784 and
installed in compliance with NFPA 105. Provide certification illustrating such compliance.
Accessibility Requirements: For wood door assemblies in an accessible route, comply with ICC/ ANSI
A117.1 and Dubai Civil Defence requirements.
1.
Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and
that operate with a force of not more than 22.2N.
2.
Comply with the following maximum opening force requirements:

a)
Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 22.2N applied perpendicular to door.
b)
Sliding or Folding Doors: 22.2N applied parallel to door at latch.
c)
Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction.
Durability: The work shall remain free of damage, permanent distortion impairing function or
unacceptable changes in appearance as follows
1.
H.
a)
Damage arising from forces applied under normal conditions of use (repetitive stresses) and
a)
b)
c)
d)
Indentation.
e)
2.
Distortion arising from moisture changes, temperature changes and applied forces including
cupping, bowing or twisting which prevents the ability of the door to comply with the fire, smoke
and sound requirements.
3.
Appearance changes arising from damage, distortion or shrinkage including opening of joints,
excessive surface indentations, color changes or yellowing of coatings.
Sealants: Refer to Section 079200 Sealants.

MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of Architectural Woodwork Institute's (AWI)
and Woodwork Institute's (WI) quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified,
B.
Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
C.
Wood Species for Opaque Finish: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
D.
Wood Products: In accordance with the following.

1.
Hardboard: AHA A135.4.
2.
Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder containing no urea
formaldehyde.
3.
Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.
4.
Particleboard: Straw-based particleboard complying with requirements in ANSI A208.1, Grade

M-2, except for density.
5.
Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay.
6.
Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive
containing no urea formaldehyde.

29/07/2013
081416 / 4
AECOM Middle East

Wood Doors
Avenue - Phase 2
E.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required
by woodwork quality standard.
F.
Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials
1.
2.
G.
2.5
General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with
requirements in this Article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with
fire-test-response characteristics specified.
a)
Do not use treated materials that do not comply with requirements of referenced
woodworking standard or that are warped, discolored or otherwise defective.
b)
Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely

affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from untreated
materials.
c)
Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S.

Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Comply with performance

requirements of AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Use the following treatment
type:
a)
Exterior Type, suitable for both exterior and interior applications: Organic-resin-based
formulation thermally set in wood by kiln drying.
b)
Interior Type A, suitable for only for interior applications: Low-hygroscopic formulation.
c)
Mill lumber before treatment and implement special procedures during treatment and drying
processes that prevent lumber from warping and developing discolorations from drying
sticks or other causes, marring and other defects affecting appearance of treated
woodwork.
d)
Upon acceptance from the Engineer, mill lumber after treatment within limits set for wood
removal that do not affect listed fire-test-response characteristics, using a woodworking
plant certified by testing and inspecting agency.
e)
Kiln-dry materials before and after treatment to levels required for untreated materials.
3.
Fire-Retardant Particleboard: Panels complying with the following requirements, made from
softwood particles and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to
achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 25 or less in accordance
with ASTM E84.
4.
Fire-Retardant Fiberboard: Medium density fiberboard panels in accordance with ANSI A208.2,
made from softwood fibers, synthetic resins, and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time
of panel manufacture to achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of
200 or less in accordance with ASTM E84.
1.
Furring, Blocking, Shims and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less
than 15% moisture content.
2.
Furring, Blocking, Shims and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln dried to
less than 15% moisture content.
3.
Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage.
Provide nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior
walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead
expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.
4.
Adhesives, General: Adhesives shall not contain urea formaldehyde.
FABRICATION
A.
Carry out all work and use all materials in accordance with the manufacturer's printed
recommendations.
B.
Accurately cut and form materials to the required shape and with all exposed surfaces and edges true
and free from irregularities and defects, using techniques that will not impair the strength of materials
used.
C.
The work elements shall be square, regular to level and plane with all junctions fitting to the stated
tolerances.
D.
Door Construction, General

1.
Window and Door Manufacturers Association WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade:

a)
2.
3.
Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated.
Particleboard-Core Doors:
a)
Particleboard: In accordance with ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2.
b)
Provide doors with either glued wood stave or structural composite lumber cores instead of
particleboard cores for doors indicated to receive exit devices.
Structural Composite Lumber Core Doors:

29/07/2013
081416 / 5
AECOM Middle East

Wood Doors
Avenue - Phase 2
a)
4.
5.
6.
E.
G.
Screw Withdrawal, Face: 3100 N.
2.
Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 1780 N.
Fire-Protection-Rated Doors: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide

fire-protection rating indicated.
a)
Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer
stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.
b)
Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated
without formed steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals.
Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.
c)
Pairs: Provide formed steel edges and astragals with intumescent seals.
1.
Finish steel edges and astragals with baked enamel same color as doors.
2.
Finish steel edges and astragals to match door hardware (locksets or exit devices).
Mineral-Core Doors:
a)
Core: Noncombustible mineral product In accordance with requirements of referenced

quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection rating indicated.
b)
Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved for
use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated as needed to eliminate through-bolting
hardware.
c)
Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated edge construction with improved
screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for
exposed edges.
Hollow-Core Doors:
a)
Construction: Standard hollow core.
b)
Blocking: Provide wood blocking with minimum dimensions as follows:

1.
125mm x 460mm lock blocks at both stiles.
2.
125mm top rail blocking.
3.
250mm bottom rail blocking.
4.
64mm midrail blocking.
In accordance with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware in accordance with
Door Hardware Institute (DHI)-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop
Drawings, DHI A115-W series standards and hardware templates.
1.
Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before
factory machining.
2.
Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed steel edges for hardware for pairs of
fire-rated doors.
Wood Transom and Wood Side Panels: Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposed
surfaces and finish as specified for associated doors. Finish bottom edges of transoms and top edges
of rabbeted doors same as door stiles.
1.
H.
1.
Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of
referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.
1.
F.
Structural Composite Lumber: In accordance with WDMA I.S.10.
Fabricate door and transom panels with full width, solid lumber, rabbeted, meeting rails. Provide
factory-installed spring bolts for concealed attachment into jambs of metal door frames.
Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory.

1.
2.
Vision Panel Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.
a)
Vision panels are applicable to doors as indicated on the Door and Door Hardware
Schedule and are generally as follows:
b)
Dimensions as indicated on the Design Drawings.
c)
Factory formed.
d)
Flush beading in hardwood to match the face wood finish.
e)
Bedding: Acoustic glazing compound or proprietary glazing channel dependent upon the
method on which the manufacturer's performance certification is based.
Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with applicable
requirements in Section 088000 Glazing.
a)
Select all glazing materials and systems to comply with the performance requirements.
b)
The final glass thickness, type and make-up in the various locations shall be determined,
paying full attention to the safety requirements. Final selection of glass thickness, together
with type and location of interlayer and coatings shall remain the Contractor's responsibility.

29/07/2013
081416 / 6
AECOM Middle East

Wood Doors
Avenue - Phase 2
3.
I.
Safety Manifestation: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
d)
All glass edges shall be chamfered, ground smooth and polished.
e)
Beading:
2.
Beading to fire rated doors shall be stainless steel.
Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.
Flash top of outswinging exterior doors (with manufacturer's standard metal flashing).
Core: Provide solid core to meet the performance requirements of the Specification.
a)
2.
3.
L.
Flush beading with species of hardwood matching the facing, bed in intumescent
mastic in a manner in which the manufacturer's performance certification is based.
Interior Doors
1.
K.
1.
Exterior Doors: Factory treat exterior doors with water repellent after fabrication has been completed
but before shop priming factory finishing.
1.
J.
c)
Doors to be recessed for lock boxes, door closers, hinges and other items of door hardware
as indicated on the Door Hardware Schedule and reinforced as necessary.
Intumescent seals with integral smoke brush seal shall be incorporated into edges of doors/
frames as indicated on the Design Drawings to comply with third party accredited fire certificate.
a)
Intumescent Strip: Water-resistant flat strip with self-adhesive backing suitable for setting
behind door edging. Size as recommended by manufacturer to achieve required
performance.
b)
Intumescent seals shall also be incorporated to back of frame as indicated on the Design
Drawings.
Fire impregnation treatment as required to satisfy the fire rating requirements.
Wood Frames
1.
Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before
fabrication.
2.
Fabricate wood frames to dimensions, profiles and details indicated. Ease edges to radius
indicated.
3.
Fabricate wood frames carefully machining wood to accurate lengths and profiles; free from
twisting and bowing. After machining, surfaces shall be smooth and free from tearing, woolliness,
chip bruising and other machining defects.
4.
Assemble with tight, close fitting joints to produce components free from distortion.
5.
Pack any gaps between door frame and wall with mineral wool or similar.
6.
Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum

extent possible before shipment to the Site. Disassemble components only as necessary for
shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at Site, provide ample allowance for
scribing, trimming, and fitting.
7.
All wood frames shall have at least 3 pieces of shock absorbing neoprene rubber on the frame of
each door.
Metal Door Frames: Refer to Section 081110 Metal Doors and Frames for applicable requirements.
1.
The metal door frames shall include integral door stops that are within the frame profile.
2.
The metal door frames shall be unaffected by micro-organisms, mildew, insects, vermin and/ or
rats, not provide harborage for same.
3.
The metal door frames shall be securely held and sealed.
4.
The tops of wood doors shall align with that of the panel sub-frames.
5.
Metal door shall be provided to the profiles indicated on the Design Drawings.
6.
The method of installation of metal door frames to sub-frames, partitions or blockwork shall
provide a seal to achiever air infiltration of security items.
7.
The metal door frames shall be reinforced at lock cases, hinges, strikes and door closer locations
and shall provide all cut-outs required for the installation of security and door hardware items.
8.
All metal frames shall have at least 3 No. pieces of shock absorbing neoprene rubber on the
frame of each door.
9.
Where indicated on the Design Drawings, mild steel support angles shall be provided in order to
secure the frames to supporting walls. Such angles shall be screwed firmly back to the support
structure using screws into rawlplugs at appropriate lengths required.
M.
Fire and Smoke Seals: Fire, smoke and acoustic seals shall be those on which the manufacturer's
performance certification is based, with any visual variance being selected by the Engineer during the
sample submission process.
N.
Laminate Sheet: Ensure that the laminate is afforded a period of atmospheric conditioning not less
than 48 hours before being applied to the substrate.
O.
Veneers

29/07/2013
081416 / 7
AECOM Middle East

Wood Doors
Avenue - Phase 2
P.
1.
Veneers shall be applied to both faces of the door leaf. Core material and veneers shall be
conditioned before bonding.
2.
Apply veneers with edges tight butted, with no gaps or other open defects. Set out veneers so
that veneers are aligned in regular uniform symmetry unless otherwise specified.
3.
Finished components shall be free from bow, twist, scratches, chipping, pimpling, depressions,
glue spill, staining and other defects. Sand to a fine, smooth finish, free from sanding marks.
Fasteners: Types and sizes necessary for secure assembly and installation of the work, suitable for
each application. Fasteners in exterior or wet locations shall be stainless steel or brass. Use fasteners
in treated wood compatible with treatment type. Refer to Section 050523 Metal Fastenings.
1.
Q.
2.6
Fire-Rated Door Anchors: Anchors shall be located immediately above or below the hinge
reinforcements on the hinge jamb and directly opposite on the strike jamb. All anchors must be
welded to the jambs.
Wireways must be allowed for connection to equipment within the framing system, back to the building
power supply (to allow for wiring by the Electrical Works Contractor) and Building Management
System (BMS). Coordinate provisions for electrical services, sensing devices and final connections.
Connect all parts of equipment with insulated wiring as required for operation.
FABRICATION TOLERANCES
A.
Tolerances for Manufacture

1.
B.
a)
Length/ Width: Maximum allowed deviation is the lesser of 1.5mm up to 3000mm and
3.0mm above 3000mm of design dimension.
b)
Thickness/ Depth (extrusion tolerances nominally): Maximum allowed deviation is 0.5mm.
Tolerances for Component Assembly

1.
Assembly: The physical fitting together of any assembly of sub-elements shall be properly
allowed for in the Detailed Design of the corresponding sub-elements.
2.
Comply with the following tolerances during assembly of components:
3.
4.
2.7
The following tolerances apply to each individual component:
a)
Level of Horizontal Members: 1mm from datum in 1500mm non-cumulative.
b)
Plumb of Vertical Members: 1mm to the vertical in any 1500mm, non-cumulative.
c)
Squareness: Any diagonal length across the panel shall not deviate by more than the lesser
of 3mm or 0.075% of design dimension.
d)
Bow: The center section of the element shall not bow by more than the lesser of 3mm or
0.075% of the length of the element measured from a straight line between the ends of the
element.
e)
Straightness: Any surface or edge shall not deviate by more than 1.5mm from a 2000mm
straightedge placed against it in a direction parallel to the long axis of the element.
f)
Flatness: Any surface shall not deviate by more than 1.5mm from a 2000mm straightedge
placed against it in any direction.
g)
Twist: No section of the element may be twisted by more than 1 from the section at either
end of the element.
All finished metal surfaces shall be flat and free from undulations and irregularities.
a)
Twist: 1.5mm - there shall be no warping of frame.
b)
Line of Panel: 2mm overall difference between adjacent standards.
Tolerances shall not be cumulative.
FINISHING
A.
General Finishing Preparation

1.
B.
General Staining
1.
C.
Perform staining and grain filling to achieve the required color and texture. Mix and tint stains.
Apply stains continuously without overlaps to uniform color across each surface.
General Painting and Lacquering

1.
D.
Prepare wood surfaces to receive applied finishes in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. Remove surface marks, roughness, open grain or contamination. Apply initial
finish coats immediately after preparation.
Mix and spray apply coatings to surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations, in a dust free environment. Lightly sand between coats to a uniform flat
surface. Apply coatings to the specified dry film thicknesses, with uniform sheens and textures
without runs or other defects.
Shop/ Factory Finishing

1.
Shop Grade: Provide finishes of same grades as items to be finished.
2.
Shop Finishing, General: Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as specified in this
Work Section. Defer only final touchup, cleaning and polishing until after installation.

29/07/2013
081416 / 8
AECOM Middle East

Wood Doors
Avenue - Phase 2
3.
Shop Finishing, General: Shop finish transparent finished interior architectural woodwork at
fabrication shop as specified in this Work Section. Refer to Section 099100 Painting for finishing
opaque finished architectural woodwork.
4.
Shop Priming: Shop apply the prime coat including backpriming, if any, for transparent finished
items specified to be Site finished. Refer to Section 099100 Painting for material and application
requirements.
5.
a)
Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop prime doors with 1 No. coat of wood primer specified in
Section 099000 Painting. Seal all 4 edges, edges of cutouts and mortises with primer.
b)
Doors for Transparent Finish: Shop prime doors with stain (if required), other required
pretreatments, and first coat of finish as specified in Section 099100 Painting. Seal all 4
edges, edges of cutouts and mortises with first coat of finish.
Preparation for Shop Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling
countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces and similar preparations for finishing
architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.
a)
6.
Factory Finishing General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing.
Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not
surface applied, before finishing.
a)
7.
2.8
Backpriming: Apply 1 No. coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed
surfaces of woodwork. Apply 2 No. coats to end-grain surfaces.
Finish faces, all 4 edges, edges of cutouts and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted
on bottom edges, edges of cutouts and mortises.
Finish doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish. Site finish doors indicated
to receive opaque finish.

A.
Acoustic: Test reports shall be provided demonstrating that all doors installed requiring sound ratings
meet the performance criteria as specified, and that values achieved in laboratory conditions are
exceeded by a minimum of 2dB to correct the diminution anticipated once installed on Site.
B.
Engineer for consideration of the suitability of the sealant for the application intended.
End of Section

29/07/2013
081416 / 9
AECOM Middle East

Wood Doors
Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 083200 GLASS DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1
1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
PRODUCT SELECTION
DESIGN CRITERIA
MATERIALS
GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
ALUMINUM FINISHES

29/07/2013
2
2
3
5
6
6
6
083200
AECOM Middle East

Glass Doors
Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 083200 GLASS DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.

1.
2.
3.

1.
C.
1.2
Glazed doors.
Design Drawings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain glass doors from single source from single manufacturer.
B.
Fenestration Standard: In accordance with AAMA/ WDMA/ CSA 101/ I.S.2/ A440, "Standard/
Specification for Windows, Doors, and Unit Skylights", for minimum standards of performance,
materials, components, accessories and fabrication. Comply with more stringent requirements if
indicated.
C.
Glazing Publications: In accordance with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and with
GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
D.
Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201.
1.
Subject to compliance with requirements, permanently mark safety glass with certification label of
the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
E.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating glass doors that meet or exceed
performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by inclusion in lists and by
labels, test reports and calculations.
F.
G.
1.
A Specialist with successful experience in performing similar work. Use applicators licensed by
the product manufacturer for chemically treated material.
2.
Product Options: Drawings indicate nominal size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of glass
doors and are based on Design.
1.
H.
Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by the Engineer, except with the
Engineer's acceptance. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to
the Engineer for review.

1.

certified test data to demonstrate compliance with the Specification.
a)
I.
J.
Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed within the last 4 years by a Qualified
Testing Agency, for each class, grade, and size of sliding aluminum-framed glass door. Test
results based on use of downsized test doors shall not be accepted.
2.
responsibilities regarding the performance requirements, durability or and service life
requirements of the glass doors and frames.
3.
doorsets.
Certifications
1.
Provide certification to demonstrate that glass doors and frames have been previously tested to
meet the requirements of the Specification.
2.
and service life requirements of the doors and frames.
3.
doorsets.
Mock-ups: Provide mock-ups for each type, of size required to demonstrate all materials selected and
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
29/07/2013
083200 / 1
AECOM Middle East

Glass Doors
Avenue - Phase 2
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION
A.
Type DRS-301 Framed Glazed Swing Door

1.
Framed glass door.
2.
Fabricate from extruded aluminum frames with provisions for fixing "C" channel cap profile.
3.
Glazing: Single laminated clear annealed glass with PVB inter-layer.
4.
Door Controls:
a)
B.
C.
D.
5.
Provide rubber gasket weather stripping to door head and side frames that shall prevent fingers
being trapped. Equip door bottom frame with an automatic drop seal.
6.
Type DRS-302 Sliding Folding Glazed Door

1.
Description: Folding sliding tracked door with mechanism and sensors integrated within the
construction.
2.
Manufacturer: Schuco or acceptable equivalent.
3.
Product Reference: Schuco ASS 70FD.
4.
Glass: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
Type DRS-303 Internal Door and Shop Front Glazing

1.
Frame: Aluminium with "C" profile capping.
2.
Glass: Type GL-107 as per section 088000.
Type IWS-801 Frameless Glass Door

1.
E.
Description: Frameless glass door, comprising:

a)
Patch plates to anchor glass. Polish and arris exposed edges of glass.
b)
Top and Bottom Rails: Clamp rails with suitable level of torque. Snap-lock facings to rails;
secure end caps to rails with countersunk screws.
Glazed Door Controls

1.
Infrared Scanner Presence Detector: Self-contained scanner detector consisting of an infrared

presence-sensing device to activate door operator. Sensing device shall be adjustable to provide
detection patterns and sensitivity equivalent to those required for control mats. Provide metal or
plastic housing with black finish for sensing device.
2.
Remote Switch: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted, door control switch; consisting of

rectangular, flat push plate of material indicated and controlling actuator mounted in junction box.
a)
F.
2.2
Provide an infra-red sensor above the door on the swing side to stop the operator closing
the door upon detecting an obstruction.
Material: Stainless steel, grade 316L.
Finish: Hairline finish.

a)
Engraved Signage: International symbol of accessibility and "Push to Open."
b)
Mounting: Post.
1.
Key Switch: Manufacturer's standard recess-mounted, door control switch consisting of

key-controlled on/ off/ hold-open actuator, stainless steel cover plate and junction box.
2.
Wireless or Remote Radio Control: Manufacturer's standard radio control consisting of a receiver
and battery-operated transmitters, wall mounted with push plate.
3.
Electrical Interlocks: Unless units are equipped with self-protecting devices or circuits, provide
electrical interlocks to prevent activation of operator when door is locked, latched or bolted.
4.
Opening Width Control Switch: 2-position switch that in the normal position allows sliding doors
to travel to full opening width and in the alternate position reduces opening to a selected partial
opening width.
5.
Automatic Locking: Provide an electrically controlled device to automatically lock door in the
closed position after each cycle. Include exit device indicated to permit door activation from
inside for emergency egress.
DESIGN CRITERIA
A.
All door leaves and door frames shall be by the same manufacturer. Alternatively, the frames may be
manufactured by a source recommended in writing by the door leaf manufacturer. All doorsets shall
be pre-hung and to be certified to achieve the performance criteria.
B.
Door hardware shall be as the Hardware Schedule and Section 087100 Hardware of the Specification.
Doorset manufacturer shall ensure that the door hardware does not negate the certification of the
Work.
1.
C.
Refer to the MEP Specification with regard to door operations, security and additional devices.
Where doorsets are described as being automatically operated and/ or linked to BMS, the wireways
and automation equipment shall be concealed, acceptable to the Engineer.

29/07/2013
083200 / 2
AECOM Middle East

Glass Doors
Avenue - Phase 2
D.
Concealed wireways must be allowed within the structure for connection to equipment within the EWS
and IWS systems, back to the building power supply (to allow for wiring by the Electrical Works
Contractor) and Building Management System (BMS. Coordinate provisions for electrical services,
devices and final connections. Connect all parts of equipment with insulated wiring as required for
operation.
E.
All doorsets shall be checked at all levels with regard to security and the relevant security symbols.
F.
The Contractor, in liaison with the manufacturer, shall ensure that the Work as specified incorporate
all necessary seals, sealants, fastenings, accessories and ancillary items are supplied as required in
G.
Unless stated otherwise all door systems referred to herein shall be doorsets (as defined herein) in
H.
Unless stated otherwise, all door systems shall be factory prefinished.
I.
The Specification shall be read in conjunction with the Door Schedule, Design Drawings and the
Acoustic Report to convey the following, specific information.
1.
Configuration, i.e:
a)
Single leaf.
b)
c)
Door reference.
d)
Dimensions.
e)
f)
g)
J.
Performance, as indicated on the associated ***Door Schedule***, of the doorset/ assembly type shall
vary dependent on location. The Contractor shall use the applicable manufacturer's details of the
required visual range to achieve the stated performance.
K.
L.
All exterior doors shall be fully weatherstripped.
M.
Doorsets/ assemblies shall be supplied and installed as complete integrated systems with all
fastenings, framing, bracketing, seals, sealants, gaskets, hardware and other components/
accessories recommended by the manufacturer to suit the Project conditions.
2.3
A.
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes.
Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky
heat loss.
B.
Assembly Deflection/ Safety

1.
2.
C.
D.
Ensure deflection of the assembly that shall not:

a)
***Exceed 1/ 200 or 15mm***, whichever is the lesser, on vertical framing members

supporting glazing (measured at right angles to the span of the member).
b)
Exceed 1/ 900 or 5mm, whichever is the lesser, on horizontal framing members supporting
glazing, measured parallel to the span of the member.
c)
Have more restrictive values to prevent the edge clearance or bite on the glass dropping
below 75% of that required.
d)
Cause movement in sealant joints to exceed 75% of the material manufacturer's stated
values.
e)
Cause loadbearing members to transfer loads to the cladding.
Safety:
a)
The work shall withstand the specified loads without failure or damage as specified, unless
it can be demonstrated that it is easily repairable, to the acceptance of the Engineer.
Glazing shall remain in place when broken, without penetration.
b)
When subject to a blast load of the magnitude described it shall protect the building's
occupants from the effects of the pressure wave and from any severe injuries caused by
flying fragments of glass.
1.
All materials, core materials, edgings, facing materials and adhesives and preservative
requirements for wood doors and associated Work shall be selected to satisfy the design life
requirements for the environmental conditions as specified in Division 01 General Requirements.
2.
All adhesives, fastenings and associated elements of the Work shall have moisture resistant
Acoustics

29/07/2013
083200 / 3
AECOM Middle East

Glass Doors
Avenue - Phase 2
E.
1.
2.
Refer to the Door Schedule for specific acoustic values.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Doors shall close quietly without 'slamming noise'. The maximum sound level caused by door
operation shall be 68dB (audible), as measured at 1000mm from both faces of the door with a
sound level meter set to 'F' (fast) in response.
Fire
1.
Fire doorsets/ fire door assemblies, including the installation method within door openings shall
comply with the Civil Defence, applicable local codes, NFPA 80, and the fire performance
requirements stipulated hereunder. In the event of conflict, the more onerous requirement shall
prevail.
2.
Fire doorsets/ fire door assemblies shall achieve the fire rating indicated within the Door
Schedule read in conjunction with the ***Fire Strategy Report*** and Design Drawings.
3.
Comply with the label requirements of NFPA and applicable local codes. Fabricate doors and
frames in accordance with requirements of AIA pamphlet No.80, NFPA 80 and UL Subject 63 for
the class of door opening indicated or scheduled.
4.
Doorsets / door assemblies which, by nature of their size, design or configuration fall outside of
the manufacturer's test coverage shall require independently conducted testing or at worst, a
dedicated technical assessment carried out by a nationally recognized authority.
5.
Fire doors and frames including fire seals and all associated materials and installation shall
comply with the requirements of NFPA 80.
6.
Intumescent fire and smoke seals to suit fire and smoke ratings as scheduled shall be included.
7.
All fire doors shall be self-latching with approved latching devices with suitable latch bolt length,
refer to Section 087100 Door Hardware.
8.
Unless otherwise indicated or specified, doors at fire rated openings shall be arranged to remain
in the normally closed position by furnishing each unit with an automatic approved closing
device. Refer also to Section 087100 Door Hardware.
9.
All fire door shall have steel hinge with ball bearing type except spring type hinges, all in
accordance with applicable code and NFPA requirements.
10. All fire doors swinging in pairs requiring astragals shall have at least one overlapping astragal.
11. All fire doors shall be equipped with approved closing device and those with astragal must have
a coordinator to allow the inactive leaf to close before the active leaf. A steel astragal shall
overlap the inactive leaf by a minimum of 19mm.
12. Elements of the work shall be either non-combustible or not easily ignitable with low flame
13. Smoke Passage and Air Leakage: The doorsets and/ or door assemblies shall have certification
illustrating conformance with the NFPA.
14. Durability: The work shall remain free of damage, permanent distortion impairing function or
unacceptable changes in appearance as follows:
15. Damage arising from forces applied under normal conditions of use (repetitive stresses) and
a)
b)
c)
d)
Indentation.
e)
16. Distortion arising from moisture changes, temperature changes and applied forces including
cupping, bowing or twisting which prevents the ability of the door in accordance with the fire,
smoke and sound requirements.
17. Appearance changes arising from damage, distortion or shrinkage including opening of joints;
excessive surface indentations; color changes or yellowing of coatings.
F.
Gaskets
1.
The gaskets shall accommodate the maximum movements applicable.

29/07/2013
083200 / 4
AECOM Middle East

Glass Doors
Avenue - Phase 2
2.
G.
Gaskets and seals used to achieve the required airtightness shall be selected to accommodate
fully the range of dimensional tolerances and movements associated with the design, fabrication
and installation of the Work. They shall be formed from materials capable of maintaining their
elastic qualities and dimensions and shall be resistant to physical and chemical attack, sufficient
to maintain the full acoustic performance of the Work.
Sliding Door Performance

1.
AAMA/ WDMA/ CSA Performance Requirements: Provide sliding aluminum-framed glass doors
of performance indicated that comply with AAMA/ WDMA/ CSA 101/ I.S.2/ A440.
2.
Condensation Resistance: Provide sliding aluminum-framed glass doors with a minimum CRF
when tested according to AAMA 1503.
3.
Thermal Transmittance: Provide sliding aluminum-framed glass doors with a maximum whole
fenestration product U-factor indicated.
a)
U-Factor: [......] W/ m x K.
4.
Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Provide sliding aluminum-framed glass doors with a
whole-fenestration product SHGC maximum of [...].
5.
Acoustical Performance: Provide sliding aluminum-framed glass doors with an STC rating of 29
when tested according to and determined by ASTM E 90 and ASTM E 413.
6.
Air Leakage Resistance: Maximum rate not more than indicated when tested according to AAMA/
WDMA/ CSA 101/ I.S.2/ A440, Air Leakage Resistance Test.
7.
a)
Maximum Rate: 1.5L/ sec x m of area at an inward test pressure of 75Pa.
b)
Maximum Rate: 1.5L/ sec x m of area at an inward test pressure of 300Pa.
Water Penetration Resistance: No water leakage as defined in the AAMA/ WDMA/ CSA
referenced test methods at a water test pressure equaling that indicated, when tested according
to AAMA/ WDMA/ CSA 101/ I.S.2/ A440, Water Penetration Resistance Test.
a)
Test Pressure: 20% of positive design pressure, but not more than 580Pa.
8.
Forced Entry Resistance: Comply with Performance Grade 10 requirements when tested
according to ASTM F842.
9.
Life Cycle Testing: Tested according to and complying with AAMA/ WDMA/ CSA 101/ I.S.2/
A440.
10. Operating Force and Auxiliary (Durability) Tests: Tested according to and complying with AAMA/
WDMA/ CSA 101/ I.S.2/ A440.
11. Sliding Door Hardware: In accordance with AAMA 907.
a)
Roller Assemblies: In accordance with AAMA 906.
12. Sliding Door Insect Panels: In accordance with SMA 1201.

a)
2.4
Glass-Fiber Mesh Fabric: In accordance with ASTM D3656.
MATERIALS
A.
Aluminum Extrusions
1.
Provide alloy and temper recommended by glass door manufacturer for strength, corrosion
resistance, and application of required finish.
2.
In accordance with AAMA/ WDMA/ CSA 101/ I.S.2/ A440.
B.
Aluminum General: Unless specified otherwise, aluminum sheeting shall be a minimum of 3mm thick.
structural and finishing requirements of the Specification are met.
C.
Stainless Steel General: Specific grade designations shall be either as specified in the relevant Work
Sections of the Specification or, where not identified specifically, selected to meet the performance
criteria specified for the particular element or components.
D.
Stainless Steel Castings General: Shall be of austenitic stainless steel and the casting alloy shall be
determined by the Contractor to meet the requirements of the Specification but shall be equal or
superior to Type 316 with respect to corrosion resistance.
E.
1.
The surface roughness of the casting surface prior to any subsequent finishing process shall be
SCRATA A2 (Steel Castings Research and Trade Association) or better.
2.
Make allowance for 2 post production finishing processes to be utilized. The processes shall be
agreed with the Engineer and shall include blast finishes (including bead blasting) and
electro-polishing or acid pickling.
Fasteners: Provide fasteners of aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other materials warranted
by the manufacturer to be non-corrosive for SC 3 severe service conditions and compatible with
members, trim, hardware, anchors and other components of glass doors. In accordance with AAMA/
WDMA/ CSA 101/ I.S.2/ A440.
1.
Exposed Fasteners: Unless unavoidable for applying hardware, do not use exposed fasteners.
For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish of member or hardware being
fastened, as appropriate.

29/07/2013
083200 / 5
AECOM Middle East

Glass Doors
Avenue - Phase 2
2.
Fasteners in exterior or wet locations shall be stainless steel or brass. Use fasteners in treated
wood compatible with treatment type.
3.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304/ Type 316 stainless steel fasteners for interior/
exterior use.
F.
Anchors, Clips and Accessories: Provide anchors, clips, and accessories of aluminum, nonmagnetic
stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel or iron for glass doors, in accordance with ASTM B456 or ASTM
B633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure
indicated.
G.
Reinforcing Members: Provide aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or nickel/ chrome-plated steel
reinforcing members that are non-corrosive for SC 3 severe service conditions and in accordance with
AAMA/ WDMA/ CSA 101/ I.S.2/ A440; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure
indicated.
H.
Compression-Type Weather Stripping: Provide compressible weather stripping designed for

permanently resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action, and completely concealed when glass
door is closed.
1.
I.
Sliding-Type Weather Stripping: Provide woven-pile weather stripping of wool, polypropylene, or nylon
pile and resin-impregnated backing fabric. Comply with AAMA 701.
1.
J.
Weather Seals: Provide weather stripping with integral barrier fin or fins of semi-rigid,
polypropylene sheet or polypropylene-coated material. Comply with AAMA 702.
Sealant: For sealants required within fabricated doors, provide glass door manufacturer's standard,
permanently elastic, non-shrinking, and non-migrating type recommended by sealant manufacturer for
joint size and movement.
1.
K.
Weather Stripping Material: Manufacturer's standard system and materials in accordance with
AAMA/ WDMA/ CSA 101/ I.S.2/ A440.
Gaskets: All gaskets shall be fabricated to the most appropriate grade and hardness. Design and
select all gaskets in order to
1.
2.
3.
Ensure that they do not permanently distort over the working life of the Work.
4.
5.
The choice of seals and gaskets shall not result in any reduction in sound insulation
performance.
6.
Intumescent Strip: Water-resistant flat strip with self-adhesive backing suitable for setting behind
door edging. Size as recommended by manufacturer to achieve required performance.
L.
Adhesives: Adhesives shall not contain urea formaldehyde.
M.
Fire and Smoke Seals: Fire, smoke and acoustic seals shall be those on which the manufacturer's
performance certification is based, with any visual variance being selected by the Engineer during the
sample submission process.
N.
Door Glass and Glazing System: Comply with Section 088000 Glazing for safety glass, insulating
glass units, laminated glass and glazing requirements applicable to glass doors.
2.5

A.
Acoustic: Test reports shall be provided demonstrating that all doors installed requiring sound ratings
meet the performance criteria as specified, and that values achieved in laboratory conditions are
exceeded by a minimum of 2dB to correct the diminution anticipated once installed on Site.
B.
Engineer for consideration of the suitability of the sealant for the application intended.
2.6
GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A.
B.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary
protective covering before shipping.
C.
Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in
appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved samples
and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
2.7
ALUMINUM FINISHES
A.
Clear Anodic Finish: In accordance with AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010mm or thicker.
B.
Color Anodic Finish: In accordance with AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A32/ A34, Class II, 0.010mm or
thicker.
1.
Color: As selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer's full range of industry colors and color
densities.

29/07/2013
083200 / 6
AECOM Middle East

Glass Doors
Avenue - Phase 2
C.
Baked Enamel or Powder Coat Finish: In accordance with AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film
thickness of 0.04mm. Comply with the coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning,
conversion coating and applying and baking finish.
1.
D.
Color and Gloss: As selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer's full range.
High-Performance Organic Finish: 3-coat fluoropolymer finish in accordance with AAMA 2605 and
containing not less than 70% PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating
to exposed metal surfaces in accordance with the coating and resin manufacturers' written
instructions.
1.
Color and Gloss: As selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer's full range.
End of Section

29/07/2013
083200 / 7
AECOM Middle East

Glass Doors
Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 084413 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1
1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
PRODUCT SELECTION
DESIGN CRITERIA
MATERIALS

29/07/2013
2
4
5
9
084413
AECOM Middle East

Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls
Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 084413 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2

1.
2.
3.
4.
manufacture.
5.
Section Includes
1.
Glazed aluminum curtain wall assemblies (Stick System).
2.
Glazed aluminum curtain wall assemblies (Unitized System).
3.
Glazed aluminum curtain wall assemblies (Structural System). Toggle glazed.
Design Drawings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.
2.
Certification to ISO 9001 or operates a quality system acceptable to the Engineer.
B.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer, professional engineer and preconstruction testing agency.
C.
Life cycle performance data.
D.
Preconstruction Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ISO/ IEC 17025 and accredited
by ICC-ES for preconstruction testing indicated.
E.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.
F.
G.
1.
American Welding Code (AWS) D1.1/ D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
2.
American Welding Code (AWS) D1.2/ D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."
Energy Performance Standards: Comply with NFRC for minimum standards of energy performance,
materials, components, accessories, and fabrication. Comply with more stringent requirements if
indicated.
1.
H.
1.
I.
Provide NFRC-certified glazed aluminum curtain walls with an attached label.
Mock-ups

1.
2.
Engineer.
3.
responsibilities regarding the performance requirements, durability or service life requirements.
4.
Preconstruction Testing Service: Provide glazed aluminum curtain walls that comply with
test-performance requirements indicated, as evidenced by reports based on Project-specific
preconstruction testing or of tests performed on manufacturer's standard assemblies by a
a)
Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction testing on laboratory

mock-ups.
b)
Indicate size and other details of laboratory mock-ups on Design Drawings or by inserts.

29/07/2013
084413 / 1
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
5.
c)
Build laboratory mock-ups at testing agency facility using personnel, materials, and methods
of construction that will be used at Site.
d)
Notify Engineer seven days in advance of the dates and times when laboratory mock-ups
will be constructed.
e)
Preconstruction Testing Program: Perform tests on laboratory mock-ups in the following

order:
J.
Structural-performance preloading at 50% of the specified wind-load design pressure

when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330.
2.
Air infiltration when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283.
3.
Water penetration under static pressure when tested in accordance with ASTM E 331.
4.
Water penetration under dynamic pressure when tested in accordance with AAMA
501.1.
5.
Structural performance at design load when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330.
6.
Structural performance at maximum 150% of positive and negative wind-load design

pressures when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330.
Corrosion Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a

qualified preconstruction testing agency, indicating compliance with performance requirements.
a)
6.
1.
Submit samples, technical material and pre-test results of corrosion analysis of

components. Include written confirmation when separation of dissimilar metals is not
required, signed by an acceptable independent corrosion engineer.
Field quality-control reports.
Certificates
1.
Seismic Qualification Certificates: For glazed aluminum curtain walls, accessories, and
components. Include statement of compliance with ASCE 7-10 for glass fallout under racking.
a)
Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
2.
3.
substrate materials including aluminum, finishes, glass, glass coatings, gaskets, setting blocks,
backing rods, etc. These certificates shall relate to tests carried out by the sealant manufacturer.
4.
Energy Performance Certificates: For glazed aluminum curtain walls, accessories, and
components, from manufacturer.
a)
Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each glazed aluminum
curtain wall.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION
A.
Type EWS-101 Glazed Curtain Wall - Stick System

1.
Stick built curtain walling system as indicated on the Design Drawings and specified herein.
2.
Framing:
a)
Extruded aluminum thermally broken, drained and ventilated mullions and transoms forming
the main framing with provision to fix "C" channel capping.
b)
Manufacturer: Schuco or accepable equivalent.
c)
Product: Schuco FW50+ or similar.
d)
Unless otherwise indicated, mullions shall protrude from transoms and glazing, sized and
profiled as indicated on the Design Drawings.
e)
3.
Configuration/ Dimensions: Refer to the Design Drawings.
4.
Glazing: Double glazing, type to be confirmed by the Engineer.
5.
Fastenings:
a)
Profile shall be continuous.
b)
Fastenings shall be clamped as indicatively indicated on the Design Drawings, to meet the
requirements stated in this Specification, and to the acceptance of the Structural Engineer.
1.
6.
Alternative fastenings solutions by the Contractor shall be submitted to the Engineer

and Structural Engineer for review and acceptance.
Integral Doors:
a)
Curtain wall manufacturer's proprietary entrance door components shall be used for
consistency of the external elevation treatment.

29/07/2013
084413 / 2
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
b)
7.
Bri-soliel:
a)
8.
B.
Curtain wall manufacturer's proprietary products shall be used for compatibility and
Other requirements: As indicated on the Design Drawings.
Type EWS-103 Glazed Curtain Wall - Frameless System

1.
Frameless structural toggle capture curtain walling system such as by Schuco or acceptable
equivalent, fastened between floor slabs.
2.
Support System:
a)
Concealed metal brackets/ channel fastened back to primary structure.
b)
Finish:
c)
1.
All exposed support metal shall be stainless steel, grade 316L, hairline finish.
2.
All concealed support metal shall be natural anodized aluminum.
Color: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
3.
4.
5.
a)
6.
7.
8.
Alternative fastenings solutions by the Contractor shall be submitted to the Engineer and
Structural Engineer for review and acceptance.
Integral Doors:
a)
b)
Integrated door and frame profiles and finishes shall match the surrounding exterior wall
system unless otherwise stated.
Bri-soliel:
a)
C.
system unless otherwise stated
Type EWS-104 Curtain Wall Structural Glass

1.
Structural glass curtain walling system by Schuco or acceptable equivalent, fastened between
floor slabs.
2.
Support System:
a)
Glass fins and spot fixing devices fastened back to primary structure.
b)
Finish:
c)
1.
All exposed support metal shall be stainless steel, grade 316L.
2.
All concealed support metal shall be natural anodized aluminum.
3.
4.
5.
Joints: High quality translucent structural toggle capture to achieve a visually frameless
appearance.
6.
a)
Sizing: 20mm nominal joint width.
b)
Finish: Recessed.
a)
7.
8.
Alternative fastenings solutions by the Contractor shall be submitted to the Engineer and
Structural Engineer for review and acceptance.
Integral Doors:
a)
b)
Bri-soliel:

29/07/2013
084413 / 3
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
a)
D.
Type EWS-105 Curtain Wall Planer Glass

1.
Planer glazing curtain walling system by Schuco or acceptable equivalent, fastened between
floor slabs.
2.
Support System:
a)
Extruded aluminum thermally broken, drained and ventilated mullions and transoms forming
the main framing.
b)
c)
Color: Dark grey.
3.
4.
Glazing: Planer glazing system by Pilkigton or equivalent.
5.
Integral Doors:
6.
E.
a)
b)
Type EWS-801 U-Profile Glazing

1.
Description: Channel shaped moulded alkalilime glass consisting mainly of sand, lime, soda and
dolomite.
2.
Manufacturer: Lamberts Linit or acceptable equivalent.
3.
Product Reference: 504 Perl/ Cord.

a)
4.
2.2
With sand blasting and low e-coating.
Fixing: As per manufacturer's reccommendation.
DESIGN CRITERIA
A.
The work shall oversail the slab edge and be either fastened to primary structure or secondary
support structure.
B.
Unless otherwise specified, aluminum framing shall provide four-sided support for the glazed-in
panels, except where glass to glass corners occur.
C.
Framing profiles and other visible components shall utilize similar profiles throughout such that glazed
walling systems are consistent and matching in appearance.
D.
Joints shall align and continue through interfacing exterior walling types. Visually open, recessed
horizontal and vertical joints between units shall be uniform and equal to a nominal width as indicated
on the Design Drawings
E.
Glass to glass exterior corners shall have joint seals to the manufacturer's recommendation and to the
acceptance of the Engineer.
F.
G.
Secondary Support
1.
2.
Mild steel secondary support members shall be fabricated and protected against corrosion in
accordance with the Structural Engineer's requirements:
a)
If visible it shall be polyester powder coat finished, color to Engineer's acceptance.
b)
Protective coatings, where specified, and the associated finish to joints shall be to the same
standard as the main assemblies.
H.
Glazed/ infill panels shall be as indicated on the Design Drawings using codes specified.
I.
Dimensions are deemed to be nominal but indicative to the design intent. The Contractor shall
J.
Materials used for fastening shall be stainless steel grade 316. Fastenings shall be concealed or
K.
Systems shall include supports, brackets, fastenings, insulation, fire stops, acoustic breaks, vapor
barriers, breather and waterproofing membranes, drainage channels, spigots / anti-rotation pins,
seals, sealants, compressible fills, clips, glazing bridges, spacers, isolators, gaskets, flashings,
closures and all other accessories/ components necessary to complete the installation.

29/07/2013
084413 / 4
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
L.
Fire breaks/ insulation and acoustic insulation to floor slabs and ceiling void edge, complete with metal
encapsulation finished to match the curtain walling framing.
M.
sub-contractor to ensure a fully waterproof integration is achieved.
N.
O.
P.
2.3
A.
B.
General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by

preconstruction testing of glazed aluminum curtain walls representing those indicated for this Project
without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
1.
Glazed aluminum curtain walls shall withstand movements of supporting structure as specified in
the Structural Engineer's documentation, including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column
shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live
loads.
2.
Failure also includes the following:

a)
Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.
b)
Glass breakage.
c)
Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
d)
Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
e)
Failure of operating units.
f)
Failure due to impact loads.
Structural Performance
1.
Provide curtain wall systems capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads without
failure of materials or permanent deformation, based on testing units representative of those
indicated for the Project that pass AAMA/ WDMA 101/ I.S.2/ NAFS, Uniform Load Structural
Test:
a)
Design Wind Loads: Curtain wall system, including anchorage, capable of withstanding
wind-load pressures established from wind tunnel testing specified in the Wind Tunnel
Testing Specification by the Structural Engineer.
1.
2.
Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows:

a)
Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to

glass plane not exceeding L/ 175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing unit or
an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 19mm, whichever is
less.
b)
Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to amount not exceeding that which reduces
glazing bite to less than 75% of design dimension and that which reduces edge clearance
between framing members and glazing or other fastened components to less than 3.2mm.
1.
3.
Design system to withstand design wind pressure without reductions for shielding or
venting of adjacent construction.
Operable Units: Provide a minimum 1.6mm clearance between framing members and
operable units.
c)
Cantilever Deflection: Where framing members overhang an anchor point, limit deflection to
two times the length of cantilevered member, divided by 175.
d)
No deflections are permitted under loadings that are detrimental to the curtain wall
assemblies, adjoining work, or adjacent structural or building elements.
e)
Design components, couplings and fastenings to withstand the specified deflections without
permanent distortion, deformation or failure.
f)
Design the assemblies to accommodate the specified differential structural movements due
to loads imposed by adjacent structures.
g)
Reduce the magnitude of the permissible deflections when they are detrimental to the work,
support structures and internal finishes.
Design Loads:
a)
Design the curtain wall assembly to withstand the specified loads without affecting the
assemblies' ability in accordance with the specified performance requirements and the
specified exceptional loads.
b)
When calculating design loads, consider the worst combination, taking into account
pressure coefficients at various locations may determine more than one design criterion.

29/07/2013
084413 / 5
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
c)
4.
Self-weight Gravity Loads: The work shall be capable of accommodating the self-weight of
the assembly including its framing and supports.
Live Loads:
a)
Design the work to withstand the following live loads without reduction in performance or
deformation of components:
1.
Loads resulting from movements of the building structure and curtain wall support
structures.
2.
Horizontally applied loads acting on surfaces of framing members and glazing due to
maintenance and cleaning operations.
3.
A static 500N load applied horizontally through a square of 100mm sides on the
framing.
4.
5.
Known impact loads, or transferred impact loads, that occur during the service life,
without sustaining non-repairable damage.
6.
Loads imposed during replacement of panels and units.
7.
Wind loads.
8.
Horizontal and vertical loads of similar magnitude to those imposed on adjoining work
or attached elements, as indicated.
5.
Windborne-Debris-Impact-Resistance Performance: Curtain wall systems that are not protected

from missile impact by the exterior panel cladding system shall pass missile-impact and
cyclic-pressure tests specified in Section 088000 Glazing.
6.
Seismic Performance: Glazed aluminum curtain walling system shall withstand the effects of
earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ ASCE 7 unless higher loads are required by
authorities having jurisdiction.
7.
Imposed Movements: Design the work to withstand imposed loads due to specified movements
of supporting structures and adjacent elements.
8.
Inertial Loads: Design the work to withstand inertial loads due to the acceleration and
deceleration of moving elements including opening windows, doors and vents as instructed by
the Engineer.
9.
See SEI/ ASCE 7 for determining Component Importance Factor.
10. Story Drift: Accommodate design displacement of adjacent stories indicated.

a)
Design Displacement: As specified in the Structural Engineer's documentation.
b)
Test Performance: Meeting criteria for passing based on building occupancy type when
tested according to AAMA 501.4 at design displacement and 1.5 times the design
displacement, unless otherwise specified in the Structural Engineer's specification.
11. Electrical Grounding: Design curtain wall systems to provide electrical grounding including for
lightning protection, in accordance with requirements of applicable codes.
12. Glass and Glazing: Comply with performance requirements of Section 088000 Glazing.
C.
1.
2.
Sound Transmission:
a)
Provide glazed aluminum curtain walls with fixed glazing and framing areas having
Outdoor-Indoor Transmission Classes as indicated, when tested for laboratory sound
transmission loss according to ASTM E 90 and determined by ASTM E 1332, unless
otherwise specified.
b)
Insulate internal areas of the building from high levels of noise.
c)
Provide internal sound reduction between floors.
d)
Provide internal sound reduction between adjoining areas on the same floor.
e)
The measured noise exposure of each faade shall have been used in conjunction with the
internal noise criteria of 45dB Aeq to derive the faade sound insulation requirements of this
development.
Flanking Transmission:
a)
Assemblies shall be tested for flanking transmission with partitions meeting the faade at
the mullions. The assemblies shall provide a weighted standardized flanking level difference
determined by the Acoustic Consultant when tested in an accredited independent laboratory
in accordance with ASTM E 336.
b)
Assemblies shall be tested for flanking transmission at junction with the floor/ ceiling slabs.
The assemblies shall provide a weighted standardized flanking level difference determined
by the Acoustic Consultant when tested in an accredited independent laboratory in
accordance with ASTM E 336.
c)
The specified test method is designed for suspended ceilings. Use an acceptable
international testing standard to suit the application, otherwise adapt the specified standard.
The simulated wall and floor constructions shall not influence the results of the junction
tests.

29/07/2013
084413 / 6
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
D.
Commence acoustic tests at a time acceptable to the Engineer, in an accredited

independent laboratory.
e)
Where existing test data is available from an accredited independent laboratory, it shall be
considered acceptable providing the tests have been performed on the same assembly
specified. Test data for similar constructions may be accepted if supporting computations
are submitted to account for differences between the proposed and tested construction.
Fire Performance
1.
Refer to the Fire Strategy Report.
2.
General: Curtain wall assemblies shall be non-combustible or not easily ignitable, with low flame
3.
Surface Spread of Flame:
4.
5.
6.
E.
d)
a)
Exterior walls in accordance with the unprotected limitations for exterior fire spread, as
required by the applicable building codes and NFPA.
b)
Surface Spread of Flame Classification: In accordance with UL 723 and ASTM E 84.

a)
Refer to Section 078400 Fire Stopping.
b)
Provide cavity barriers in the curtain wall and fire stopping, as specified, at junctions of
exterior walls with adjoining fire-resisting construction, in accordance with the requirements
of the applicable building codes.
c)
Fire Stopping between Floors:

1.
Provide fire stopping to preserve integrity and insulation of compartmentation at the

junctions of floors and curtain walls to prevent fire spread from floor to floor. Seal joints
in accordance with the MEP Engineer's specifications.
2.
Materials shall accommodate movement between slab edge and curtain wall and their
fire resisting performance shall not be affected by water from sprinkler discharge.
3.
Floor-to-floor fire separation rating: ***60*** minutes.
Fire Resistance:
a)
Curtain walls used to separate spaces and requiring a fire resistance, shall comply with
functional requirements of the applicable building codes.
b)
Fire-resisting glass: Refer to Section 088000 Glazing. Comply with the specified fire ratings.
Beadings and gaskets shall be suitable for the required fire rating.
c)
Reaction to Fire Properties: Exterior surfaces of the curtain wall shall comply with functional
requirements of the applicable building codes.
d)
Limit combustibility of insulation exposed in ventilated cavities in exterior curtain walls, in

accordance with the requirements of the applicable building codes.
Fire Performance:
a)
Provide fire resistant structural connection between thermally broken elements and
surrounding construction to prevent disengagement due to melting of thermal break.
b)
Insulated core spandrel panels in accordance with Factory Mutual Approval standards for
fire protection performance.
Environmental Performance
1.
Thermal Movements:
a)
Design support structures to accommodate changes in dimensions and shapes of

components due to changes in service temperatures below, and from differential surface
temperatures between the inside and outside of the building, without detriment to the
specified performance. The Design shall include for temporary and permanent conditions.
Take into account the effects of orientation of the building towards the sun.
b)
Allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in
ambient and surface temperatures:
c)
1.
2.
Test Interior Ambient-Air Temperature: 24C.
3.
Test Performance: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress on

framing, anchors, and fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested according to
AAMA 501.5.
Ensure that thermal movements do not result in unacceptable levels of audible noise.
2.
Maintain continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout assembly.
3.
Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Curtain wall system shall not provide evidence of water
leakage when tested according to ASTM E 331 at minimum static air pressure differential of 20%
of inward acting wind-load design pressure as defined by ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for
Buildings and Other Structures," but not less than 300 Pa and. not more than 720 Pa.

29/07/2013
084413 / 7
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
4.
Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: No evidence of water penetration through fixed
glazing and framing areas when tested according to AAMA 501.1 at dynamic pressure equal to
20% of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 300 Pa and not more than 720 Pa.
a)
Maximum Water Leakage: No uncontrolled water penetrating assemblies or water

appearing on assemblies' normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other than
condensation. Water leakage does not include water controlled by flashing and gutters that
is drained to exterior.
b)
Assemblies including flashings and junctions with adjoining work shall be weatherproof and
watertight under the specified conditions with allowance for deflections and movements.
c)
The Detailed Design of the work shall not be based on a single line of defense. The cavities
between the lines of defense shall be drained and ventilated to the exterior. Wet applied
seals for the purpose of preventing the ingress of water shall not be accepted with the
exception of the structural seals or wet seals used for sealing the work against adjacent
interfacing systems.
d)
The Detailed Design and construction of the work shall be such that all rigid or fastened
joints shall remain rigid and accommodate all specified thermal, building structure or other
movements and any applicable loads without compromising its watertightness. All
movement joints shall also be finally designed and constructed to accommodate such loads
or movements without compromising the glazing's watertightness.
5.
Provide for control of the flow of water or moisture occurring within the curtain wall. Direct water
to the outside so that no water remains internally.
6.
Capillarity: Prevent water migration caused by capillarity in areas designed to remain dry.
7.
Energy Performance: Curtain wall system shall have certified and labeled energy performance
ratings in accordance with National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC).
a)
Thermal Transmittance:
1.
8.
9.
Provide maximum thermal transmittance (U-factor) as follows:

a)
Area weighted average for double glazed vision areas and frames: 1.8W/ mK.
b)
Across the whole wall construction: 0.25W/ mK.
c)
Figures to be taken at 24km/ h exterior wind velocity and winter condition

temperatures when tested in accordance with NFRC 100.
2.
Thermal movements shall not result in unacceptable levels of audible noise.
3.
Thermal Transmittance: When assessed using an accepted method of computer

simulation, including lateral heat flow through the assembly, the average value for the
assembly shall not exceed the specified value, and remain free of surface
condensation on the internal face of the work.
b)
Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (g value): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have a solar
heat gain coefficient of no greater than 0.27, as determined according to NFRC 200.
c)
Visible Light Transmittance: 50%, minimum.
Air Permeability/ Infiltration:

a)
Minimize airflow from the outside to the inside of the building through joints and junctions to
control concentrated airflow.
b)
Provide curtain wall system with permanent resistance to air leakage through system of not
more than 0.3L/ s per m of fixed wall area when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283 at
a static-air-pressure difference of 300 Pa.
c)
Air-tightness shall be =5m3/ hr/ m2 at test pressure of 50Pa.
d)
Air leakage shall be distributed and not concentrated at one location.
e)
Gaskets and seals used to achieve the required airtightness shall be selected to
accommodate fully the range of dimensional tolerances and movements associated with the
design, fabrication and installation of the work. They shall be formed from materials capable
of maintaining their elastic qualities and dimensions and shall be resistant to physical and
chemical attack, sufficient to maintain the full acoustic performance of the work.
f)
The gaskets shall accommodate the maximum movements applicable.
Condensation Resistance: No condensation on interior surfaces under design conditions as

determined in accordance with NFRC 500.
a)
Condensation is permitted in non-visible drainage and ventilation rebates provided it does

not have a detrimental effect on performance or durability.
10. Relative Humidity Conditions:

a)
Interior: 20-24C with maximum 70% ambient relative humidity.
b)
Exterior: Use criteria and values for location of Site complying with applicable codes and
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
11. Design curtain wall assemblies in accordance with life cycle performance requirements.
F.
Durability

29/07/2013
084413 / 8
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
1.
General:
a)
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.4
The assemblies shall maintain their original appearance and performance throughout the
service life when maintained in accordance with an accepted maintenance program.

a)
The work shall resist abrasion from accepted cleaning methods and maintenance systems
without noticeable change in surface appearance. Generally, surfaces shall be sufficiently
hard, including glass coatings, to resist reasonable impacts from hand-held objects.
b)
Record and quantify the extent of damage determined through testing. Submit samples to
the Engineer for examination.
Demountability:
a)
maintenance and/ or replacement of glazed units in the event of breakage.
b)
The removal of glazed units shall not affect the performance or safety of adjacent or any
other part of the works. Provide a method statement for removal and replacement of glass
panels for acceptance by the Engineer.
Cables within Box Sections:

a)
As specified, aluminum box sections shall be capable of containing electrical cables serving
security/ access equipment to doors, activators to opening vents, others, as indicated on the
Design Drawings.
b)
Openings for the installation of cables shall be provided by the Contractor, after discussion
and agreement with the Engineer.
Opening Lights:
a)
Unless specified otherwise, opening lights shall comply Section 08800 Glazing and with all
the performance criteria specified herein.
b)
Opening lights shall not disengage from the fastened areas of the work when open or
closed under any of the specified loads.
c)
When fastened in the closed position the opening lights shall not be capable of removal
from the fastened areas of the work except by deliberate action from the interior of the
building or from actuation by the BMS system (smoke pressure equalization vents).
d)
Hinge mechanisms for opening lights shall be such that electrical continuity is maintained
for all opening lights and any limitations in this respect shall be stated in the Tender.
6.
Security: Materials and installation shall comply with the requirements of the local police
authority.
7.
Faade Floor Air Leakage: The joint between the faade cladding and the structural slab at each
floor level shall be sealed to meet the MEP Engineer's requirements.
MATERIALS
A.
Asbestos Content: Provide materials containing no asbestos.
B.
Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.
1.
Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
2.
Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
3.
Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429.
4.
Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/ B 308M.
5.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/ A5.10M.
6.
7.
installation.
C.
Stainless Steel Sheet for Cladding over Aluminum: To ASTM A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 316,
stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.
D.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/ A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for
exposed applications.
E.
Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/ A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale,
pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
F.
Steel: ASTM A 36/ A 36M plate, shapes, and bars; or ASTM A 1008/ A 1008M sheet.
G.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/ A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum
A60 (ZF180) metallic coating.
H.
Stainless Steel
1.
Unless otherwise specified, use austenitic, non magnetic, grade 1.4401 (316) to ASTM A 240/ A
240M.

29/07/2013
084413 / 9
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
I.
2.
3.
Stainless-Steel Sheets: ASTM A 240M, Type 316; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness; No. 4 or
6 finish.
Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer complying with

SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select
surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces
according to applicable SSPC standard.
1.
Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/ A 36M.
2.
Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/ A 1008M.
3.
Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/ A 1011M.
J.
Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded or formed aluminum framing members of

thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
K.
Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining,

nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
L.
Glazing: Refer to Section 088000 Glazing.
M.
Fasteners: Refer to Section 050523 Metal Fastenings.

1.
Fasteners shall comply with all statutory requirements, to the acceptance of the applicable
municipality and the Structural Engineer, both as to strength and type and shall be designed to
carry all dead, live and wind loading under due consideration of any applicable thermal
movements.
2.
All aluminum fastening brackets and cleats shall be manufactured from the appropriate grade of
3.
All non-visible supporting aluminum sub-constructions shall be corrosion protected. Mill finished
bitumen paint or similar acceptable method. Austenitic stainless steel to ASTM A 240/ A 240M
may be used in lieu of aluminum for any supporting sub-constructions.
4.
All screw fastenings and attachments shall be secured against vibrating loose.
5.
Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
6.
Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, finished to match framing system.
N.
Flashings: Provide manufacturer's standard flashing system or as indicated on the Design Drawings.
O.
Sealants
P.
1.
General: Provide sealants for use inside of the weatherproofing system that have a VOC content
of 250g/ L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.
Between System and Adjacent Building Components: In accordance with ASTM C 719,
compatible with other system components.
3.
Structural Silicone Glazing Sealant: In accordance with ASTM C 1184, compatible with system
components, 138 kPa minimum tensile or shear stress.
4.
Framing Sealants: Provide manufacturer's standard sealants.
5.
Refer also to Section 079200 Joint Sealants.
Gaskets
1.
Gaskets shall be made of either Ethylene Propylene material (EPDM/ EP) or of Silicone.
2.
All visible room side glazing gaskets shall have factory-formed corners. All other gaskets shall
have overlapping joints with appropriate sealant in between. It is a condition that the internal
sealant of the entire envelope system has a continuous vapor and air seal. This also includes all
interfacing connections.
3.
The gasket system shall comprise both extruded and molded elements. These shall perform and
appear as a single element.
4.
a)
Comply with the requirements of Section 088000 Glazing.
b)
c)
d)
Ensure that they do not permanently distort over the working life of the work.
5.
Provide written confirmation from the gasket manufacturer that the gasket material and designs
are wholly suitable for their specific use in any part of the work and are compatible with all other
materials and sealants used within the installation and at interfaces with other materials/
components.
6.
The color of all gaskets shall be black unless specified otherwise.

29/07/2013
084413 / 10
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
Q.
7.
8.
Gasket corners in frames shall be preformed and factory vulcanized in ladders.
9.
performance.
Spandrel Unit Insulation

1.
Unfaced, Mineral-Wool Board Insulation: In accordance with ASTM C 612; with maximum
flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 15 and zero, respectively, per ASTM E 84;
passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
2.
Foil-Faced, Mineral-Wool Board Insulation: In accordance with ASTM C 612; faced on one side
with foil-scrim or foil-scrim-polyethylene vapor retarder; with maximum flame-spread and
smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 5, respectively, per ASTM E 84.
3.
Unfaced, Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: In accordance with ASTM C 665, consisting of fibers;
with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per
ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
4.
Reinforced-Foil-Faced, Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: In accordance with ASTM C 665, faced

with foil scrim, foil-scrim kraft, or foil-scrim polyethylene.
5.
6.
The insulation shall not bulge, sag, delaminate or detach during its installation during the life of
the work.
7.
Insulation shall have zero Ozone Depleting Potential (ODP), be CFC and HFC free and have a
Global Warming Potential (GWP) of less than five.
8.
Refer also to Section 072100 Thermal Insulation.

End of Section

29/07/2013
084413 / 11
AECOM Middle East

Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 086200 UNIT SKYLIGHTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1
1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
PRODUCT SELECTION
MATERIALS
FINISH REQUIREMENTS

29/07/2013
1
2
3
4
086200
AECOM Middle East

Unit Skylights
Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 086200 UNIT SKYLIGHTS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.

1.
2.
3.

1.
1.2
Rooflights.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating rooflights that meet or exceed

performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by inclusion in lists and by
labels, test reports, and calculations.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
Qualified Testing Agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C.
Provide mock-ups, testing and inspections in accordance with Quality Requirements.
D.
Mock-ups
1.
E.
Provide mock-ups of size required to demonstrate all materials selected and workmanship, to
Engineer's acceptance.

1.
2.
Engineer.
3.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION
A.
B.
Source of Supply
1.
Obtain units from manufacturers with at least 10 years' experience of producing similar materials.
2.
Obtain auxiliary materials from or under the direction of the principal material manufacturer to
ensure compatibility.
Type RFL-101 Glazed Aluminium Rooflight

1.
Fixed glazed rooflight including all elements, fixtures, fittings and fastenings as required to
complete the system assembly in accordance with the performance requirements.
a)
Manufacturer: Schuco or acceptable equivalent.
b)
Product Reference: Schuco's FW 50+ modular skylight system solutions or acceptable

equivalent.
c)
Framing: Extruded thermally broken aluminum framing fixed to substrate. Frame shall allow
for fixing butterfly shading.
d)
1.
2.
Color: Dark grey.
3.
Gloss Level: To be selected from the manufacturer's standard options.
Integral Curb: Metal.

1.
Height: Refer to the Design Drawings.
2.
Construction: Double wall.
3.
Insulation: Manufacturer's standard rigid or semi-rigid type.
4.
Roof Attachment: Direct to roof deck.
5.
Color: To match the curtain walling zone, subject to the approval of the Engineer.
e)
Joints: Refer to the Design Drawings.
f)
Glazing: Double glazing as indicated on the Design Drawings.

29/07/2013
086200 / 1
AECOM Middle East

Unit Skylights
Avenue - Phase 2
2.2
1.
Material: Laminated glazing, composition to be determined by the subcontractor to

meet all health and safety regulations. Refer to glass type GL-105 in section 088000
Glazing.
2.
Shape: Rectangular.
3.
Colour: Clear/ Ceramic frit.
g)
Manifestations: Safety manifestation in accordance with the relevant Health and Safety and/
or IBC as required.
h)
Fastening: As recommended by the manufacturer.
A.
General
1.
Deflections: The maximum in-plane deflection of any main framing member due to dead and live
loads shall not exceed 1/ 500 of the span or 3mm, whichever is the lesser.
2.
Inertial Loads: The work shall be capable of accommodating inertial loads arising due to the
acceleration/ deceleration of moving sections including opening lights, doors and vents of the
building or enclosure. Consult the Engineer regarding the motion requirements for such
elements.
3.
Moisture Movement: The work shall withstand movement without permanent deformation or any
a)
4.
B.
D.
Atmospheric Conditions: All work shall be fully capable of resisting the prevailing atmospheric
conditions.
Thermal Movement
1.
Provide maximum thermal transmittance (U-factor) as indicated on relevant reports and the
Design Drawings.
2.
temperatures occurring.
3.
Allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient
temperatures.
4.
C.
Due to changes in the moisture content of their components, resulting from variations in the
a)
Temperature Change (Range): ***56C.***
b)
Test Interior Ambient-Air Temperature: ***24C.***
c)
Test Performance: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress on framing,
anchors and fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested according to AAMA 501.5.
Thermal Performance Requirements

1.
Avoid cold/ warm bridging in any area of the system.
2.
Thermal Transmittance:
a)
Thermal movements shall not result in unacceptable levels of audible noise.
b)
Thermal Transmittance: When assessed using an accepted method of computer simulation,

including lateral heat flow through the assembly, the average value for the assembly shall
not exceed the specified value, and remain free of surface condensation on the internal face
of the work.
3.
Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (g value): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have a solar heat
gain coefficient of no greater than 0.27.
4.
Visible Light Transmittance: Minimum 50%.
Test Performance Criteria: Provide unit skylights capable of complying with performance requirements
indicated, based on the testing manufacturer's unit skylights that are representative of those specified.
1.
Structural Performance: Provide unit skylights, including glazing and anchorage, capable of
withstanding the effects of the following design loads:
a)
Positive Pressure or Inward Load: As per local requirements.
b)
Negative Pressure or Uplift Load: As per local requirements.
2.
Air Infiltration: Provide unit skylights with maximum air leakage through assembly of 1.5 L/ sec/
m when tested in accordance with ASTM E283 at a minimum static air pressure difference of
300Pa.
3.
Water Penetration: Provide unit skylights that do not evidence water penetration through
assembly when tested according to ASTM E331 at a zero static air pressure difference across
unit.
4.
The work shall be absolutely weatherproof and watertight, ensuring the prevention of water
leakage onto the internal face of the work.

29/07/2013
086200 / 2
AECOM Middle East

Unit Skylights
Avenue - Phase 2
E.
F.
G.
5.
The work, including flashings and junctions with adjacent parts of the building, shall be fully
weatherproof and watertight under all conditions with full allowance made for deflections and
other movements.
6.
The construction of the work shall be such that all rigid or fixed joints shall remain rigid and
accommodate all thermal, building structure or other movements and any applicable loads
without compromising their watertightness. All movement joints shall also be designed and
constructed to accommodate such loads or movements without compromising the glazing's
watertightness.
Windborne Debris Impact Resistance Performance: Provide unit skylights that pass missile impact
and cyclic pressure tests when tested according to ASTM E1886 and testing information in ASTM
E1996 or AAMA 506 as applicable.
1.
Large Missile Impact: For unit skylights located within 9100mm of grade.
2.
Small Missile Impact: For unit skylights located more than 9100mm above grade.
Condensation
1.
Condensation shall not form, either on internal or external surfaces of framing members, glazing,
solid panels, or interstitially within the construction of infill panels forming a part of the work, such
that it may lead to damage or staining.
2.
Interstitial cavities within the construction, where condensation may occur, shall be adequately
drained and ventilated to the outside, such that the formation of such condensation is not
detrimental to the performance nor causes damage or staining of the work.
Local Factors
1.
Visit the Site in order to become familiar with local requirements. Local microclimatic conditions
shall be taken into account and grades of materials assessed as suitably durable for the location
shall be selected.
2.
likely to have an adverse effect upon materials intended for the Contract. More appropriate
H.
Acoustic Performance Requirements: Refer to the Acoustic Report.
I.
Fire
J.
2.3
1.
2.
Durability: The performance criteria shall be satisfied for the full design life of the work, as stated in
MATERIALS
A.
Glazing: All glazing shall be in accordance with Section 088000 Glazing.
B.
Cold Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/ A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for
exposed applications.
C.
Hot Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1011/ A1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting,
or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
D.
Steel: ASTM A36/ A36M plate, shapes, and bars; or ASTM A1008/ A1008M sheet.
E.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/ A653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum
A60 (ZF180) metallic coating.
F.
Steel Support Framing
G.
1.
Structural shapes in accordance with ASTM A36M, hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM
A123. Size sections as closely as possible to dimensions indicated and to suit load requirements.
2.
Welding Electrodes: In accordance with AWS requirements.
Aluminum Components
1.
Aluminum Extrusions: Provide alloy and temper recommended by sliding aluminum-framed glass
door manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance and application of required finish. Comply
with AAMA/ WDMA/ CSA 101/ I.S.2/ A440.
2.
Extruded Aluminum Shapes: ASTM B221. Aluminum alloy and temper as recommended by the
manufacturer for type of use and finish.
3.
Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209. Aluminum alloy and temper as recommended by the manufacturer
for type of use and finish.
4.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10M.
5.
6.
installation.

29/07/2013
086200 / 3
AECOM Middle East

Unit Skylights
Avenue - Phase 2
H.
I.
Gaskets
J.
2.4
1.
Gaskets shall be made of either Ethylene Propylene material (EPDM/ EP) or of Silicone. The
color of all gaskets shall be black.
2.
All visible room side glazing gaskets shall have factory-formed corners. All other gaskets shall
have overlapping joints with appropriate sealant in between. It is a condition that the internal
sealant of the entire envelope system has a continuous vapor and air seal. This also includes all
interfacing connections.
3.
a)
b)
c)
d)
4.
5.
performance.
Fasteners: Refer to Section 050523 Metal Fastenings.

FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A.
B.
General
1.
2.
Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
Aluminum Finishes
1.
Mill Finish: Manufacturer's standard.
2.
Clear Anodic Finish: In accordance with AAMA 611.
3.
Color Anodic Finish: In accordance with AAMA 611.
4.
Baked Enamel or Powder Coat Finish: In accordance with AAMA 2603 except with a minimum
dry film thickness of 0.04mm. Comply with the coating manufacturer's written instructions for
cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.
5.
High Performance Organic Finish: 2-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and
containing not less than 70% PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply
coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written
instructions.
6.
High Performance Organic Finish: 3 coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and
containing not less than 70% PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare,
pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with the coating and resin
manufacturers' written instructions.
End of Section

29/07/2013
086200 / 4
AECOM Middle East

Unit Skylights
Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 087100 DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1
1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
PRODUCT SELECTION
DESIGN CRITERIA
MATERIALS
FINISHES

29/07/2013
1
2
3
4
7
7
087100
AECOM Middle East

Door Hardware
Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 087100 DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.

1.
2.
3.

1.
1.2
Mechanical door hardware for the following:

a)
Swinging doors.
b)
Sliding doors.
c)
Folding doors.
2.
Cylinders for door hardware specified in other Work Sections.
3.
Electrified door hardware.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Standards: Comply with the codes of practice and publications of the Door and Hardware Institute
(DHI) and Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA) and optionally the Door and
Hardware Federation (DHF) and the Guild of Architectural Ironmongers (GAI).
B.
Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved by the
product manufacturers and an Architectural Hardware Consultant.
C.
1.
Warehousing Facilities: In Project's vicinity.
2.
Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules.
3.
Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including Shop
Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in
assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.
Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is experienced in providing consulting

services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that
indicated for this Project and who is currently certified by DHI as follows.
1.
D.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of door hardware from a single manufacturer.
1.
E.
For door hardware, an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) who is also an Electrified
Hardware Consultant (EHC) or an Architectural Openings Consultant (AOC).
Provide electrified door hardware from the same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware,
unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications and that are listed
by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable.
Hardware Compliance Marking: All markings shall be on an area of the item that will not be visible
when installed.
1.
BHMA Certified Marking (Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association):

a)
2.
UL Marking (Underwriters Laboratories Inc.):

a)
3.
All items of hardware shall be UL marked in accordance with appropriate safety

requirements and applicable ANSI/ UL standards.
CE Marking (Conformit Europenne):

a)
F.
All items of hardware shall be BHMA Certified marked in accordance with applicable ANSI/
BHMA standard.
All items of electrified hardware shall be CE marked in accordance with the essential
requirements set out in European Directives.
Mock-ups: Provide mock-ups for each type, of size adequate to demonstrate all materials and
workmanship, and to the Engineer's acceptance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION
A.
Scheduled Door Hardware

1.
Provide door hardware for each door as scheduled in the Door Hardware Schedule and indicated
on the Design Drawings in accordance with requirements in this Work Section.
a)
Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and products
complying with BHMA designations referenced.

29/07/2013
087100 / 1
AECOM Middle East

Door Hardware
Avenue - Phase 2
b)
B.
General
1.
Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive
qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated within the Project Door Hardware Schedule.
Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:
a)
C.
D.
2.2
Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of operation,

and interface with other building control systems indicated.
References to BHMA Designations: Provide products complying with these designations

and requirements for description, quality, and function.
2.
Select products suitable for conditions of use and for weight of doors.
3.
Proprietary items, when specified, indicate design intent only. Verify and modify selections to suit
intended use or otherwise comply with the specified requirements.
Type IRN-101 Stainless Steel Ironmongery

1.
Description: Grade 316L stainless steel solid body construction with ball bearing technology.
2.
Manufacturer: Dorma Gulf or acceptable equivalent.
3.
4.
Finish: Brushed/ Satin finish.
Type IRN-102 Brass Iron Mongery

1.
Description: High quality marine grade brass.
2.
Manufacturer: Assa Abloy or acceptable equivalent.
3.
Product Reference: Abloy Prime 15, Abloy Strato 13, Abloy Consul.
4.
Finish: Brushed.
DESIGN CRITERIA
A.
General: Hardware shall be consistent in color and texture both individually and collectively.
B.
Design Life of Hardware: 30 years.
C.
Hardware to wood or metal doors, glass door, overhead coiling doors, access panels, and all other
door types, shall be generally of one internationally recognized, fully coordinated hardware set, in
continuing production of consistent design and finish, with a ready supply of extras and spares.
Hardware to fully glazed metal units shall match designs and finishes of other hardware and comply
with the Specification.
D.
Hardware shall reflect the use(s) and quality of the Project, facilitate building use and maintenance,
prevent unauthorized access or egress, allow and direct escape from the building, protect against and
inhibit spread of fire, smoke and other hazards, protect doors and surfaces and enhance desired
aesthetic effects. Advise the Engineer of any item not meeting these requirements.***
E.
Door Closing Devices
F.
1.
All closers shall be from a product series of matching closers from one manufacturer, offering a
complete range of optional functions, such as mechanical and/ or electromagnetic stand-open
and delayed closing.
2.
Unless otherwise stated, closers shall have the following features:

a)
Hydraulic control from 180.
b)
Be thermo-constant.
c)
Separate adjustable closing speed.
d)
Separate adjustable latching speed.
e)
Separate sweep and latch valve.
f)
Self-adjusting backcheck.
g)
Fully adjustable delayed closing function.
3.
Spring strength and delayed action functions shall be fully adjustable by means of an Allen key,
or acceptable equivalent, for ease of use.
4.
Overhead closers shall:

a)
Be matched to the sizes and weights of doors.
b)
Override latches and/ or door seals when fitted.
c)
Hold unlatched doors shut under normal working conditions.
Locks, Cylinders and Keys

1.
Unless otherwise specified, keyed locks shall be of the pin tumbler, cylinder type, with a
minimum of 6 pins. Double cross cut or side-pin cylinders shall be removable when the door is
open but shall not be removable when the door is closed.
2.
Where cylinders are fitted with an inside turn, this shall be with an easi-grip pattern.
3.
The lock recess to fire doors shall be lined with intumescent card.

29/07/2013
087100 / 2
AECOM Middle East

Door Hardware
Avenue - Phase 2
G.
Self-Closing Floor Spring Hinges

1.
H.
I.
Floor spring hinges shall be heavy-duty, fully adjustable, hydraulic check types. All floor springs
throughout the work shall be from a single product series of matching units, from one
manufacturer, offering a complete range of optional functions, such as mechanical stand-open
and delayed closing. Unless otherwise stated, floor springs shall have the following features:
a)
Fully reversible, non-handed and suitable for single or double action wood or metal doors,
using compatible fittings, with concealed fixing top plates to match other hardware and with
no visible manufacturer's markings.
b)
Closing speed adjustable from 2 to 30 seconds.
c)
All floor springs on fire-rated doors shall incorporate delayed closing and the door, when
opened to 90 or beyond, shall stand open for an adjustable period up to not less than 60
seconds before closing. All floor springs to non-fire rated doors shall have a mechanical
stand-open at 90 in either direction.
d)
Opening/ closing through 90 in either direction, with check control from any angle between
85 and closed.
e)
Overload protection, to prevent damage from forced closing.
f)
Special reinforced galvanized main boxes allowing vertical, longitudinal and transverse
adjustment after installation, with waterproof seal.
Door Stops and Holders

1.
Suitable stops and holders shall be provided where required to protect doors, hardware or
surfaces. They shall have robust holders matching other hardware on the door and rubber
inserts, which can be replaced easily using simple tools without removing the unit. Stainless steel
doorstops shall be provided to doors scheduled for stainless steel hardware, and aluminum
doorstops for doors scheduled for aluminum hardware.
2.
For other doors select door stop and holder types according to the following order of preference:
a)
Where appropriate, wall base mounted door stops/ holders shall be installed. If fitted to
drywall or other hollow construction, allowance for building in suitable provisions to receive
required bumpers shall be made.
b)
Where wall base mounted door stops/ holders are inappropriate, floor mounted doorstops
shall be installed with expansion shield type fastening devices.
c)
If wall and floor mounted stops are inappropriate, wall base buffer type stops shall be
installed.
d)
If wall and floor mounted and wall base type stops are inappropriate, concealed fixed
galvanized steel overhead limit stays shall be installed and the stays shall be painted to
match the doors and frames. On non-fire rated doors, limit stays shall be fitted with
stand-open facility, if required.
Emergency Exit Devices

1.
Emergency exit devices shall be suitable for the size of door leaf and with horizontal actuating
bars which operate when pushed or pulled downwards, at any point on their effective length.
They shall have door catches, which automatically hold bolts in the withdrawn position on
operation and release them when fully closed.
2.
Panic devices generally shall be of mortise types (with concealed latches or vertical bolts)
finished identically to other hardware and incorporating security anti-thrust devices.
a)
J.
2.3
In transformer rooms or the like, rim mounted enameled steel panic devices shall be
acceptable.
Flush pulls, pull handles and drawer pulls shall be from accepted, suitably sized units, from the same
range as the door hardware.
A.
The work shall retain its specified appearance and performance when maintained in accordance with
an accepted maintenance program, without
1.
Malfunction of operating components during normal usage due to defective products or

workmanship.
2.
Loss or loosening of fastenings.
3.
Corrosion resulting in a malfunction of operating components, pitting or defects due to contact

with users or natural elements in the environment.
4.
Discoloration or unacceptable changes in appearance.
B.
Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire-rated door assemblies are indicated, provide door hardware
rated for use in assemblies in accordance with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a Qualified
Testing Agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to
NFPA 252 or UL 10C, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing in accordance with UL 305.

29/07/2013
087100 / 3
AECOM Middle East

Door Hardware
Avenue - Phase 2
D.
Fire Exit Devices: Devices in accordance with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire and panic protection, based on
testing in accordance with UL 305 and NFPA 252.
E.
Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke- and draft-control door assemblies are
required, provide door hardware that meet requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784
and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.
1.
Air Leakage Rate: Maximum air leakage of 3m/ min/ m at the tested pressure differential of
75Pa of water.
F.
Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
G.
Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 67N to release the latch. Locks do not
require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.
H.
Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with ICC/
ANSI A117.1 and Dubai Civil Defence requirements.
I.
J.
1.
Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and
that operate with a force of not more than 22.2N.
2.
Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements:

a)
Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 22.2N applied perpendicular to door.
b)
Sliding or Folding Doors: 22.2N applied parallel to door at latch.
c)
Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction.
3.
Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than
13mm high and 19mm high for exterior sliding doors.
4.
Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 70, the door shall take at
least 3 seconds to move to a point 75mm from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the
door.
Hinges
1.
Exterior hinges shall be stainless steel with stainless steel pin.
2.
Hinges for fire-rated assemblies shall be stainless steel with stainless steel pin.
Auxiliary Door Hooks

1.
Hat, coat and garment hooks shall be acceptable to the Engineer, with at least 2 fastening points.
In areas vulnerable to abuse, use heavy duty hooks capable of withstanding not less than 100N
applied load without deformation.
a)
2.4
For precise locations refer to the Design Drawings.
MATERIALS
A.
Hinges: In accordance with BHMA A156.1.

1.
Provide template-produced hinges for hinges installed on hollow metal doors and hollow metal
frames.
B.
Self-Closing Hinges and Pivots: In accordance with BHMA A156.17.
C.
Center-Hung and Offset Pivots: In accordance with BHMA A156.4.
D.
Continuous Hinges: In accordance with BHMA A156.26.
E.
1.
Continuous Hinges: Provide minimum 3.0mm thick, hinge leaves with minimum overall width of
102mm; fabricated to full height of door and frame and to template screw locations; with
components finished after milling and drilling are complete.
2.
Pin-and-Barrel-Type Hinges: Provide stainless steel for interior or exterior hinges and for
fire-rated assemblies provide stainless steel with steel fir pins to hold fire-rated doors in place if
required by tested listing.
3.
Continuous, Gear-Type Hinges: Extruded aluminum, pinless, geared hinge leaves joined by a
continuous extruded aluminum channel cap; with concealed, self-lubricating thrust bearings.
Mechanical Locks and Latches

1.
Lock Functions: As indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule.
2.
Lock Throw: In accordance with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire
doors, and as follows:
a)
Bored Locks: Minimum 13mm latchbolt throw.
b)
Mortise Locks: Minimum 19mm latchbolt throw.
c)
Deadbolts: As required. Minimum 25mm.
3.
Lock Backset: 70mm, unless otherwise indicated.
4.
Lock Trim:
a)
Description: As indicated on the Design Drawings.

29/07/2013
087100 / 4
AECOM Middle East

Door Hardware
Avenue - Phase 2
5.
b)
Levers: Cast.
c)
Knobs: Wrought.
d)
Escutcheons (Roses): Wrought.
e)
Dummy Trim: Match lever lock trim and escutcheons.
f)
Operating Device: Lever or Knob with escutcheons (roses).
Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt in accordance with
requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended to
protect frame; finished to match lock or latch.
a)
Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with 3-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by the
manufacturer.
b)
Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim.
c)
Aluminum Frame Strike Box: Manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum
framing.
d)
Rabbet Front and Strike: Provide on locksets for rabbeted meeting stiles.
6.
Bored Locks: In accordance with BHMA A156.2; Grade 1; Series 4000.
7.
Mortise Locks: In accordance with BHMA A156.13; Operational Grade 1; stamped steel case
with steel or brass parts; Series 1000.
8.
Interconnected Locks: In accordance with BHMA A156.12; Grade 1; Series 5000.
9.
Roller Latches: BHMA A156.16; Grade 1; rolling plunger that engages socket or catch, with
adjustable roller projection.
10. Push-Pull Latches: Mortise, In accordance with BHMA A156.13; Grade 1; with paddle handles
that retract latchbolt; capable of being mounted vertically or horizontally.
F.
Auxiliary Locks
1.
Bored Auxiliary Locks: In accordance with BHMA A156.5: Grade 1; with strike that suits frame.
2.
Mortise Auxiliary Locks: In accordance with BHMA A156.5: Grade 1; with strike that suits frame.
3.
Narrow Stile Auxiliary Locks: In accordance with BHMA A156.5: Grade 1; with strike that suits
frame.
G.
Electric Strikes: In accordance with BHMA A156.31; Grade 1; with faceplate to suit lock and frame.
H.
Electromagnetic Locks: In accordance with BHMA A156.23; electrically powered; with electromagnet
attached to frame and armature plate attached to door; full-exterior or full-interior type, as required by
application indicated.
1.
Delayed Egress Electromagnetic Locks: In accordance with BHMA A156.24, electrically

powered, with electromagnet attached to frame and armature plate attached to door; depressing
push bar for more than 3 seconds initiates irreversible alarm and 15-second delay for egress.
When integrated with fire alarm, fire alarm voids 15-second delay.
I.
Electromechanical Locks: In accordance with BHMA A156.25; Grade 1; motor or solenoid driven;
mortise deadbolt; with strike that suits frame.
J.
Self-Contained Electronic Locks: In accordance with BHMA A156.25, mortise; with internal,
battery-powered, self-contained electronic locks; consisting of complete lockset, motor-driven lock
mechanism, and actuating device; enclosed in zinc-dichromate-plated, wrought steel case, and strike
that suits frame. Provide key override, low-battery detection and warning, LED status indicators and
ability to program at the lock.
K.
Exit Locks and Alarms: In accordance with BHMA A156.29, Grade 1.
L.
Surface Bolts: In accordance with BHMA A156.16.
M.
Manual Flush Bolts: In accordance with BHMA A156.16; minimum 19mm throw; designed for
mortising into door edge.
N.
Automatic and Self-Latching Flush Bolts: In accordance with BHMA A156.16; minimum 19mm throw;
designed for mortising into door edge.
O.
Exit Devices and Auxiliary Items: In accordance with BHMA A156.3.
P.
Lock Cylinders
1.
Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver. Provide same
manufacturer as for locking devices.
2.
Standard Lock Cylinders: In accordance with BHMA A156.5; Grade 1; permanent cores that are
interchangeable; face finished to match lockset.
3.
High Security Lock Cylinders: In accordance with BHMA A156.30; Grade 1; mechanical E,
electrical; permanent cores that are removable; face finished to match lockset.
4.
Construction Master Keys: Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding of construction
keys without cylinder removal. Provide 10 construction master keys.
5.
Construction Cores, Temporary: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent
cores. Provide 10 construction master keys.

29/07/2013
087100 / 5
AECOM Middle East

Door Hardware
Avenue - Phase 2
Q.
Keying
1.
2.
Keying System: Factory registered, in accordance with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, Appendix
A.
a)
Master Key System: Change keys and a master key operate cylinders.
b)
Keyed Alike: Key all cylinders to same change key.
Keys: Nickel silver or Brass.

a)
Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the
following notation:
1.
b)
R.
Notation: "DO NOT DUPLICATE."
Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock, provide the following:
1.
Cylinder Change Keys: 3 No.
2.
Master Keys: 5 No.
3.
Grand Master Keys: 5 No.
4.
Great Grand Master Keys: 5 No.
Key Control System

1.
Cabinet: In accordance with BHMA A156.5; provide a metal cabinet with baked enamel finish;
containing key-holding hooks, labels, 2 sets of key tags with self-locking key holders,
key-gathering envelopes, and temporary and permanent markers; with key capacity of 150% of
the number of locks.
2.
Key Control System Software: In accordance with BHMA A156.5, Grade 1; provide a
multiple-index system for recording and reporting key-holder listings, tracking keys and lock and
key history, and printing receipts for transactions. Include instruction manual.
a)
Cross-Index System: Multiple-index system for recording key information. Include 3 receipt
forms for each key-holding hook.
S.
Operating Trim: In accordance with BHMA A156.6; stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated.
T.
Accessories for Pairs of Doors

1.
Coordinators: In accordance with BHMA A156.3; consisting of active-leaf, hold-open lever and
inactive-leaf release trigger; fabricated from steel with nylon-coated strike plates; with built-in,
adjustable safety release.
2.
Carry-Open Bars: In accordance with BHMA A156.3; prevent the inactive leaf from opening
before the active leaf; provide polished brass or bronze carry-open bars with strike plate for
inactive leaves of pairs of doors unless automatic or self-latching bolts are used.
3.
Astragals: In accordance with BHMA A156.22.
U.
Surface Closers: In accordance with BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable
sweep and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves and forged steel main arm. Comply with
the manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door,
exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to
meet Site conditions and requirements for opening force.
V.
Concealed Closers: In accordance with BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable
sweep and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves. Comply with the manufacturer's written
recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and
anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet Site conditions and
requirements for opening force.
W.
Closer Holder Release Devices: In accordance with BHMA A156.15; Grade 1; closer connected with
separate or integral releasing and fire- or smoke-detecting devices. Door shall become self-closing on
interruption of signal to release device. Automatic release is activated by smoke detection system.
X.
Wall- and Floor-Mounted Stops: In accordance with BHMA A156.16; polished cast brass, bronze, or
aluminum base metal.
Y.
Electromagnetic Door Holders: In accordance with BHMA A156.15, Grade 1; provide wall-mounted
electromagnetic single floor-mounted electromagnet single floor-mounted electromagnet double unit
with strike plate attached to swinging door; coordinated with fire detectors and interface with fire alarm
system for labeled fire-rated door assemblies.
Z.
Overhead Stops and Holders: In accordance with BHMA A156.8.
AA.
Door Gasketing: In accordance with BHMA A156.22; air leakage not to exceed 0.000774m/ m of
crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested in accordance with ASTM E283;
with resilient or flexible seal strips that are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks
maintained by the manufacturer.
BB.
Thresholds: In accordance with BHMA A156.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated.
CC. Sliding Door Hardware: In accordance with BHMA A156.14; consisting of complete sets including
rails, hangers, supports, bumpers, floor guides, and accessories indicated.
DD. Folding Door Hardware, General: In accordance with BHMA A156.14; complete sets including
overhead rails, hangers, supports, bumpers, floor guides and accessories indicated.
29/07/2013
087100 / 6
AECOM Middle East

Door Hardware
Avenue - Phase 2
EE.
2.5
Metal Protective Trim Units: In accordance with BHMA A156.6; armor plates, provide kick plates, mop
plates, stretcher plates and edge/ cap door edging fabricated from 1.3mm thick stainless steel; with
manufacturer's standard machine or self-tapping screw fasteners.
FINISHES
A.
Provide finishes in accordance with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in Door Hardware Schedule.
B.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary
protective covering before shipping.
C.
Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable
if they are within of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not
acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range
of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
2.6

A.
Fire-Rated Door Assembly Hardware: Submit evidence of testing by an approved laboratory.
B.
Provide all necessary test data to demonstrate that the hardware specified satisfies the requirements
of the following standards.
1.
Materials and Finishes: To ANSI/ BHMA A156.18.
2.
Hinges: To ANSI/ BHMA A156.1, ANSI/ BHMA A156.7, ANSI/ BHMA A156.17 and ANSI/ BHMA
A156.26.
3.
Locks/ Latches: To ANSI/ BHMA A156.2, ANSI/ BHMA A156.5, ANSI/ BHMA A156.12 and ANSI/
BHMA A156.13.
4.
Door Controls/ Closers: To ANSI/ BHMA A156.4, ANSI/ BHMA A156.8 and ANSI/ BHMA
A156.15.
5.
Electrically Powered Hardware: To ANSI/ BHMA A156.23, ANSI/ BHMA A156.24, ANSI/ BHMA
A156.25 and ANSI/ BHMA A156.31.
6.
Exit Hardware: To ANSI/ BHMA A156.3 and ANSI/ BHMA A156.29.
7.
Architectural Door Trim: To ANSI/ BHMA A156.6.
8.
Thresholds: To ANSI/ BHMA A156.21.
9.
Auxiliary Hardware: To ANSI/ BHMA A156.16.
10. Gasketing and Seals: To ANSI/ BHMA A156.22.

11. Cabinet Hardware: To ANSI/ BHMA A156.9.
12. All other testing requirements of the Work Sections of those openings/ frames to which the
hardware shall be attached.
C.
The provision of test data does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities with respect to
guarantees provided for the hardware.
End of Section

29/07/2013
087100 / 7
AECOM Middle East

Door Hardware
Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 088000 GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1
1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
PRODUCT SELECTION
DESIGN CRITERIA
MATERIALS
FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS
FINISHING

29/07/2013
1
2
3
5
6
8
088000
AECOM Middle East

Glazing
Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 088000 GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2

1.
2.
3.
Work Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in
other Work Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Work Section.
1.
Windows.
2.
Doors.
3.
Glazed curtain walls.
4.
Storefront framing.
5.
Glazed entrances.
6.
Skylights.
Design Drawings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating-Glass Units with Sputter-Coated, Low-E Coatings

1.
A qualified insulating-glass manufacturer who is approved and certified by coated-glass

manufacturer.
B.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are
certified under the National Glass Association's NGA Certified Glass Installer Program.
C.
Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited according to
the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.
D.
Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM
C1021 to conduct the testing indicated.
E.
Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of the glass product manufacturers
and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these
publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Work Section or in referenced standards.
1.
GANA Publications: GANA's "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and GANA's "Glazing
Manual".
2.
AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing" and AAMA TIR-A7,
"Sloped Glazing Guidelines".
3.
IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB-3001, "Guidelines for Sloped Glazing."
4.
IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for
Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use".
F.
Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with
certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to the authorities having
jurisdiction or the manufacturer's standard safety labeling. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name,
type of glass, thickness and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.
G.
Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire-protection-rated glazing with

certification label of a testing agency acceptable to the authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall
indicate manufacturer's name, test standard, whether glazing is for use in fire doors or other openings,
whether or not glazing passes hose-stream test, whether or not glazing has a temperature rise rating
of 250C and the fire-resistance rating in minutes.
H.
Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least 1

component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.
I.
Mock-ups
1.
Provide materials for mock-ups for each type, in other related sections.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION
A.
Source of Supply
1.
Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type.

29/07/2013
088000 / 1
AECOM Middle East

Glazing
Avenue - Phase 2
2.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Glass Products, General

1.
Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses
as needed in accordance with ASTM C1036.
2.
Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float
glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed in accordance with the performance
requirements. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-treated float
glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed in accordance with the performance
requirements. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass.
Monolithic Glass Types

1.
Type GL-101: Screen/ silk printed glass with bespoke pattern.
2.
Type GL-107 Extra clear low iron glass.
Laminated Glass Types

1.
Type GL-102: Laminated glass with decorative interlayers.
2.
Type GL-105 Laminated Glass with Clear Interlayer
Spadrel Glass Types

1.
F.
G.
1.
Type GL-104: Insulating Glass.
2.
Type GL-106 Insulating Glazing Unit for Roof
Plastic Glass Types

Type GL-108 Plastic Glass
Applied Finishes to Glazing

1.
2.2
Type GL-103 Spandrel glass with ceramic frit.
Insulating-Glass Types
1.
H.
Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and
installation method.
Ceramic Frit:
a)
Description: Ceramic frit applied to glazing panels, with graphic designs configured as
indicated on the Design Drawings.
b)
Color shall be as selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer's standard range.
c)
Frit shall provide opacity, as determined by the Engineer.
d)
Frit shall be applied to faces 1 and 3, to locations as indicated on the Design Drawings.
DESIGN CRITERIA
A.
Glazing panels as described shall be integral to the glazed systems described in other Work Sections
and as indicated on the Design Drawings to provide a consistent design irrespective of material.
B.
Select all glazing materials and systems to comply with the performance requirements.
C.
Certain glazing panels shall be used for both vertical and inclined conditions. Make any modifications
necessary for use in all intended conditions, whilst maintaining the visual requirements. Laminated
glass shall be used for single glazed units and the inner/ lower panel of multiple glazed units for
inclined/ overhead conditions.
D.
Where edges are exposed, including but not limited to bonded and unframed they shall be suitable for
open jointing or weather sealing jointing as described and indicated on the Design Drawings. Propose
the treatment to the visible glass edge for acceptance by the Engineer.
E.
Where applicable, include a solid black applied finish to the perimeter of the glazing to conceal the
silicone bonding and frame behind, as accepted by the Engineer through sampling.
F.
Spacer bars to double glazed units shall be black.
G.
For bolt/ point fixed structural glass assemblies laminated glass shall be used for single glazed units
and the outer and inner panes forming double glazed units. The integrity of double glazed units used
in such assemblies shall be maintained at each hole position using clear bosses, color co-ordinated
sealing rings and suitable sealants.
H.
Provide glass with a color rendering index (Ra) as specified, both for the transmittance and the
reflected spectrum and provide detailed reflected and transmitted spectrum data for the purpose of
identifying/ anticipating the possible problems with color reflection. Demonstrate this by provision of
full size samples of each glass type, which shall be viewed under representative lighting conditions
and accepted prior to the material manufacture.
I.
Ensure that glass does not contain impurities, which would detract in any way from the performance of
the glazing system.
J.
All glass shall be free from bubbles, smoke vanes, air holes, scratches or any other visible defects
unless described as acceptable elsewhere in the Specification.
K.
Mirror glass is not acceptable unless described as acceptable elsewhere in the Specification.
L.
The work shall be designed to ensure that the glazing does not crack or distort or is damaged in any
way through differences of temperature on the surfaces of the glazing.

29/07/2013
088000 / 2
AECOM Middle East

Glazing
Avenue - Phase 2
M.
Laminated Glass
1.
The Design Drawings shall show the visual requirements of the Engineer. Final selection of glass
type and thickness of each layer, together with type, opacity, density and location of interlayer
and coatings shall be accepted by the Engineer prior to ordering materials.
2.
All glass shall meet the color and quality standards set by the Control Samples.
N.
Glazing units shall accommodate integrated blinds, where required as part of the system description.
O.
References to applied coatings (such as but not necessarily limited to low emissivity {low E}, high
performance, acoustic) shall not affect the appearance/ hue of the glass, outside that accepted by the
Engineer through sampling.
P.
Where indicated on the Design Drawings, applied finishes, as described, shall be undertaken to the
glazing panels.
Q.
Safety manifestation shall be included for all safety glass types used on Site in accordance with
***IBC Chapter 24/ Section 11.17 of the SBC 201 Architectural document***.
2.3
A.
General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact
loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following:
defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight
and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.
B.
Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as
indicated in the manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below.
C.
1.
For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites of nominal thickness indicated.
2.
For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated.
3.
For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of nominal thickness indicated for overall
unit and for each lite.
4.
U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2
computer program, expressed as W/ mx K.
5.
Solar Heat Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, according to
NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program.
6.
Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes
acting on glass framing members and glazing components.
1.
Temperature Change: 67C, ambient; 100C, material surfaces.
D.
Safety Glass: Provide safety glass in accordance with ***IBC Chapter 24/ Section 11.17 of the SBC
201 Architectural document*** and tested in accordance with ANSI Z97.1 and the Consumer Product
Safety Commission's CPSC 16 CFR 1201 document.
E.
Individual Monolithic Glass Types

1.
2.
F.
Type GL-101
a)
Description: Screen/ silk printed glass with bespoke pattern.
b)
Manufacturer: Gulf Glass Industries or acceptable equivalent.
Type GL-107
a)
Description: Extra clear, low iron, low reflective float glass.
b)
Thickness: 8mm.
Individual Laminated Glass Types

1.
2.
Type GL-102
a)
Description: Various laminated glass with decorative artistic interlayers.
b)
c)
Glazing Criteria
1.
Interlayer: Polyflush glass interlayer.
2.
UV Fading Protection: 99.9%.
3.
IR Protection: 40%.
4.
Visible Natural Daylight in Bright Side: 0%.
5.
Visible Natural Daylight in Dark Side: 50%.
6.
SHGC: 0.6.
Type GL-105 Laminated Glass with Clear Interlayer

a)
Description: Laminated safety glass for balustrades.
b)
c)
Thickness: 8mm.

29/07/2013
088000 / 3
AECOM Middle East

Glazing
Avenue - Phase 2
d)
G.
1.
H.
Type GL-103
a)
Description: Spandrel glass with full ceramic.
b)
c)
Colour: To be determined by the Engineer. Include all RAL colour.
d)
Back Panel: Aluminium sandwich type. Provide insulation where required.
Insulating Glass Types

1.
Type GL-104
a)
Description: Clear insulating glass, in accordance with the required glazing criteria.
b)
c)
Composition:
d)
e)
2.
I.
Interlayer: Clear PVB.
Spandrel Glass Types
1.
Inner Pane: 8mm clear float glass.
2.
Outer Pane: 8mm PPG Solarban 72 fully tempered clear glass.
3.
Space: 16mm.
Glazing Criteria
1.
Light Transmission Factor: Not less than 69%.
2.
Interior Light Reflectance: Not greater than 13%.
3.
Exterior Light Reflectance: Not greater than 13%.
4.
Direct Energy Transmission: 27%.
5.
Energy Reflection: 53%.
6.
Solar Factor/ Total Energy Transmission: 0.30.
7.
Reflective Heat Gain: Less than 224W/ m.
8.
U-Value: Manufacturer: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
Acoustic treatment shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Acoustic Report.
Type GL-106 Insulating Glazing Unit for Roof

a)
Description: Insulating safety glazing unit for roof.
b)
Manufacturer: Manufacturer: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
c)
Composition:
1.
Outer Pane: 8mm extra clear float glass.
2.
Air Space: 16mm.
3.
Inner Pane: Laminated glass.

a)
6mm thick clear glass with 80% white ceramic frit.
b)
1.52mm clear PVB interlayer.
c)
6mm thick clear float glass.
Plastic Glass Types

1.
Type GL-108
a)
Description: Acrylic plastic sheet for architectural glazing.
b)
Manufacturer: Altuglas International or acceptable equivalent.
2.
Product Reference: Plexiglas-G or acceptable equivalent.
3.
Thickness: 25mm.
J.
Confirm the total solar transmission (G-value) for each glass type specified for review by the Engineer.
Glass manufacturers and types shall be acceptable to the Engineer only if they meet the performance
and visual requirements defined by the Specification.
K.
Damage such as shark teeth, serration hackle, sharp flare, flake chips, rough chips, feathered edges,
shells or other imperfections shall not be acceptable if detrimental to the visual and performance
criteria of the glass.
L.
Distortion shall be kept to an absolute minimum with no local defects (such as tong marks) producing
irregular reflections being allowed. All glass shall be manufactured and processed in accordance with
quality control procedures to ISO 9000 which are independently maintained.
M.
Stresses in Glazing: Ensure that no glass or glazing combination develops stresses that may lead to
damage of glass, glazing materials, components and/ or framing systems.
N.
Where combinations of glass types are used in a unit, the least stringent criteria for viewing shall be
used in accordance with the relevant standards.

29/07/2013
088000 / 4
AECOM Middle East

Glazing
Avenue - Phase 2
O.
Fire resisting glass shall provide the fire ratings specified, tested according to NFPA 252 for door
assemblies and NFPA 257 for window assemblies.
P.
Toughened/ Tempered Glass: The use of toughened/ tempered glass shall be justified by risk
assessment and/ or calculations, with the general aim of minimizing its use.
Q.
Structural Toggle Glazing
2.4
1.
Be responsible for the structural Toggle glazing based upon the Design Drawings and the
2.
Be responsible for the final selection of materials, testing, fabrication, transportation and
installation of the structural silicone glazing, all in accordance with ISO 11600 and/ or other
standards specified and detailed in the Specification and submit samples for review by the
Engineer prior to manufacture.
3.
The structural Toggle glazing shall be carried out in such a manner that will not compromise the
integrity of the double glazed units' edge seals and the specified warranties.
4.
Structural Toggle glazing application shall only be carried out in an appropriate working
environment. The environment shall be strictly controlled in accordance with the manufacturer's
written instructions to maintain temperature, humidity, dust and dirt free conditions in the working
environment.
MATERIALS
A.
Glass to be in accordance with the following.

1.
Float Glass: ASTM C1036.
2.
Toughened/ tempered Glass: BS EN 12150 and BS EN 14179: Part 1 for heat soak tested
toughened glass.
3.
Ultraclear Float Glass: ASTM C1036, complying with other requirements specified and with
visible light transmission not less than 91%.
4.
Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise
indicated; of kind and condition indicated.
a)
Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to

bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.
b)
For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A.
c)
For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other coated glass).
5.
Pyrolytic Coated, Self-Cleaning, Low Maintenance Glass: Clear float glass with a coating on first
surface having both photocatalytic and hydrophilic properties that act to loosen dirt and to cause
water to sheet evenly over the glass instead of beading.
6.
Uncoated Tinted Float Glass: Class 2, complying with other requirements specified.
7.
Polished Wired Glass: ASTM C1036, Type II, Class 1 (clear), Form 1, Quality-Q6, complying with
ANSI Z97.1, Class C.
8.
Film Faced Polished Wired Glass: ASTM C1036, Type II, Class 1 (clear), Form 1, Quality-Q6 and
complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials.
9.
Patterned Glass: ASTM C1036, Type II, Class 1 (clear), Form 3; Quality-Q6.
10. Tempered Patterned Glass: ASTM C1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Type II, Class 1 (clear),
Form 3; Quality-Q6.
11. Patterned Wired Glass: ASTM C1036, Type II, Class 1 (clear), Form 2, Quality-Q6.
12. Ceramic Coated Vision Glass: Heat-treated float glass, Condition C; with ceramic enamel applied
by silk-screened process; complying with Specification No. 95-1-31 in GANA's Tempering
Division's "Engineering Standards Manual" and with other requirements specified.
13. Reflective Coated Vision Glass: ASTM C1376, coated by either pyrolytic process or vacuum
deposition (sputter-coating) process, and complying with other requirements specified.
14. Ceramic Coated Spandrel Glass: ASTM C1048, Condition B, Type I, Quality-Q3, and complying
with other requirements specified.
15. Silicone Coated Spandrel Glass: ASTM C1048, Condition C, Type I, Quality-Q3, and complying
with other requirements specified.
16. Reflective Coated Spandrel Glass: ASTM C1376, Kind CS; coated by pyrolytic process/ vacuum
deposition (sputter-coating) process, and complying with other requirements specified.
17. Laminated Glass: ASTM C1172, and complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for
Category II materials, and with other requirements specified. Use materials that have a proven
record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after
fabrication and installation.
a)
b)
Construction: Laminate glass with

polyvinyl butyral interlayer in
recommendations.
accordance
with
interlayer
manufacturer's
written
Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as required in
accordance with requirements.

29/07/2013
088000 / 5
AECOM Middle East

Glazing
Avenue - Phase 2
c)
Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated.
18. Insulating Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a
dehydrated interspace, qualified in accordance with ASTM E2190, and complying with other
requirements specified.
a)
Sealing System: Dual seal, with the manufacturer's standard primary and secondary sealing
system.
b)
Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction.
c)
Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both.
19. Fire Protection Rated Glazing, General: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, for fire protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to
NFPA 251, NFPA 252 for door assemblies and NFPA 257 for window assemblies.
20. Film Faced Ceramic Glazing: Clear, ceramic flat glass; 5mm nominal thickness; faced on one
surface with a clear glazing film; complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for
Category II materials.
B.
Glazing Gaskets
1.
2.
Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to
maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following:
a)
Neoprene in accordance with ASTM C864.
b)
EPDM in accordance with ASTM C864.
c)
Silicone in accordance with ASTM C1115.
d)
Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber in accordance with ASTM C1115.
Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned neoprene, EPDM,

silicone or thermoplastic polyolefin rubber gaskets in accordance with ASTM C509, Type II,
black; of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.
a)
3.
C.
2.
2.5
Lock Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames with
molded corner units and zipper lock strips, in accordance with ASTM C542, black.
Glazing Tapes
1.
D.
Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by inserting dense
compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means of
pressure-glazing stops on opposite side of glazing.
Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100% solids elastomeric tape;
nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as
recommended in writing by the tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and in
accordance with ASTM C1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:
a)
AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated.
b)
AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure.
c)
AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous
pressure.
Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on
both surfaces; and in accordance with AAMA 800 for the following types:
a)
AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.
b)
AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full
bead of liquid sealant.
Miscellaneous Glazing Materials

1.
General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing
standard, requirements of the manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application
indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
2.
Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by the sealant or gasket manufacturer.
3.
Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, 5.
4.
Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by the glass

manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
5.
Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side
walking). Provide hardwood where recommended by manufacturer in fire-rated assemblies.
6.
Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: In accordance with ASTM C1330, Type O (open-cell
material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum
glazing sealant performance.
7.
Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency that
listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and
fire-protection rating indicated.
FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

29/07/2013
088000 / 6
AECOM Middle East

Glazing
Avenue - Phase 2
A.
Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face
clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product
manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, in accordance with system performance
requirements.
B.
Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with
slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.
C.
Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.
D.
The method of glazing adopted shall take account of the manufacturing tolerances in the glass, thus
minimizing the effects of distortion resulting.
E.
The glass shall be clearly marked to show its intended final position and orientation.
F.
F. Where it is necessary to meet the requirements of the local Building Regulations, International
Building Code (IBC) and any other H&S requirements of the Statutory Authorities, manifestation shall
be provided in accordance with relevent document issued by local authority, IBC Chapter 24. The type
of manifestation shall be agreed with the Engineer and samples provided for acceptance.
1.
G.
H.
I.
Manifestation:
a)
Location: As indicated on the Design Drawings.
b)
Application:
1.
Factory Applied: Ceramic fritting, screen printed.
2.
Site Applied: Acid etched, vinyl adhesive backed film, etchlite or sand blasting to the
c)
Color: As defined in the particular requirements of the IBC and as selected by the Engineer
from the manufacturer's full range of options.
d)
Setting Out: Carefully set out manifestations so that upon a visual scan across panels they
have a consistent rhythm and spacing across the length of the faade.
Laminated Glass
1.
Laminated glass shall consist of a number of sheets of flat glass with polyvinylbutyral (PVB) of
not less than 0.375mm thick, or methyl metacrylate resin interleaving between each layer. The
layers can be clear, translucent or colored depending on the design intentions of the glazing. The
glass may be annealed, heat strengthened or heat soak toughened, as required to meet the
performance requirements of the Specification.
2.
Laminated glass edges shall be sealed with materials compatible with the interlayer.
Delamination of the laminated glass for any reason shall not be acceptable.
3.
The bottom supported edges of laminated glass panes shall be cut flush over the width of the
pane to provide even distribution of vertical load to the setting blocks.
Toughened/ Tempered Glass

1.
All toughened/ tempered glass shall be heat soak tested to BS EN 14179: Part 1 paying
particular attention to temperature and duration of treatment. Demonstrate that the surface
temperature of all glass was maintained at 290C 10C for 2 hours. Keep records of heat
soaking for each batch for QA/ QC inspection purposes before dispatch to Site.
2.
Exposed edge working shall be flat ground with small ground arris and have a frosted
appearance. Small shells and/ or chips, exceeding a maximum diameter of 2mm, shall be ground
out prior to toughening.
3.
Ensure that glass heat treatment requirements are satisfactory to meet wind, impact, thermal or
other loads anticipated in the work. The manufacturer of the toughened/ tempered glass shall be
made aware of its intended use in the construction. Any drilling and notching shall be carried out
with the agreement of the manufacturer of the toughened/ tempered glass and prior to the
toughening being carried out. All toughened/ tempered glass shall be tempered on a roller heath
furnace eliminating tong marks.
4.
Ensure that the toughening process does not produce iridescence, distortion, roll marks or
ripples in the glass which are unacceptable to the Engineer. Such anticipated imperfections shall
be demonstrated by the provision of full size samples prior to commencement of glass
production. The Engineer shall examine the samples provided and reasonably advise what is
acceptable and what is unacceptable. All glass produced for the Work shall comply with the
acceptable samples as a minimum standard.
5.
Prior to commencement of manufacture, advise the Engineer of the glass supplier and the
premises where fabrication and processing shall be carried out.
Double Glazed Units

1.
Unless otherwise indicated, double glazed units shall be hermetically sealed units. Double glazed
units shall utilize panes of unequal thickness, unless otherwise specified. The outer panes shall
be thicker to minimize the effects of pillowing.
2.
Spacers shall be of adequate rigidity for their purpose, be continuous, with bent corners and shall
have welded joints sealed to ensure the integrity of the seal and to provide a consistent moisture
seal around the entire perimeter of the unit. They shall accommodate the seal and contain
desiccant, allowing both to operate at maximum efficiency.

29/07/2013
088000 / 7
AECOM Middle East

Glazing
Avenue - Phase 2
J.
3.
Spacers shall separate glass panes and the units shall have a mechanically applied primary
polyisobutylene seal between glass and spacer. This shall provide a continuous vapor-proof
barrier to a minimum width of 2mm and a secondary 2-part silicone seal to the perimeter of the
units to carry wind loads.
4.
Drainage of water along edge seals shall not be permitted.
5.
All double glazed units shall be assembled in controlled temperature and humidity conditions.
Breather tubes shall be used, if necessary, during manufacture and transportation. These shall
be thereafter removed and the units sealed prior to manufacture.
6.
With regard to mechanically restrained glazing systems, the manufacturer shall confirm the
maximum compression allowable on the edge of the units.
7.
State the maximum concavity and convexity that will occur under the ambient climatic conditions
and barometer pressure differentials anticipated by the requirements of the Specification.
8.
The bottom supported edges of laminated glass panes within vertical double glazed units shall
be ground flush over the width of the pane to provide even distribution of load to the setting
blocks.
9.
Load transfer/ spacers blocks under double glazed units shall be positioned to fully support both
internal and external panes so that neither pane is cantilevered on an edge seal.
Tolerances
1.
2.
2.6
Toughened/ Tempered Glass: The glass shall conform to the following requirements in the
horizontal toughening process:
a)
Maximum Overall Bow: 0.003mm/ mm measured along the glass edge.
b)
Maximum Local Bow: The maximum deviation for flatness from peak to trough shall not
exceed 0.3mm per 300mm or 0.15mm at the edge.
c)
Rollerwave: Glass shall be sized to provide for the consistent and horizontally aligned
orientation of ripples throughout the work. The maximum deviation for flatness from peak to
trough shall not exceed 0.08mm. In any event, state in the Tender submission proposals to
control the extent of rollerwave, if any. Provide full size samples of all specified heat treated
glass to signify the range of rollerwave throughout the work, prior to commencing production
of the glass.
d)
Edge Dip: Maximum 0.25mm.
Curved Glass:
a)
The maximum variation in curved form shall be 4mm from the theoretical form.
b)
The maximum variation in adjacent glass edges when installed shall be 1mm per 1000mm.
c)
The maximum difference between curved adjacent glass edges when installed shall be
3mm.
d)
All curved glass panels shall be continuously curved from edge to edge for the full radius
with no straight returns.
e)
The maximum allowed deviation of the length and width of sheets shall be 4mm for
dimensions up to and including 2000mm and 4.5mm for dimensions over 2000mm.
f)
The maximum allowed deviation of the diagonal dimension of any sheet shall be 7mm for
dimensions over 2000mm.
g)
The maximum allowed deviation of the top and bottom edges (including but not limited to
the curved edges) measured on the face of the glass and perpendicularly to the curvature
shall be 3mm.
h)
Ensure that the double glazed units are flat (with a maximum deviation of 1/ 1000 at the
centeR of the glass pane when measured diagonally) when finally installed.
FINISHING
A.
Glass Coatings
1.
Surface Coatings: A highly uniform, low reflection and durable quality is required of any surface
modified glass. Such coatings shall be consistent in color, durable and sufficiently hard on
exposed surfaces to avoid damage.
2.
Ceramic Frit Coatings:

a)
Tolerances for positioning and sizes of prints shall comply with optical quality determined
viewing from a distance of 3000mm using daylight without direct sunlight or direct spotlight,
perpendicularly to the glass, for no more than 20 seconds.
b)
Apply smoothly and consistently over the whole, or part, of each glazed area as indicated
on the Design Drawings. Use a screen printing application method unless otherwise agreed.
c)
Fuse into the surface of the glass, thus providing a permanent layer (with the exception of
the exposed internal surface).
d)
The coatings shall have similar sheen, chromaticity and luminosity, to give non-discernible
color difference when viewed by eye and illuminated by a standard light source, and shall
color match. All ceramic fritting shall be opaque and to a color to be agreed with the
Engineer.

29/07/2013
088000 / 8
AECOM Middle East

Glazing
Avenue - Phase 2
e)
3.
B.
C.
Extent: Unless otherwise indicated, the frit pattern shall extend to the glass edges. There
shall be no clear border.
Requirements for Coatings/ Surface Modified Glass:

a)
A highly uniform, low reflection and durable quality is required of any surface modified glass.
Such coatings shall be neutral in color, durable and sufficiently hard on exposed surfaces to
avoid damage. For the purposes of the Specification, neutral shall be defined as a color
having no unacceptable hue quantified by range of samples and being capable of refracting
light without chromatic aberration when viewed from any direction.
b)
Unless otherwise agreed, all low E glass shall be produced from a single source on a single
process.
c)
All glass coatings shall be provided from a single manufacturer/ supplier unless agreed
otherwise by the Engineer.
4.
Coatings/ Treatments/ Interlayers shall not crack, disintegrate or corrode in any way under the
extremes of conditions outlined in the Specification.
5.
Advise the Engineer, prior to commencement of the glass coating, the name of the supplier and
applicator, together with the location of the premises where this work shall be carried out.
High Performance Glass Coatings

1.
Where soft coatings are used in double glazed units the glass shall be edge stripped on the
coating side to a width corresponding to the width of the spacer bar (complete with butyl strip)
such that when the panes are sealed together no discoloration to the coating by the butyl strip
occurs around the perimeter of the double glazed unit. The occurrence of a red or blue line
around the perimeter of the glass panes shall be deemed unacceptable.
2.
Where soft coatings are applied to glass panes they shall be suitably protected up until time of
installation with the double glazed unit and all handling of glass shall be carried out using
protective cotton or surgical gloves so as not to damage the surface of the coating with
fingerprints. After protection is removed from the coated glass panes the panes shall be installed
into the double glazed units and sealed within the recommended time by the coating
manufacturer, to avoid any atmospheric deformation of the surface.
Glass Body Tints

1.
Provide evidence from the glass manufacturer that the correct body tinting has been incorporated
at the appropriate stage into the materials used by the glass manufacturer when this has been
specified on the Design Drawings.
2.
Provide evidence that the correct surface modified tinting has been applied by the glass
manufacturer, where this has been specified on the Design Drawings.
End of Section

29/07/2013
088000 / 9
AECOM Middle East

Glazing
Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 089000 LOUVERS AND VENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
SUMMARY
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1
1
1
1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
PRODUCT SELECTION
MATERIALS
FINISHES

29/07/2013
1
2
3
4
089000
AECOM Middle East

Louvers And Vents
Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 089000 LOUVERS AND VENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
1.2

1.
2.
3.

1.
Fixed louvers.
2.
Adjustable louvers.
3.
Adjustable insulated louvers.
4.
Fixed, formed-metal acoustical louvers.
5.
Wall vents (brick vents).
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Contractor's Qualifications: A specialist with at least 5 years' successful experience in performing

similar work. Use applicators licensed by the product manufacturer for chemically treated material.
B.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following standards from the American
Welding Society (AWS):
1.
AWS D1.2/ D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum".
2.
AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel".
3.
AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel".
C.
SMACNA Standard: Comply with recommendations in Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors'
National Association's (SMACNA) "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for fabrication, construction
details and installation procedures.
D.
UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide motors and related components for motor-operated louvers that
are listed and labeled by UL and comply with applicable NEMA standards.
E.
Mock-ups
1.
F.
1.3

1.
2.
Engineer.
3.

A.
Delivery: Deliver assemblies and components to the Site suitably protected from damage, staining or
corrosion in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Protective coverings shall not cause
non-uniformity in finishes, impart residue affecting the adhesion of sealants, or cause defects to items
when removed. Deliver materials in the manufacturer's unopened containers or packages fully
identified with name and qualifying information.
B.
Storage: Store materials in a dry, protected location, off the ground, in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. Prevent damage or marring of finished surfaces.
C.
Handling: Handle materials using methods and equipment to avoid damage to members or finished
surfaces. Replace work that is damaged or which cannot be satisfactorily re-finished on Site to the
1.4
A.
Install assemblies and materials in the temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the
manufacturer. Do not install materials or assembly on surfaces that are wet, dirty or contaminated, or
when proper bond, seating or fastening cannot be obtained.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION

29/07/2013
089000 / 1
AECOM Middle East

Louvers And Vents
Avenue - Phase 2
A.
Source of Supply: Obtain louvers and vents from single source from a single manufacturer where
indicated to be of same type, design or factory-applied color finish.
B.
Type EWS-701 Architectural Louvers
2.2
1.
Description: Aluminium, fixed and openable louvers with blanking panels as indicated on the
Design Drawings.
2.
3.
4.
Blades: Powder coated aluminium. Configuration to be confirmed by the Engineer.
5.
Bird/ Vermin Guard: Include louvre manufacturer's standard Bird/ Vermin Guard.
6.
Louvered Doors and Frames: Wherever indicated provide louvered doors and frames.
a)
Louvered doors and frames shall be based on the same system, finish and colour.
b)
Ironmongery: Manufacturer's standard products.
7.
Sand Trap Louvers: Where intake air is required provide sand trap louvers.
8.
Joints shall align. Visually open, recessed horizontal and vertical joints between units shall be
uniform and equal to a nominal width as indicated on the Design Drawings.
A.
Seismic Performance: Louvers, including attachments to other construction, shall withstand the effects
of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ ASCE 7, unless higher loads are required by the
authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Louver Performance Ratings

1.
Provide louvers complying with requirements specified, as demonstrated by the testing

manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, except for length and width according to
AMCA 500-L (Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.).
2.
Wind Driven Rain Performance: Not less than 99% effectiveness when subjected to a rainfall rate
of 75mm/ h and a wind speed of 13m/ sec at a core area intake velocity of 2.0m/ sec, unless
otherwise specified in the MEP Specification.
C.
Strength/ Serviceability: The work shall withstand the specified loads without exceeding deflection
limits. Adjust load values when more restrictive limits are required by the material manufacturer or
when the performance of other materials or assemblies is compromised.
D.
Deflections
1.
Deflection of framing members in a direction normal to the wall face: 1/ 200 of the clear span or
20mm, whichever is the lesser. Reduce values to prevent deflections exceeding 1/ 360 of the
clear span when brittle materials are affected, and 125% of the width of associated sealant joints.
2.
Deflection of framing members in a direction parallel to the wall face: 1/ 500 of the clear span or
3mm, whichever is the lesser.
E.
Strength/ Safety: The work shall withstand the specified loads without permanent distortion to framing
members to a maximum of 1/ 1000 of the clear span, measured 1 hour after the load has been
removed.
F.
Wind Loads: Assembly including anchorage, capable of withstanding wind-load design pressures
specified in Section 084413 Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls.
G.
Durability: The work shall retain its specified appearance throughout its Design Life, without failure,
when maintained in accordance with an accepted maintenance program.
H.
Thermal Movements
1.
temperatures occurring.
2.
Allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient
temperatures.
3.
a)
Allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in
ambient temperatures.
b)
Test Interior Ambient Air Temperature: 24C.
c)
Test Performance: No buckling; sealant failure; excess stress on framing, anchors, and
fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested according to AAMA 501.5.
I.
Moisture Movement: The work shall withstand movement without permanent deformation or any
reduction in the specified performance due to changes in the moisture content of the components,
resulting from variations in the moisture content of the air.
J.
Atmospheric Conditions: All work shall be fully capable of resisting the prevailing atmospheric
conditions.
K.
Condensation

29/07/2013
089000 / 2
AECOM Middle East

Louvers And Vents
Avenue - Phase 2
L.
M.
1.
Condensation shall not form, either on internal or exterior surfaces of framing members or
interstitially within the construction of infill panels forming a part of the work, such that it may lead
to damage or staining.
2.
Interstitial cavities within the construction, where condensation may occur, shall be adequately
drained and ventilated to the outside, such that the formation of such condensation is not
detrimental to the performance nor causes damage or staining of the work.

1.
The work shall resist abrasion from accepted cleaning methods and maintenance systems
without noticeable change in surface appearance. Generally, surfaces shall be sufficiently hard,
including glass coatings, to resist reasonable impacts from hand-held objects.
2.
Record and quantify the extent of damage determined through testing. Submit samples to the
Engineer for examination.
Demountability
1.
maintenance.
2.
The removal of units shall not affect the performance or safety of any other part of this, or
adjacent, work.
N.
Acoustic Performance: Refer to the Acoustic Report.
O.
Fire Performance
2.3
1.
2.
MATERIALS
A.
Aluminum shall be in accordance with the following.

1.
Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221M, Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6.
2.
Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209M, Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming, or as
otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.
3.
Aluminum Castings: ASTM B26/ B26M, Alloy 319.
4.
5.
installation.
B.
Galvanized Steel Sheet: In accordance with ASTM A653/ A653M, Z180/ Z275 zinc coating, mill
phosphatized.
C.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: In accordance with ASTM A1008/ A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B;
suitable for exposed applications.
D.
Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: In accordance with ASTM A1011/ A1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B;
free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
E.
Steel: In accordance with ASTM A36/ A36M plate, shapes, and bars; or ASTM A1008/ A1008M sheet.
F.
Metallic Coated Steel Sheet: In accordance with ASTM A653/ A653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type
B; with minimum A60 (ZF180) metallic coating.
G.
Stainless Steel Sheet: In accordance with ASTM A240/ A240M, Type 316L.
H.
Steel Support Framing
I.
1.
Structural shapes shall be in accordance with ASTM A36M, hot-dip galvanized in accordance
with ASTM A123. Size sections as closely as possible to dimensions indicated and to suit load
requirements.
2.
Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.
Timber shall be in accordance with the following.

1.
No damaged, rotten or discolored materials shall be used.
2.
Unsound, dead and loose knots shall not be present on any visible face. Arris, splay, margin and
branched knots shall not be acceptable.
3.
Resin pockets shall not be acceptable in any event on any exposed surface. No making good
shall be allowed.
4.
Neither discolored sapwood nor exposed pith shall be acceptable.
5.
Moisture content shall be maintained at appropriate levels in relation to the wood proposed and
to suit the internal environmental conditions.
6.
Moisture content at the time of erection shall not be more than 20% internally in continuously
heated spaces.
7.
Grain: All elements shall be cut from quarter sawn wood. Crown cut shall not be acceptable.

29/07/2013
089000 / 3
AECOM Middle East

Louvers And Vents
Avenue - Phase 2
8.
J.
All wood shall be selected for its final use (of particular importance for dry structural wood).
Fasteners: Refer to Section 050523 Metal Fastenings. Use types and sizes to suit unit installation
conditions.
1.
Fastening components shall comply with all statutory requirements to the acceptance of the
Structural Engineer both as to strength and type and shall be designed to carry all dead, live and
wind loading under due consideration of any applicable thermal movements
2.
For fastening galvanized steel, use hot-dip galvanized steel or 300 series stainless steel
fasteners.
3.
For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers.
4.
All aluminum fastening brackets and cleats shall be manufactured from the appropriate grade of
5.
All non-visible supporting aluminum sub-constructions shall be corrosion protected. Mill finished
bitumen paint or similar acceptable method. Austenitic stainless steel in accordance with ASTM
A240/ A240M may be used in lieu of aluminum for any supporting sub-constructions.
6.
All screw fastenings and attachments shall be secured against vibrating loose.
K.
Postinstalled Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion anchors, made from
stainless steel components, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 4 times the loads
imposed, for concrete, or 6 times the load imposed, for masonry, as determined by testing in
accordance with ASTM E488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
L.
Gaskets
1.
M.
2.4
a)
b)
c)
d)
2.
3.
performance.
Adhesives: Adhesives shall not contain urea formaldehyde.

FINISHES
A.
B.
General
1.
2.
Refer to Section 050513 Shop Applied Coatings for Metal.
Aluminum Finishes
1.
Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
2.
As-Fabricated Finish: AA-M10 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated, unspecified).
3.
Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated;

Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating
0.018mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.
End of Section

29/07/2013
089000 / 4
AECOM Middle East

Louvers And Vents
Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 093000 TILING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1
1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
PRODUCT SELECTION
MATERIALS

29/07/2013
1
2
3
5
093000
AECOM Middle East

Tiling
Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 093000 TILING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2

1.
2.
3.

1.
Ceramic tile and related setting materials applied to floors and walls.
2.
Associated waterproof membrane for water bodies, wet areas and thin-set applications.
3.
Associated crack isolation membrane for thin-set applications.
4.
Metal edge strips.
Design Drawings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
1.
A specialist, who is a member of The Tile Association (TTA) or similar body, has at least 10
years' successful experience in performing similar work.
2.
Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain each tile product type through single source from single producer.
1.
Obtain tile of each tile type and color and finish from same production run and of consistent
quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.
2.
Where threshold types are identical to tile types except for size or finish, provide from same
source.
C.
Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each,
mortar, adhesive and grout component from single manufacturer and each aggregate from single
source or producer.
D.
Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Work
Section from a single manufacturer for each product.
E.
F.
1.
Waterproof membrane.
2.
Crack isolation membrane.
3.
Joint sealants.
4.
Metal edge strips.
5.
Tile thresholds.
Mock-ups
1.
2.
Include interface between movement joint and the work.

1.
2.
Engineer.
3.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION
A.
Type FL-901 Stone Threshold

1.
Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor
finishes.
2.
For tile thresholds, provide manufacturer's standard threshold with beveled edges.

29/07/2013
093000 / 1
AECOM Middle East

Tiling
Avenue - Phase 2
3.
2.2
a)
Finish: Honed.
b)
Level: 3mm above adjacent finish.
Refer to Section 093033 Stone Tiling for natural stone thresholds, including but not limited to
granite, marble or slate regarding material and installation requirements.
A.
ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile in accordance with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions,
and other characteristics indicated.
1.
Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements unless otherwise indicated.
B.
ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials in accordance with ANSI A108.02,
ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 and Part 3 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCA
installation methods specified in tile installation schedules and other requirements specified.
C.
Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the following
values as determined by testing identical products in accordance with ASTM C1028.
1.
Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.60.
2.
Step Treads: Minimum 0.80.
3.
Ramp Surfaces: Minimum 0.80.
D.
Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and package so
tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and
match the approved samples.
E.
Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with
manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Where tile is indicated for installation on exteriors or in wet areas, do not use back- or
edge-mounted tile assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in writing that this type of
mounting is suitable for installation indicated and has a record of successful in-service
performance.
F.
Factory-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type, protect exposed
surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating with continuous film of petroleum
paraffin wax, applied hot. Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces.
G.
Specific Movements
H.
1.
The work shall be installed to accommodate all movements of the substrates without damage or
any reduction in the performance of the work. The Contractor shall be responsible for
determining the requirement for and location of movement joints as necessary whether indicated
on the Design Drawings or not.
2.
Provide all necessary movement joints to accommodate the movements to which the tiling is
expected to be subjected, whether indicated on the Design Drawings or not.
3.
Show all control joints on the Shop Drawings, which shall be subject to acceptance by the
Engineer.
4.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that movement joint thicknesses are adequate.
5.
A method statement for the installation of all the work shall be provided, taking into account
movements of the structural slab including:
a)
Dimensional setting out and joints alignment.
b)
Floor services including trunking to be incorporated in the bedding build-up.
c)
Construction tolerances.
d)
Movement joints, bay joints and relief joints.
e)
Full adhesion.
f)
Full bed without hollows.
g)
Cracking to grouted joints shall not be acceptable.
6.
A full understanding of the behavior of the building structure, its movements and its effects upon
the work is required.
7.
Specific Dead Loads

1.
The following loadings shall be accommodated by the work without damage being caused or any
a)
I.
Dead Loads: 3kN/ m.
Specific Live Loads

1.
The work shall be capable of accommodating the following live loads without any reduction in
performance:
a)
Imposed Live Loads: 5kN/ m + 1kN/ m (where partitions are located).

29/07/2013
093000 / 2
AECOM Middle East

Tiling
Avenue - Phase 2
b)
J.
K.
1.
The work shall be capable of withstanding differential surface temperatures including those
induced under the heating and cooling cycle of the floor without any progressive or permanent
2.
The thermal coefficients of the work and the adjoining structure shall be established as the
design caters for all thermal movement including temperature range induced by underfloor
heating and cooling pipework.
Moisture Movement
1.
2.3
Point Loads: 10kN.
Thermal Movement
The work shall withstand the following movement without permanent deformation or any
a)
b)
Due to drying shrinkage of building components, both short term and long term.
MATERIALS
A.
Tile Backing Panels: Refer to Section 092116 Gypsum Board Assemblies.

1.
B.
C.
D.
General Requirements for Tile Backing Panels:

a)
Cementitious Backer Units: In accordance with ANSI A118.9 or ASTM C1325, in maximum
lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints.
b)
Fiber-Cement Underlayment: In accordance with ASTM C1288, in maximum lengths

available to minimize end-to-end butt joints.
Waterproof Membranes General: Manufacturer's standard product selected from the following, in
accordance with ANSI A118.10 and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application
indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by the manufacturer.
1.
Chlorinated Polyethylene Sheet: Non-plasticized, chlorinated polyethylene faced on both sides

with non-woven polyester fabric; 0.76mm minimum thickness.
2.
PVC Sheet: 2 No. layers of PVC sheet heat-fused together and to facings of non-woven
polyester.
3.
Polyethylene Sheet: Polyethylene faced on both sides with fleece webbing.
4.
Fabric-Reinforced, Modified-Bituminous Sheet: Self-adhering, SBS-modified-bituminous sheet

with woven reinforcement facing.
5.
Fabric-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied Membrane: System consisting of liquid-latex rubber or

elastomeric polymer and continuous fabric reinforcement.
6.
Fluid-Applied Membrane: Liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer.
7.
Latex-Portland Cement: Flexible mortar consisting of cement-based mix and latex additive.
8.
Urethane Waterproofing and Tile-Setting Adhesive: One-part, liquid-applied urethane in a

consistency suitable for trowel application and intended for use as both waterproofing and
tile-setting adhesive in a 2-step process.
Crack Isolation Membrane General: Manufacturer's standard product, selected from the following, in
accordance with ANSI A118.12 for standard performance and is recommended by the manufacturer
for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by the
manufacturer.
1.

with non-woven polyester fabric.
2.
PVC Sheet:
polyester.
3.
4.
Corrugated Polyethylene: Corrugated polyethylene with dovetail shaped corrugations and with
anchoring webbing on the underside.
5.
Fabric-Reinforced, Modified-Bituminous Sheet: Self-adhering, modified-bituminous sheet with

fabric reinforcement facing.
6.

elastomeric polymer and fabric reinforcement.
7.
8.
9.
Urethane Crack Isolation Membrane and Tile-Setting Adhesive: One-part, liquid-applied urethane
in a consistency suitable for trowel application and intended for use as both waterproofing and
2 No. layers of PVC sheet heat-fused together and to facings of non-woven
Tile Setting Materials

1.
Portland Cement Mortar (Thickset) Installation Materials: In accordance with ANSI A108.02.

29/07/2013
093000 / 3
AECOM Middle East

Tiling
Avenue - Phase 2
a)
Cleavage Membrane: Asphalt felt, in accordance with ASTM D226, Type I (No. 15); or
polyethylene sheeting, in accordance with ASTM D4397.
b)
Reinforcing Wire Fabric: Galvanized, welded wire fabric; in accordance with ASTM A185
and ASTM A82 except for minimum wire size.
c)
Expanded Metal Lath: Diamond-mesh lath in accordance with ASTM C847.
d)
2.
F.
G.
2.
Base Metal and Finish for Exterior Applications: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet.
3.
Configuration over Studs and Furring: Flat.
4.
Configuration over Solid Surfaces: Self furring.
Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard water emulsion, serving as replacement for part or
all of gauging water, of type specifically recommended by latex-additive manufacturer for
use with Site-mixed Portland cement and aggregate mortar bed.
For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for non-sagging
mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.1.
Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): In accordance with ANSI A118.4.

a)
E.
Base Metal and Finish for Interior Applications: Uncoated or zinc-coated (galvanized)
steel sheet, with uncoated steel sheet painted after fabrication into lath.
Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): In accordance with ANSI A118.1.
a)
3.
1.
4.
Medium-Bed, Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: In accordance with ANSI A118.4. Provide product
that is approved by the manufacturer for application thickness of 16mm.
5.
EGP (Exterior Glue Plywood) Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): In accordance with ANSI
A118.11.
6.
Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting Epoxy: In accordance with ANSI A118.3.
7.
Organic Adhesive: In accordance with ANSI A136.1, Type I.
Tile Grout Materials: The grouting compound shall be accepted by the tile manufacturer. Confirm
details of the proposed grout to the Engineer.
1.
Sand-Portland Cement Grout: In accordance with ANSI A108.10, composed of white or gray
cement and white or colored aggregate as required to produce color indicated.
2.
Standard Cement Grout: In accordance with ANSI A118.6.
3.
Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: In accordance with ANSI A118.7.
4.
Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: In accordance with ANSI A118.3.
5.
Grout for Pre-grouted Tile Sheets: Same product used in factory to pre-grout tile sheets.
Tile Elastomeric Sealants General: Provide sealants, primers, backer rods, and other sealant
accessories, recommended by the sealant manufacturer, in accordance with the following
requirements and with the applicable requirements in Section 079200 Joint Sealants and that do not
stain tiles. Joints shall extend through tiles and bedding to substrate. Joints shall coincide with any
movement joints left in the substrate.
1.
Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed joints
2.
One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: In accordance with ASTM C920; Type S; Grade
NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O;
formulated with fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous
substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures.
3.
Multipart, Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: In accordance with ASTM C920; Type M; Grade
P; Class 25; Uses T, M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
4.
Chemical-Resistant Sealants: For chemical-resistant floors, provide chemical-resistant

elastomeric sealant of type recommended and produced by the chemical-resistant mortar and
grout manufacturer for type of application indicated, with proven service record and compatibility
with tile and other setting materials, and with chemical resistance equivalent to mortar/ grout.
Tile Miscellaneous Materials

1.
Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, Portland cement-based

formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations
indicated.
2.
Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or
combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications;
stainless steel, ASTM A666, 300 Series exposed edge material.
3.
Temporary Protective Coating: Formulated to protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence
of mortar and grout; compatible with tile, mortar, and grout products; and easily removable after
grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile.
a)
Petroleum paraffin wax, fully refined and odorless, containing at least 0.5% oil with a melting
point of 49 to 60C in accordance with ASTM D87.

29/07/2013
093000 / 4
AECOM Middle East

Tiling
Avenue - Phase 2
b)
2.4
Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating that is specially
formulated and recommended for use as temporary protective coating for tile.
4.
Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and
grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by the tile and grout
manufacturers.
5.
Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints and that does not
change color or appearance of grout.

A.
Grout Staining: Evaluate the risk of staining, as recommended by the manufacturer. Seek advice of
specialist/ manufacturer if discoloration occurs on trial areas.
End of Section

29/07/2013
093000 / 5
AECOM Middle East

Tiling
Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 093033 STONE TILING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1
1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
PRODUCT SELECTION
MATERIALS

29/07/2013
2
2
4
10
093033
AECOM Middle East

Stone Tiling
Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 093033 STONE TILING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
1.2

1.
2.
3.

1.
Dimension stone tile and related setting materials applied to floors and walls.
2.
Stone thresholds.
3.
Associated waterproof membrane for water bodies, wet areas and thin-set applications.
4.
Associated crack isolation membrane for thin-set applications.
5.
Metal edge strips.
6.
Interior stone flooring.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Stone Tiling Supplier Qualifications: A firm experienced in supplying products similar to those
indicated for the Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
B.
Stone Facing Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate
interior stone facing similar in material, design and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work
has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance.
C.
Stone Facing Installer Qualifications: An installer who employs experienced stone setters who are
skilled in installing interior stone facing similar in material, design and extent to that indicated for this
Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance.
1.
Installer's responsibilities include fabricating and installing interior stone facing, including
anchoring system and providing professional engineering services needed to assume
engineering responsibility.
2.
Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering

analysis by a qualified professional engineer.
D.
Stone Flooring Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that custom fabricates stone.
E.
Stone Flooring Installer Qualifications: Stone fabricator.
F.
Source Limitations for Stone Flooring and Stone Facing: Obtain each variety of stone, regardless of
finish, from a single quarry, with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance
and physical properties.
G.
1.
For stone types that include same list of varieties and sources, provide same variety from same
source for each.
2.
Make quarried blocks available for examination by the Engineer for appearance characteristics.
3.
Make stone slabs available for the Engineer to examine for appearance characteristics.
a)
The Engineer shall select aesthetically acceptable slabs.
b)
Segregate slabs selected for use on Project and mark backs indicating approval.
c)
Mark and photograph aesthetically unacceptable portions of slabs as directed by the

Engineer.
Source Limitations for Stone Tile and Thresholds: Obtain each stone product type through single
source from single producer.
1.
For each stone product type, provide 1 No. stone variety.
2.
Where threshold types are identical to stone tile types except for size or finish, provide same
variety.
H.
Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each
cementitious material, admixture, mortar, adhesive and grout component from a single manufacturer
and each aggregate from single source or producer.
I.
Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Work
Section from a single manufacturer for each product.
1.
Waterproof membrane.
2.
Crack isolation membrane.
3.
Joint sealants.

29/07/2013
093033 / 1
AECOM Middle East

Stone Tiling
Avenue - Phase 2
4.
Metal edge strips.
5.
Stone accessories.
J.
Contractor's Qualifications: A specialist has at least 5 years' successful experience in performing

similar work. Waterproofing installer to be approved by the waterproofing manufacturer.
K.
Mock-ups: Interface between movement joint and the works.

1.
Build Mock-ups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic
effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
a)
2.
L.
Build Mock-up of each type of stone floor tile installation.
Dry-Laid Mock-ups: Lay out tiles in dry-laid Mock-ups to verify selections made under sample
submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and
execution.
a)
Lay out Mock-up of each type of stone floor tile installation.
b)
Maintain dry-laid Mock-ups in an undisturbed condition until equivalent areas of the

completed Work are accepted to serve as Benchmarks.

1.
Submit reports of independent tests demonstrating that the materials, products and systems
comply with the specified performance requirements.
2.
Engineer.
3.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION
A.
Varieties and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide stone products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those indicated.
B.
Type FL-201 Lime Stone Tile.
C.
D.
2.2
1.
Description: Lime stone tile flooring.
2.
3.
4.
Finish: Honed.
5.
Colour: One of the following at locations as indicated on the Design Drawings.

a)
Pure white.
b)
Light cream to brown shade.
6.
Edges: 2mm Bird Mouth on all edges.
7.
Module Size: to be confirmed by the Engineer.
8.
Nominal Tile Thickness: to be confirmed by the Engineer.
9.
Joint Width: to be confirmed by the Engineer.
Type FL-901 Stone Threshold

1.
Description: Stone threshold.
2.
Stone Type: Granite/ Marble.
3.
4.
5.
Finish: Satin/ Polished/ Honed.
6.
Edges: Eased.
7.
Nominal Threshold Level: 3mm above finished floor level.
Type FL-902 Granite Skirting

1.
Height: 200mm.
2.
Finish: Honed.
3.
Colour: Black/ Dark grey.
A.
Flatness Performance
1.
Polished Finish: Smooth surface that produces sharp, mirror-like reflections. Reflected images of
overhead fluorescent tubes have straight lines without visible distortion when viewed at arm's
length.

29/07/2013
093033 / 2
AECOM Middle East

Stone Tiling
Avenue - Phase 2
B.
C.
2.
Honed Finish: Smooth, non-reflective surface similar to that produced by grinding with a 400 to
1200 grit abrasive; with a gap not exceeding 0.13mm when faces are tested for flatness with a
600mm straightedge.
3.
Sand-Rubbed Finish: Uniform, fine-textured surface similar to that produced by grinding with a 40
grit abrasive; with a gap not exceeding 0.8mm when faces are tested for flatness with a 600mm
straightedge.
4.
Thermal Finish: Uniform, coarse-textured surface produced by thermal shock; with a gap not
exceeding 5mm when faces are tested for flatness with a 600mm straightedge.
5.
Natural-Cleft Finish: Uneven surface produced by splitting stone along a natural cleavage plane;
without visible tool marks and with a gap not exceeding 5mm when faces are tested for flatness
with a 600mm straightedge.
Static Coefficient of Friction of Stone Tile for Floors: Provide products with the following values as
determined by testing identical products in accordance with ASTM C1028.
1.
Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.60.
2.
Step Treads: Minimum 0.80.
3.
Ramp Surfaces: Minimum 0.80.
4.
Properties of stone surfaces as recommended by stone tile producers for application indicated.
Specific Movements
1.
The works shall be detailed, manufactured and installed to accommodate all movements of the
substrates without damage or any reduction in the performance of the works. The Contractor
shall be responsible for determining the requirement for and location of movement joints as
necessary whether indicated on the Design Drawings or not.
2.
Provide all necessary movement joints to accommodate the movements to which the tiling is
expected to be subjected, whether indicated on the Design Drawings or not.
3.
Show all control joints on the Shop Drawings, which shall be subject to acceptance by the
Engineer.
4.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that movement joint thicknesses are adequate.
5.
A Method Statement for the installation of all the works shall be provided, taking into account
movements of the structural slab including:
6.
D.
Dimensional setting out and joints alignment.
b)
Floor services including trunking to be incorporated in the bedding build-up.
c)
Construction tolerances.
d)
Movement joints, bay joints and relief joints.
e)
Full adhesion.
f)
Full bed without hollows.
g)
Cracking to grouted joints shall not be acceptable.
h)
A full understanding of the behavior of the building structure, its movements and its effects
upon the works is required.
The works shall not deflect under loading in any way that is detrimental to any element of the
works or adjacent structural or building elements.
Specific Loadings
1.
E.
a)
The works shall accommodate the following live loads without any reduction in performance or
appearance:
a)
All loads resulting from movements of the building structure.
b)
Loads acting on the surface arising from maintenance and cleaning operations.
c)
Impact loads, or transferred impact loads that reasonably occur during their normal service
life.
d)
Loads imposed during replacement of components.
Specific Dead Loads

1.
The following loadings shall be accommodated by the works without damage being caused or
any reduction in performance:
a)
F.
Specific Live Loads

1.
G.
Dead Loads: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
The works shall be capable of accommodating the following live loads without any reduction in
performance:
a)
Imposed Live Loads: 5kN/ m + 1kN/ m (where partitions are located).
b)
Point Loads: 10kN.
Thermal Movement

29/07/2013
093033 / 3
AECOM Middle East

Stone Tiling
Avenue - Phase 2
H.
1.
The works shall be capable of withstanding differential surface temperatures including those
induced under the heating and cooling cycle of the floor without any progressive or permanent
2.
The thermal coefficients of the works and the adjoining structure shall be established as the
design caters for all thermal movement including temperature range induced by underfloor
heating and cooling pipework.
3.
The climatic and thermal conditions, as stated in Division 01 General Requirements Section
018900 Site Construction Performance Requirements, shall be noted when finalizing the design
of the tiling. Movement joints shall be provided as necessary to cater for any thermal movement.
Moisture Movement
1.
I.
2.3
The Work shall withstand the following movement without permanent deformation or any
a)
b)
Due to drying shrinkage of building components, both short term and long term.
Stone Terminology Definitions

1.
In accordance with ASTM C119 and MIA's "Dimension Stone Design Manual VI". dimension
stone tile is defined as modular stone units less than 19mm thick.
2.
Module size is defined as actual tile size plus joint width.
MATERIALS
A.
General Requirements of Stone

1.
The stone types specified are based on the visual requirements of the Engineer. The Contractor
shall confirm the suitability of the stone types specified based on performance requirements and
testing as specified and confirm suitability for all intended purposes and applications. Should the
Contractor deem the stone types inappropriate, in terms of application, the Contractor shall
inform the Engineer in writing, and recommend suitable stone type(s) similar in appearance to
those specified by the Engineer, and provide samples for review and acceptance.
2.
Arrangements shall be made for the Engineer, and others as necessary, to inspect samples of
stone in the respective quarries which represent the range of variations in appearance. The
acceptance of the Engineer shall be obtained before confirming orders with suppliers or
proceeding with production.
3.
The stone shall be thoroughly seasoned and free from cracks, vents, fissures or other defects
that may adversely affect appearance, strength, weathering qualities or durability. Stone to be
dressed and worked prior to delivery to Site.
4.
No deleterious constituents or Pyrite shall be permitted.
5.
Stone shall be insusceptible to staining.
6.
Stone finishes shall as described and accepted by sampling.
7.
The desired colors and textures shall be established through range samples due to their
permissible variations in material characteristics. Present a selection of representative range
samples to the Engineer for viewing, sufficient in number to show the complete range of
variations in colors and textures of the proposed stone prior to commencing production.
8.
Marking of Stone:
a)
9.
B.
The following CE information shall be supplied either on the packaging or on the delivery
note:
1.
The petrographical name of the stone.
2.
The commercial name of the stone.
3.
The name and address of the supplier.
4.
The name and location of the quarry.
5.
The declared value or marking designation classes.
6.
Other information:
a)
Breaking strength.
b)
Breaking strength after freeze/ thaw testing.
c)
Abrasion.
d)
Surface chemical treatments.
Provide stone products that are free of defects impairing their function for use indicated, including
cracks, seams and starts.
Waterproof Membranes General: Manufacturer's standard product selected from the following, in
accordance with ANSI A118.10 and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application
indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by the manufacturer.
1.


29/07/2013
093033 / 4
AECOM Middle East

Stone Tiling
Avenue - Phase 2
C.
D.
2.
polyester.
3.
4.
Fabric-Reinforced, Modified-Bituminous Sheet: Self-adhering, SBS-modified-bituminous sheet

with woven reinforcement facing.
5.

elastomeric polymer and continuous fabric reinforcement.
6.
7.
8.
Urethane Waterproofing and Tile-Setting Adhesive: One-part, liquid-applied urethane in a

consistency suitable for trowel application and intended for use as both waterproofing and
Crack Isolation Membranes General: Manufacturer's standard product, selected from the following, in
accordance with ANSI A118.12 for standard performance and is recommended by the manufacturer
for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by the
manufacturer.
1.

2.
polyester.
3.
4.
Corrugated Polyethylene: Corrugated polyethylene with dovetail-shaped corrugations and with

anchoring webbing on the underside.
5.
Fabric-Reinforced, Modified-Bituminous Sheet: Self-adhering, modified-bituminous sheet with

fabric reinforcement facing.
6.

elastomeric polymer and fabric reinforcement.
7.
8.
9.
Urethane Crack Isolation Membrane and Tile-Setting Adhesive: One-part, liquid-applied urethane
in a consistency suitable for trowel application and intended for use as both waterproofing and
Stone Tile Setting Materials

1.
Portland Cement Mortar (Thickset) Installation Materials: In accordance with ANSI A108.02. The
mortar bedding shall be a proprietary standard set flexible cementitious compound suitable for
natural stone tiles. Tile mortar bedding compound shall be accepted by the tile manufacturer and
applied strictly in accordance with the mortar manufacturer's written recommendations.
a)
Cleavage Membrane: Asphalt felt, in accordance with ASTM D226, Type I (No. 15); or
polyethylene sheeting, in accordance with ASTM D4397.
b)
Reinforcing Wire Fabric: Galvanized, welded wire fabric, in accordance with ASTM A185/
A185M and ASTM A82/ A82M except for minimum wire size.
c)
Expanded Metal Lath: Diamond-mesh lath in accordance with ASTM C847.
d)
2.
Base Metal and Finish for Interior Applications: Uncoated or zinc coated (galvanized)
steel sheet, with uncoated steel sheet painted after fabrication into lath.
2.
Base Metal and Finish for Exterior Applications: Zinc coated (galvanized) steel sheet.
3.
Configuration over Studs and Furring: Flat.
4.
Configuration over Solid Surfaces: Self furring.
Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard water emulsion, serving as replacement for part or
all of gauging water, of type specifically recommended by latex additive manufacturer for
use with Site-mixed Portland cement and aggregate mortar bed.
Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): In accordance with ANSI A118.1.
a)
3.
1.
Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): In accordance with ANSI A118.4.

a)
4.
Medium-Bed, Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: In accordance with requirements in ANSI A118.4.

Provide product that is approved by the manufacturer for minimum application thickness of
16mm.
5.
EGP (Exterior Glue Plywood) Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): In accordance with ANSI
A118.11.

29/07/2013
093033 / 5
AECOM Middle East

Stone Tiling
Avenue - Phase 2
E.
F.
G.
H.
6.
Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting Epoxy: In accordance with ANSI A118.3.
7.
Organic Adhesive: The adhesive for the works a proprietary adhesive as recommended by the
product manufacturer. In accordance with ANSI A136.1, Type I.
Stone Tile Grout Materials: The grouting compound shall be accepted by the tile manufacturer.
Confirm details of the proposed grout to the Engineer.
1.
Sand Portland Cement Grout: In accordance with ANSI A108.10, composed of white or gray
cement and white or colored aggregate as required to produce color indicated.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Grout Sealer: A proprietary water-based sealer that resists water, oil and acid-based
contaminants, simplifies maintenance and does not change the appearance of the grout.
Stone Tile Elastomeric Sealants General: Provide sealants, primers, backer rods and other sealant
accessories in accordance with the following requirements and with the applicable requirements in
Section 079200 Joint Sealants and that do not stain stone. Joints shall extend through tiles and
bedding to substrate. Joints shall coincide with any movement joints left in the substrate.
1.
Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in stone tile adjoining sealed
joints unless otherwise indicated.
2.
One Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: In accordance with ASTM C920; Type S; Grade
NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O;
formulated with fungicide, intended for sealing interior stone tile joints and other nonporous
substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures.
3.
Multipart, Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: In accordance with ASTM C920; Type M; Grade
P; Class 25; Uses T, M, A, and as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
Stone Tile Miscellaneous Materials

1.
Trowelable Patching Compounds for Concrete Substrates: Latex-modified, Portland

cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for
installations indicated.
2.
Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shaped, height to match stone tile and setting bed thickness,
metallic or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring
applications; stainless steel, in accordance with ASTM A666, 300 Series exposed edge material.
3.
Protective Coating: Liquid grout release coating that is formulated to protect exposed surfaces of
stone tile against adherence of mortar and grout; compatible with stone, mortar and grout
products; easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or stone tile; and
recommended for use as temporary protective coating for stone tile.
4.
Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming stone tile and
grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by stone tile
producers and grout manufacturers.
5.
Floor Sealer: Colorless, stain- and slip-resistant sealer, not affecting color or physical properties
of stone surfaces as recommended by stone tile producers for application indicated.
6.
Preformed Strip/ Section Movement Joints: Where indicated on the Design Drawings, preformed
strip/ section movement joints shall be provided and fixed in accordance with the manufacturer's
written recommendations.
Stone Flooring Mortar Materials

1.
Portland Cement: In accordance with ASTM C150, Type I or II. For pointing mortar, provide
natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.
a)
Low Alkali Cement: Not more than 0.60% total alkali when tested according to ASTM C114.
2.
3.
Portland Cement Lime Mix: Packaged blend of Portland cement in accordance with ASTM C150,
Type I or III, and hydrated lime in accordance with ASTM C207, Type S.
4.
Colored Portland Cement Lime Mix: Packaged blend of Portland cement in accordance with
ASTM C150, Type I or III; hydrated lime in accordance with ASTM C207, Type S; and mortar
pigments consisting of natural and synthetic iron oxides. Pigments contain no carbon black, have
a record of satisfactory performance in mortar and do not exceed 10% of Portland cement by
weight. Provide mix formulated to produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected from
the manufacturer's standard colors.
5.
Aggregate: In accordance with ASTM C144; except for joints narrower than 6mm and pointing
mortar, use aggregate graded with 100% passing 1.18mm sieve.
6.
a)
White Aggregates: Natural white sand or ground white stone.
b)
Colored Aggregates: Natural-colored sand or ground marble, granite or other durable stone;
of color necessary to produce required mortar color.
Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use
pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in mortar and containing no carbon black.

29/07/2013
093033 / 6
AECOM Middle East

Stone Tiling
Avenue - Phase 2
7.
Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard water emulsion, serving as replacement for part or all of
gauging water, of type specifically recommended by latex-additive manufacturer for use with
Site-mixed Portland cement mortar bed and not containing a retarder.
8.
Thin-Set Mortar:
a)
Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar: In accordance with ANSI A118.1.
b)
Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: In accordance with ANSI A118.4, consisting of the following:
1.
9.
I.
Water: Potable.
Stone Flooring Grout Materials

1.
Grout Colors: As selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer's full range.
2.
Sand-Portland Cement Grout: In accordance with ANSI A108.10.
3.
4.
5.
J.
Prepackaged Dry-Mortar Mix: Factory-prepared mixture of Portland cement; dry,

redispersible, ethylene vinyl acetate additive; and other ingredients to which only water
needs to be added at Site.
a)
Unsanded grout mixture for joints 3mm and narrower.
b)
Sanded grout mixture for joints wider than 3mm.
Polymer Modified Cement Grout: In accordance with ANSI A118.7.

a)
Polymer Type: Either ethylene vinyl acetate, in dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with
other dry ingredients, or acrylic resin or styrene butadiene rubber in liquid-latex form for
addition to prepackaged dry grout mix.
b)
Unsanded grout mix for joints 3mm and narrower.
c)
Sanded grout mix for joints wider than 3mm.
Stone Flooring Accessories

1.
Water-Cleanable Epoxy Adhesive: In accordance with ANSI A118.3.
2.
Paver Pedestals: Manufacturer's standard styrene butadiene rubber, HDPE or polyurethane

paver support assembly, including either fixed height or adjustable or stackable pedestals, shims
and spacer tabs for joint spacing of either 3mm or 5mm.
3.
Temporary Spacers: Resilient plastic, non-staining to stone, sized to suit joint thickness.
4.
Cleavage Membrane: Polyethylene sheeting, in accordance with ASTM D4397; or unperforated

asphalt felt, in accordance with ASTM D226, Type I (No. 15).
5.
Reinforcing Wire: Galvanized, welded wire; in accordance with ASTM A185 and ASTM A82
except for minimum wire size.
6.
Divider Strips and Edging: Metal or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed
specifically for flooring applications, in longest lengths available and as follows:
7.
a)
Exposed Edge Material: Stainless steel in accordance with ASTM A666, Type 302.
b)
Cross Section Profile: Angle or L-shape.
c)
Height: Equal to stone thickness plus depth of setting bed.
d)
Width: As indicated on the Design Drawings.
e)
Control Joint Filler: Neoprene.
***Abrasive Inserts for Stair Treads: Abrasive strips consisting of aluminum oxide, silicon carbide,
or a combination of both, in an epoxy resin binder, fabricated for installing in routed grooves of
stair treads to provide slip resistance. Provide epoxy resin installation adhesive compatible with
inserts.
a)
Width: Minimum 6.4mm, refer to the Design Drawings.
b)
Depth: Minimum 12.7mm, refer to the Design Drawings.
c)
Length: 100mm less than stair width indicated on the Design Drawings.***
8.
Cork Joint Filler: Preformed strips in accordance with ASTM D1752, Type II.
9.
Cleaner: Stone cleaner specifically formulated for stone types, finishes and applications
indicated, as recommended by stone producer and, if a sealer is specified, by the sealer
manufacturer. Do not use cleaning compounds containing acids, caustics, harsh fillers or
abrasives.
10. Floor Sealer: Colorless, slip- and stain-resistant sealer that does not affect color or physical
properties of stone surfaces as recommended by stone producer for application indicated.
K.
Stone Flooring Mortar and Grout Mixes

1.
Mortar: In accordance with referenced standards and with the manufacturers' written instructions
for mix proportions, mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time and other
procedures needed to produce mortar of uniform quality and with optimum performance
characteristics.

29/07/2013
093033 / 7
AECOM Middle East

Stone Tiling
Avenue - Phase 2
Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders,

water repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise
indicated. Do not use calcium chloride.
b)
Combine mortar materials and thoroughly mix in a mechanical batch mixer unless otherwise
indicated. Discard mortar when it has reached initial set.
c)
Mixing Pointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix cementitious and aggregate materials together
before adding any water. Add only enough water to produce a damp, unworkable mix that
will retain its form when pressed into a ball. Maintain mortar in this dampened condition for 1
to 2 hours. Add remaining water in small portions until mortar reaches desired consistency.
Use mortar within 30 minutes of final mixing; do not retemper or use partially hardened
material.
2.
Portland Cement Lime Setting Mortar: In accordance with ASTM C270, proportion specification,
Type N for interior applications and Type S for exterior applications. Use amount of water to
produce a stiff mixture with a moist surface when bed is ready to receive stone.
3.
Mortar Bed Bond Coat: Mix neat cement and water to a creamy consistency.
4.
Cement Paste Bond Coat: Mix either neat cement or cement and sand with water to a
consistency similar to that of thick cream.
5.
Pointing Mortar: In accordance with requirements indicated above for setting mortar, including
type and the following:
6.
L.
a)
a)
Packaged Portland Cement Lime Mix Mortar: Use Portland cement lime mix of selected
color.
b)
Pigmented Pointing Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to
produce color required. Do not exceed pigment-to-cement ratio of 1:10 by weight.
c)
Colored Aggregate Pointing Mortar: Produce color required by combining colored

aggregates with Portland cement of selected color.
Joint Grout: In accordance with mixing requirements in referenced ANSI standards and with
Stone Facing Setting Materials

1.
Molding Plaster: In accordance with ASTM C59/ C59M.
2.
Portland Cement: In accordance with ASTM C150, Type I or II.

a)
4.
Aggregate: In accordance with ASTM C144.
5.
Water: Potable.
6.
Adhesives, General: Use only adhesives formulated for stone and ceramic tile and
recommended by their manufacturer for the application indicated.
7.
Organic Adhesive: In accordance with ANSI A136.1, Type I.
8.
Water-Cleanable Epoxy Adhesive: In accordance with ANSI A118.3.
9.
Stone Adhesive: 2-part, either epoxy resin or polyester resin stone adhesive with an initial set
time of not more than 2 hours at 21C.
a)
M.
Color: Clear.
Stone Facing Grout Materials

1.
Grout Colors: As selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer's full range.
2.
Sand Portland Cement Grout: In accordance with ANSI A108.10, composed of white or gray
cement and white or colored aggregate as required to produce required color.
3.
Standard Sanded Cement Grout: In accordance with ANSI A118.6.
4.
Standard Unsanded Cement Grout: In accordance with ANSI A118.6.
5.
6.
N.
3.
a)
Polymer Type: Either ethylene vinyl acetate, in dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with
other dry ingredients, or acrylic resin or styrene butadiene rubber in liquid-latex form for
addition to prepackaged dry grout mix.
b)
Grout Type: Either Sanded or Unsanded.
Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: In accordance

water-cleanable, tile-setting and -grouting epoxy.
with
ANSI
A118.3,
chemical-resistant,
Stone Facing Pointing Mortar Materials

1.
Portland Cement: In accordance with ASTM C150, Type I or II. Provide natural color or white
cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.
a)
2.

29/07/2013
093033 / 8
AECOM Middle East

Stone Tiling
Avenue - Phase 2
O.
3.
Portland Cement Lime Mix: Packaged blend of Portland cement in accordance with ASTM C150,
Type I or III, and hydrated lime in accordance with ASTM C207, Type S.
4.
Colored Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of Portland cement in accordance with
ASTM C150, Type I or Type III; hydrated lime in accordance with ASTM C207, Type S; and
mortar pigments. Use a mix of formulation required to produce color indicated or, if not indicated,
as selected from manufacturer's standard formulations. Pigments shall not exceed 10% of
Portland cement by weight.
5.
Aggregate: In accordance with ASTM C144, except with 100% passing 1.18mm sieve.
b)
Colored Aggregates: Natural-colored sand or ground marble, granite or other durable stone
of color necessary to produce required mortar color.
Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use
only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in mortar and containing no carbon
black.
7.
Water: Potable.
Stone Facing Sealant Materials
2.
Joint Sealants: Manufacturer's standard sealants of characteristics indicated below that In

accordance with applicable requirements in Section 079200 Joint Sealants and shall not stain the
stone they are applied to.
a)
Single component, mildew-resistant, neutral-curing silicone sealant.
b)
Single component, non-sag urethane sealant.
c)
Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in stone adjoining
sealed joints, unless otherwise indicated.
Sealant for Filling Kerfs: Same sealant used for joints in dimension stone.
a)
Single component, non-sag, urethane sealant; Class 25, Use T (traffic) and Use M
(masonry).
b)
***Single component, non-sag, neutral-curing, medium to high modulus, silicone sealant;

Class 25, Use NT (nontraffic) and Use M (masonry).***
Stone Facing Mixes

1.
Spotting Plaster: Stiff mix of molding plaster and water.
2.
Mortar: In accordance with referenced standards and with the manufacturers' written instructions
for mix proportions, mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time and other
procedures needed to produce mortar of uniform quality and with optimum performance
characteristics.
3.
4.
5.
Q.
White Aggregates: Natural white sand or ground white stone.
6.
1.
P.
a)
a)
Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders,

water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise
indicated. Do not use calcium chloride.
b)
Combine and thoroughly mix cementitious materials, water and aggregates in a mechanical
batch mixer, unless otherwise indicated. Discard mortar when it has reached initial set.
Setting Mortar: In accordance with ASTM C270, proportion specification.

a)
Type: Provide either Type N or Type O.
b)
Mix Proportions: 1 part Portland cement and 2- to 4 parts lime with aggregate ratio of 2-
to 3 times volume of cement and lime.
Pointing Mortar: In accordance with ASTM C270, proportion specification, for types of mortar
indicated.Provide pointing mortar mixed to match the Engineer's sample and complying with the
following:
a)
Packaged Portland Cement Lime Mix Mortar: Use Portland cement lime mix of selected
color.
b)
Pigmented Pointing Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to
produce color required. Do not exceed pigment-to-cement ratio of 1:10 by weight.
c)
Colored-Aggregate Pointing Mortar: Produce color required by combining colored

aggregates with Portland cement of selected color.
d)
Type: Either Type N or Type O.
e)
Mix Proportions: 1 part Portland cement and 2 to 4 parts lime with aggregate ratio of 2 to
3 times volume of cement and lime.
Grout: In accordance with mixing requirements of referenced ANSI standards and with
Stone Facing Stone Anchors and Attachments

1.
Fabricate anchors from stainless steel, in accordance with ASTM A240/ A240M, Type 304.
a)
Fasteners for Stainless Steel Anchors: Annealed stainless steel bolts, nuts and washers; in
accordance with ASTM F738M for bolts and ASTM F836M for nuts, Alloy Group A1.

29/07/2013
093033 / 9
AECOM Middle East

Stone Tiling
Avenue - Phase 2
2.
Fabricate dowels from stainless steel, in accordance with ASTM A276, Type 304.
3.
Fabricate anchors from extruded aluminum, in accordance with ASTM B221M, alloy and temper
as required to support loads imposed without exceeding allowable design stresses, but not less
than strength and durability properties of Alloy 6063-T6.
a)
4.
Anchor Support Grids: Roll formed steel channels, of size and shape required for application
indicated, formed from galvanized steel sheet not less than 2.8mm thick and in accordance with
ASTM A653/ A653M, Z275.
a)
R.
2.4
Fasteners for Extruded Aluminum Anchors: Annealed stainless steel bolts, nuts and
washers in accordance with ASTM F738M for bolts and ASTM F836M for nuts, Alloy Group
A1.
Fittings and Fasteners: System manufacturer's standard components of design, size and
material required to securely attach grids to building structure and stone anchors to grids.
Fabricate components in contact with stone from same material specified for anchors.
5.
Wire Tiebacks: Provide No. 9 AWG copper or copper alloy wire or minimum 3.0mm diameter,
stainless steel wire where staining is a concern.
6.
Dovetail Slots: Furnish dovetail slots with filler strips of slot size required to receive anchors
provided, fabricated from galvanized steel sheet in accordance with ASTM A653/ A653M, Z275.
7.
Direct Mount Anchoring Systems: Stainless steel or aluminum stone anchors designed to be
applied directly to wall surfaces or to metal grids. System is secured to wall framing, furring or
sheet metal reinforcing strips built into wall with stainless steel self-drilling screws. Anchors fit
into kerfs or holes in edges of interior stone facing panels and do not need setting spots.
Stone Facing Stone Accessories

1.
Temporary Setting Shims: Rigid plastic shims, non-staining to stone, sized to suit joint thickness.
2.
Setting Shims for Direct Mount Anchoring Systems: Strips of resilient plastic or neoprene,
nonstaining to stone, of thickness needed to prevent point loading of stone on anchors and of
depths to suit anchors without intruding into required depths of pointing materials.
3.
Cleaner: Stone cleaner specifically formulated for stone types, finishes and applications
indicated, as recommended by stone producer. Do not use cleaning compounds containing
acids, caustics, harsh fillers, or abrasives.
4.
Stone Sealer: Colorless, stain-resistant sealer that does not affect color or physical properties of
stone surfaces, as recommended by stone producer for application indicated.

A.
The testing regime shall be agreed between the Engineer and the Contractor with regard to the
specific project conditions.
B.
Appointment of Testing Laboratory

1.
C.
Natural Stone Testing Regime

1.
D.
E.
For the purpose of testing, a qualified geologist/ stone consultant shall be appointed for the
whole cycle of testing required. The qualified geologist/ stone consultant shall certify that the
samples tested are from the same block(s) selected for the Project and continuing custody of
samples together with marking of blocks shall be deemed essential. Deliver all samples to the
testing laboratory, including the completion of all customs formalities, if appropriate, and the
payment of all levies or duties.
Selection:
a)
Quarry Assessment: Quarry evaluation, poured-in-place material variability and

characteristics, production facility inspection and quality system assessment shall be carried
out by an independent qualified geologist/ stone consultant experienced in the use of
natural stone for exterior and internal flooring.
b)
Representative approval testing blocks (3 No.) shall be selected by a qualified geologist/

stone consultant working for an independent accredited testing laboratory. Testing shall be
performed at an independent accredited testing laboratory. The material selected for testing
shall match the agreed project reference control samples.
c)
The testing laboratory or supplier shall be engaged to select testing samples at the quarry.
Quarrying Supervision
1.
Quarrying shall be supervised and coordinated by the stone fabricator to ensure that the
as-quarried block orientations will yield finished material with characteristics as specified herein.
2.
All stone shall be cut from matched blocks with a uniform background color. Matched blocks shall
mean blocks extracted from a single bed of stratum in the quarry. The use of blocks chosen at
random, although similar in general character and color to that of the accepted stone shall not be
permitted except by written permission of the Engineer. Provide mock-ups, prototypes, quality
benchmark installations, testing and inspections in accordance with Division 01 General
Requirements Section 014000 Quality Requirements.
Preliminary Testing
1.
Test certificates and reports shall be presented in their entirety and are to include all individual
and mean values obtained.

29/07/2013
093033 / 10
AECOM Middle East

Stone Tiling
Avenue - Phase 2
F.
Production Quality Control Testing

1.
2.
General:
a)
Once production of stone for the Project commences the stone shall be tested at an
independent test laboratory acceptable to the Engineer to demonstrate compliance with the
Specification.
b)
Unless otherwise agreed, all test samples for the production testing shall be selected by an
independent qualified geologist/ stone consultant.
Visual Inspection:
a)
The rough edge of each block shall be sawn off exposing a fresh face. The face shall be
visually inspected by an independent qualified geologist/ stone consultant for any visible
defects, changes in structure or texture, and general conformance to the aesthetic criteria
defined by the Engineer and illustrated in agreed Project reference samples.
b)
Where testing is to be performed on a block, a slab shall be sawn from the block in the
appropriate bedding orientation. From the slab a columnar sample shall be taken sufficient
to prepare all of the proposed tests in the Project bedding orientation.
c)
The Engineer shall inspect initial finished units at the Contractor's factory and establish
acceptable visual standards for future reference in inspecting balance of work.
d)
Accepted units shall be given an identification mark by the Engineer. These units are to be
retained until final units have been fabricated, inspected and accepted.
G.
Impact Testing: Impact tests shall be carried out to establish the soundness of all screeded
substrates.
H.
Sealant Testing
1.
Staining: Perform test on each type of tiling in contact with sealant(s).
2.
Adhesion: Test elastomeric sealants for peel strength.
I.
Grout Staining: Evaluate the risk of staining, as recommended by the manufacturer. Seek advice of
specialist/ manufacturer if discoloration occurs on trial areas.
J.
Slip Resistance Testing

1.
Testing shall be performed at an independent laboratory accredited to perform the specified test
methods.
2.
Samples shall be tested at the following stages of the Project:

a)
Approval.
b)
Production.
c)
Post-installation (poured-in-place).
3.
Submit test results to the Engineer for acceptance in due time, prior to each of the Project stages
or as agreed with the Engineer.
4.
Test samples must include any surface sealer or treatment to be applied to the finished surface.
End of Section

29/07/2013
093033 / 11
AECOM Middle East

Stone Tiling
Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 099100 PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1
1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
PRODUCT SELECTION
MATERIALS
FINISHES

29/07/2013
1
2
2
2
3
099100
AECOM Middle East

Painting
Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 099100 PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.

1.
Supply, deliver, install and warrant the works in strict compliance with the materials and
2.
safe installation.
3.
Section includes
1.
1.2
Surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior and exterior substrates.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.
B.
Mock-ups
1.
C.
Provide mock-ups for each type of paints, to cover areas of size adequate to demonstrate all
materials and workmanship, and to Engineer's acceptance.

1.
Engineer.
2.
responsibilities regarding the durability or service life requirements, etc.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION
A.
General
1.
B.
Source of Supply:
a)
Obtain products from manufacturers with at least 10 years' experience of producing similar
items. Use products for each item of work of the same type and from the same
manufacturer. Obtain products visible in the final work from the same production run.
b)
Coating materials shall be obtained from one source and the Engineer shall be notified of
the selected manufacturer before the work commences.
2.
MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in
its "MPI Approved Products List".
3.
Material Compatibility:
a)
Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and
substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and site experience.
b)
For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers
of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
4.
VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
5.
Humidity: Use materials with mold-inhibiting additives or bactericides in areas subject to mildew
or other fungi.
6.
Colors: Paint colors shall be selected from the full spectrum of a manufacturer's pre-formulated
pigment range. Final colors shall be taken from accepted Samples.
Type PT-101 Emulsion Paint

1.
Manufacturer: Jotun paints or acceptable equivalent.
2.
Product Reference: Fenomastic Matt - Acrylic Co-polymer highly washable matt emulsion finish.
3.
Substrate: Smooth render / Gypsum board / Plaster board and other locations as indicated on
the Finishes Schedule.
4.
Preparation: In accordance with the paint manufacturer's recommendations.
5.
6.
Initial Coat (s): One coat PVA Primer , a pva co-polymer based primer/ sealer, vol. solids > 14%
as per ISO 3233 : 1998.

29/07/2013
099100 / 1
AECOM Middle East

Painting
Avenue - Phase 2
C.
D.
7.
Intermediate Coat (s): Two coats stucco, a pva co-polymer based putty, vol. solids 50% as per
ISO 3233 : 1998 (E).
8.
Finishing Coat (s): Two full coats Fenomastic Matt, an acrylic co-polymer based highly washable
emulsion in matt finish, vol. solids 35 2% as per ISO 3233: 1998 (E) (Colour to Architects
approval .
9.
Application: Roller, brush or spray.
Type PT-102 Emulsion Paint for wet areas

1.
Manufacturer: Jotun paints or acceptable equivalent.
2.
Product Reference: Fenomastic Gold - Pure Acrylic anti-fungal highly washable matt emulsion
finish.
3.
Substrate: Smooth render / Gypsum board / Plaster board and other locations as indicated on
the Finishes Schedule.
4.
5.
6.
Initial Coat (s): One coat Fenomastic alkali resistant primer, vol. solids > 23% as per ISO 3233 :
1998 (E).
7.
Intermediate Coat (s): Two coats stucco, a pva co-polymer based putty, vol. solids 50% as per
ISO 3233 : 1998 (E).
8.
Finishing Coat (s): Two full coats Fenomastic Gold, highly washable emulsion in silk finish, vol.
solids 35 2% as per ISO
3233: 1998 (E).
9.
Type PT-103 Protective Coating

1.
Manufacturer: Flowcrete Middle East FZCO or acceptable equivalent.
2.
Product Reference: Deckshield Concrecoat or acceptable equivalent.
3.
Substrate: Concrete surfaces at car park walls, columns, ceiling and other locations as indicated
on the Finishes Schedule.
4.
5.
6.
Initial Coat (s): Diluted 1part Concrecoat 1 part with cold drinking water at 6m2/ litre.
7.
Finishing Coat (s): Two coats Concrecoat.

a)
8.
E.
Type PT-104 Car Park Floor Coating.

1.
Manufacturer: Flowcrete Middle East FZCO or acceptable equivalent.
2.
Product reference: Deckshield ED.
3.
Substrate: Concrete surfaces.
4.
5.
6.
Primer: Deckshield EP.
7.
Resin flooring: System components.

a)
8.
F.
Thickness: 2mm.
Surface finish: Deckshield UV Top Coat.
Type PT-105 Varnish.

1.
2.2
Film Thickness: 100 - 150 microns.
Description: Marine grade spar varnish, clear.
A.
2.3
Serviceability: The work shall retain its appearance and performance between maintenance periods
without excessive fading, excessive non-uniformity of color or shade, lack of adhesion, cracking,
peeling, pitting or other defects.
MATERIALS
A.
2.4
All materials used shall be as recommended for the intended application and a warranty shall be
provided from the manufacturer for the particular surface and the conditions of exposure. They shall
be compatible with each other.
FINISHES
A.
All surface finishes shall be dry to handle.
B.
There shall be no variation of final surface finish.

29/07/2013
099100 / 2
AECOM Middle East

Painting
Avenue - Phase 2
C.
2.5
All paints shall be anti-mold and stable in humid conditions and suitable to hot climate exposure.
A.
Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedures.
1.
Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials.
Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint
materials have already been delivered to Site, samples may be taken at Site. Samples will be
identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.
2.
Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.
3.
Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show materials being used
do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove non-complying paint materials
from Site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be
required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with
complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.
End of Section

29/07/2013
099100 / 3
AECOM Middle East

Painting
Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 107316 CANOPIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1
1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
PRODUCT SELECTION
MATERIALS

29/07/2013
1
2
4
107316
AECOM Middle East

Canopies
Avenue - Phase 2
SECTION 107316 CANOPIES

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2

1.
2.
3.
4.
manufacture.
5.
Section Includes
1.
Pergolas.
2.
Fabric Awnings.
Design Drawings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
1.
A specialist with at least 5 years' successful experience in performing similar work or operates a
similar quality system acceptable to the Engineer.
2.
3.
Applicators of chemical preservatives or fire retardant treatments shall be licensed by the product
manufacturer.
Mock-ups
1.
Provide full size mock-ups representing the design solutions, erected on Site but not to be
incorporated into the work, for inspection by the Engineer. The mock-up shall represent a true
and accurate sample of the construction proposed for the work and all requirements of the
Specification shall apply.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION
A.
Source of Supply: Obtain canopies from single source from single manufacturer.
B.
Type CAN-102 Timber Pergola
C.
D.
1.
Manufacturers: Locally available manufacturers who can supply products in compliance with
requirements specified herein.
2.
Description: Timber pergolas supported on timber framework as indicated on the Design

Drawings.
3.
Configuration and Size: Refer to the Design Drawings.
4.
Timber Species: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
5.
Finish: Stained and painted/ marine grade spar varnish.
Type CAN-103 Steel Frame Pergola

1.
Manufacturers: Locally available manufacturers who can supply products in compliance with
requirements specified herein.
2.
Description: Steel framed pergolas with aluminum cladding as indicated on the Design Drawings.
3.
4.
Finish and Colour: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
Type CAN-104 Fabric Awnings

1.
Manufacturer: Ferriri Architecture or acceptable equivalent.
2.
Description: Single layer fabric covering system. Retractable, set within facade, with provision for
signage printing.
3.
4.
Fabric:

29/07/2013
107316 / 1
AECOM Middle East

Canopies
Avenue - Phase 2
E.
F.
G.
2.2
a)
Warp and Weft: 85/ 82lbs.
b)
Strength: Tensile dry strength to BS EN ISO 1421.
c)
Coating and Colour: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
d)
Fire Resitance: : To BS 476-6, Class 0.
5.
Roller and Arms: Stainless steel grade 316L.
6.
Fixing: Marine grade stainless steel.
Type CAN-105 Motorised Awnings

1.
Manufacturer: Ferriri Architecture or acceptable equivalent.
2.
Description: Single layer fabric covering system. motorised, set within facade, with provision for
signage printing.
3.
4.
Fabric:
a)
Warp and Weft: 85/ 82lbs.
b)
Strength: Tensile dry strength to BS EN ISO 1421.
c)
Coating and Colour: To be confirmed by the Engineer.
d)
Fire Resitance: : To BS 476-6, Class 0.
5.
Roller and Arms: Stainless steel grade 316L.
6.
Fixing: Marine grade stainless steel.
Type CAN-106 Aluminium Butterfly Shading

1.
Manufacturer: Arabian Profiles Co. Ltd. of acceptable equivalent.
2.
Description: Custon patterned perforated aluminium Butterfly Shading.
3.
4.
Colour: Copper.
Type CAN-107 Polished Stainless Steel Canopy

1.
Manufacturer: Al Abbar or acceptable equivalent.
2.
Description: Stainless steel canopy with necessary farme and fixing system.
3.
Material: Marine grade stainless steel grade 316L for all components.
4.
Finish: Polished mirror finish.
5.
Colour: Natural.
A.
Specific Movements: Refer to the Structural Movements and Tolerances Report or the Structural
Engineer's specification and drawings as applicable and as prepared by the Structural Engineer.
B.
Deflections
C.
D.
E.
1.
2.
All components, couplings and fastenings shall be capable of accommodating all deflection
without permanent distortion, deformation or failure.
3.
the work or their support structure.
Design Loads
1.
The system shall be designed to withstand all dead loads and imposed loads without affecting
the system's ability to meet the specified performance requirements.
2.
When calculating design loads the worst combination shall be considered, taking account of the
fact that the pressure coefficients at various locations may determine more than one design
criterion.
3.
Self-weight Gravity Loads: The work shall be capable of accommodating the self-weight of the
system including all of its framing and supporting system.
4.
The system shall be designed so that failure of any one local element (e.g. bolt, anchor, of
fastening component) will not result in progressive failure of the system.
Imposed Gravity Loads

1.
The work shall be capable of accommodating loads imposed by adjacent and/ or attached
elements that bear onto, are suspended from or fastened to the system.
2.
Refer to the Design Drawings for information on such elements and/ or required load capacities.
No elements from other trades shall be fastened to and/ or supported by the curtain wall, unless
accurately specified, indicated on the Design Drawings and/ or agreed by the Engineer.
Live Loads

29/07/2013
107316 / 2
AECOM Middle East

Canopies
Avenue - Phase 2
1.
The work shall be capable of accommodating the following live loads without any reduction in
performance:
a)
All loads resulting from movements of the building structure.
b)
Loads acting on the surface of framing members and fabric arising from routine
maintenance and cleaning operations.
c)
Known impact loads, or transferred impact loads, that occur during its service life, without
deterioration in performance and without sustaining non-repairable damage.
d)
Sand loads in accordance with the Structural Engineer's specification.
e)
Wind loads.
2.
Additionally, the design shall consider asymmetric wind loading on the fabric canopies where this
could induce high torsional forces and deflections. Calculations and structural analysis shall
clearly address and demonstrate adequacy of the design under this loading condition.
3.
Fatigue: The design shall take into account fatigue associated with all framing, fastenings and
supports as well as fabric fatigue.
F.
Imposed Movements: The work shall be capable of accommodating loads imposed upon the system
by defined movements of its supporting structure and/ or other adjacent elements.
G.
Wind/ Air Pressure Loads
H.
I.
1.
The system shall withstand the effects of positive and negative wind loads.
2.
The loads created by wind loading as specified shall be accommodated safely, without detriment
to the overall design, structural integrity and performance of the work.
Thermal Movements
1.
All components shall be designed to resist thermal movement resulting from the maximum and
minimum surface temperatures occurring. The design shall cater for all temporary and
permanent conditions envisaged for the work.
2.
The service temperature range for components of the work shall be taken as -25C and +90C.
3.
The work, including all necessary support structure, shall be designed to accommodate changes
in dimension and shape of its components resulting from changes in temperatures without any
4.
The annual surface temperature ranges for the materials used in the work shall be confirmed
during the Detailed Design period. Due regard shall be made to the effects of orientation of the
building towards the sun.
5.
The Detailed Design and construction of the fabric canopies shall be such that all rigid or
fastened joints shall remain rigid and accommodate all thermal, building structure or other
movements, and any applicable loads without compromising the integrity of the system.
6.
The above thermal movements shall be easily accommodated without buckling, failure, under
stress, damage to fastenings, reduction in performance or any other detrimental effects. The
engineering computation submitted by the Contractor shall clearly identify thermal movements
and demonstrate adequate accommodation of such movements within the system components.
7.
Calculations
1.
J.
The Contractor shall be required to retain the services of an approved chartered structural
engineer for the purpose of preparing full and detailed computations. Computations shall be
submitted for all members and fastenings included. Computations shall include:
a)
Table of contents.
b)
Basic data.
c)
Narrative on structural principles, philosophy and assumptions.
d)
Summary of deflection and stresses.
e)
Summary of joint movements.
f)
Summary of fastening loads and loading pattern on building structure.
g)
Summary of fastening analysis.
2.
Acceptance of Shop Drawings and computation submitted shall in no way relieve the Contractor
of the necessity of compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
3.
Test reports from a recognized laboratory may be acceptable in lieu of calculations for some
components, e.g. inserts and some screw capacities.
Solar Performance
1.
Exposure to sunlight during the lifetime of the work shall not reduce the performance or visual
appearance of any element/ component.
2.
confirming compliance with the Specification. Maintain facilities to evaluate and report on
expected solar performance under varying conditions of solar radiation and external/ internal air
velocity.

29/07/2013
107316 / 3
AECOM Middle East

Canopies
Avenue - Phase 2
K.
2.3
Fabric Performance Characteristics

1.
Mildew Resistance: Showing no growth when tested in accordance with ASTM G 21.
2.
Shrinkage: Not greater than 1% in accordance with ASTM D 1204.
3.
Stretch Factor: Not less than 4% in accordance with ASTM D 4851.
MATERIALS
A.
B.
Materials General
1.
All materials and components shall be new and shall be suited for the purpose for which they are
to be used. Fabric shall be of first class quality, suitable for the purpose specified, and shall
comply with appropriate National Standards, where such exist, unless otherwise specified.
2.
Materials shall be supplied in accordance with relevant standards and test certificates provided
accordingly.
3.
The fabrics shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the work.
4.
Color and appearance: Color to be selected from the standard range, by the Engineer. The color
and translucency of the coated fabric shall be as specified and consistent throughout the
structure. The coating shall have been applied so as to achieve a surface with no discontinuities,
discolorations, spots or lumps which would be objectionable in appearance to the unaided eye
from a distance of 3m, held 1m away from a white wall in daylight. This includes any tears or
patches to repair tears, whether carried out in the work or on Site. The coating shall not discolor
because of UV degradation, plasticizer migration, mold growth or other internal changes within
the guarantee period.
5.
Site joints to be used only where indicated on the Shop Drawings, unless agreed otherwise with
the Engineer. Aluminum clamps, where used, shall be to grade 6082 TF or acceptable
equivalent. Ensure compatibility of fabric with all elements of the assembly.
6.
Fabric clamp metalwork corners in contact with the fabric shall have a 2mm radius.
Wood
1.
No damaged, rotten or discolored materials shall be used.
2.
Materials shall be relatively knot free, free from distortion, cracks or other blemishes.
3.
All wood shall be selected for its final use of particular importance for dry structural wood.
4.
Moisture content at the time of erection shall not be more than 20%.
C.
Structural Wood: Structural wood work shall be as indicated on the Design Drawings and described in
the Specification, or to the requirements of the Specification.
D.
Stress Grading of Wood
E.
1.
Stress grading of wood shall only be carried out by companies that are currently registered under
a third party quality assurance scheme operated by any of the approved certification bodies.
2.
Wood with a basic thickness of less than 150mm and not specified for wet exposure shall be
stress graded at a moisture content not exceeding 20%, and clearly marked 'Dry' or 'KD'(kiln
dried).
3.
Wood graded WET and specified for wet exposure conditions shall be clearly marked as 'Wet'.
4.
Structural wood members, which are cut from larger graded sections, shall be regraded for
acceptance and then appropriately marked according to the new grade.
Graded Softwood
1.
F.
G.
Softwood shall be graded according to national equivalent and be marked accordingly as follows:
a)
Species and origin shall be as proposed by the supplier to the acceptance of the Engineer.
b)
Strength class shall be suitable for applications.
Steel Frames
1.
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: In accordance with ASTM A 36/ A 36M.
2.
Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: In accordance with ASTM A 500/ A 500M, grade as required by
structural loads.
3.
Steel Pipe: In accordance with ASTM A 53/ A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless
another weight is indicated or required by structural loads.
4.
Steel Mechanical Tubing: Cold-rolled, electric-resistance-welded carbon or alloy steel tubing in

accordance with ASTM A 513 or steel tubing fabricated from steel complying with ASTM A 1011/
A 1011M and complying with dimensional tolerances in ASTM A 500/ A 500M.
Anchors, Fasteners, Fittings, Hardware, and Installation Accessories: Complying with performance
requirements indicated and suitable for exposure conditions, supporting structure, anchoring
substrates, and installation methods indicated. Corrosion-resistant or non-corrodible units;
weather-resistant, tamperproof, vandal and theft-resistant, compatible, non-staining materials.
Provide as required for canopy assembly, mounting, and secure attachment. Number as needed to
comply with performance requirements and to maintain uniform appearance; evenly spaced. Where
exposed to view, provide finish and color as selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
1.
Wood Screws: In accordance with ASME B18.6.1.

29/07/2013
107316 / 4
AECOM Middle East

Canopies
Avenue - Phase 2
2.
Lag Bolts: In accordance with ASME B18.2.1 / ASME B18.2.3.8M.
3.
Bolts: Steel bolts in accordance with ASTM A 307, Grade A ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6;
with ASTM A 563/ A 563M hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.
4.
Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability
to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit
masonry assemblies and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete as
determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing
and inspecting agency.
a)
5.
Adhesive-Bonded Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in
unit masonry assemblies and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete as
determined by testing according to ASTM E 1512 conducted by a qualified independent testing
and inspecting agency.
a)
6.
Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts in accordance with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F
594, Alloy Group 1 or Alloy Group 2 ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Grade A1 or Grade
A4.
Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts in accordance with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F
594, Alloy Group 1 or Alloy Group 2 ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Grade A1 or Grade
A4.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 316 stainless steel fasteners.
H.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying
with SSPC-Paint 20.
I.
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion in accordance with ASTM D 1187.
J.
Steelwork and Cable Work

1.
2.
Bolting:
a)
All bolts, nuts and washers shall be spun, galvanized or sherardized.
b)
Nuts subject to vibration shall be fitted with a plastic insert to prevent loosening.
c)
Bolted joints shall be assembled on Site using drifts for alignment only.
d)
Holes shall not distort or become enlarged when using drifts. Drifts of larger diameter than
the holes shall not be used.
e)
The length of the bolts shall be such that no threaded portion shall be within the thickness of
the parts to be jointed together, and there shall be not more than 6mm of thread left beyond
the nut, nor less than one whole thread.
Pinned Connections:
a)
Pins in solid clevis type connections shall have a retaining system capable of resisting 5%
of the load on the pin.
b)
Pins in link plate type connections shall be long enough to allow some transverse
movement of the plates, i.e. the extra clearance should be 25% of the pin diameter. The pin
retaining system shall be capable of taking 15% of the load on the pin.
End of Section

29/07/2013
107316 / 5
AECOM Middle East

Canopies
APPENDIX A TECHNICAL REFERENCE SHEET
Technical Reference Sheet (TRS) T-SHEET

Avenue - Phase 2
Commentary
The following notations identify proposed project specific systems/components as referenced within the Specification and as indicated on
the Design Drawings.
AM-100 Series
AM-101
AM-102
AM-103
AM-500 Series
AM-501
AM-600 Series
AM-601
AM-602
AM-603
ACS03
ACS04a
ACS05
ACS01
BAL-100 Series
BAL-101
BAL-102
BAL-103
BAL01
BAL02
BAL03
BRK-100
BRK-101
COM13
BLK-300 Series
BLK-301
COM07
CAN - 100 Series

CAN-102
ROF08
CAN-103
ROF09
CAN-104
ROF06
CAN-105
CAN-106
CAN-107
DRS-100 Series
DRS-101
DRS-102
DRS-103
DRS-200 Series
DRS-201
DRS-202
DRS-300 Series
DRS-301
DRS-302
DRS-303
EWS-100 Series
EWS-101
EWS-103
EWS-104
EWS-105
EWS-300 Series
EWS-301
EWS-302
EWS-303
EWS-304
EWS-305
EWS-306
EWS-307
EWS-309
DOR04
DOR06
DOR02
DOR05
GL02
GL01
GL04
GL06
ME01
ME03
ME04
ME05
ME06
ME07
ME08
ME10
ARCHITECTURAL METALWORK
METAL COPINGS/ TRIMS
Aluminium Flashing
Aluminium Skirting Profile
Aluminium "C" Channel Caping Profile
INDEPENDENT METAL FAADE FEATURES
Cold Formed Metal Accessories
STEEL FRAMED STRUCTURES
Diagrid Steel - Open
Diagrid Steel - Glazed
Caternary Mesh Cable
BALUSTRADES/ HANDRAILS/GUARDRAILS
BESPOKE/PURPOSE MADE SYSTEMS
Laminated Glass Balustrade
Stainless Steel Balustrade
Galvanized Steel Balustrade
BRICKWORK
FACING BRICK
London Stock Brick Cladding
BLOCKWORK
COMMON BLOCKWORK
Common Blockwork
CANOPIES
CANOPIES - GLAZED
Timber Pergola
Steel Frame Pergola
Fabric Awning
Motorised Awning
Aluminium Butterfly Shading
Polished Stainless Steel canopy
DOORS
WOOD DOORS
Carved Wood Doors
Stile and Rail Wood Doors
Bifolding Wood Doors
METAL DOORS
Metal Door
Stainless Steel Door
GLAZED DOORS
Framed Glazed Swing Door
Sliding Folding Glazed Door
Internal Door and Shop Front Glazing
EXTERNAL WALL SYSTEMS
CURTAIN WALLING SYSTEMS
Glazed Curtain Wall - Stick System
Glazed Curtain Wall - Frameless System
Curtain Wall Structural Glass
Curtain Wall Planar Glass
CLADDING - COMPOSITE PANEL SYSTEMS
Aluminium Shingle Cladding
Aluminium Panel Cladding
Coper Panel Cladding
Corten Steel Panel Cladding

29/07/2013
Work Package
Description
Design Responsibility
REF
Section (CSI 2004)
Design Responsibility:
D = Descriptive (Contractor Designed)
P = Prescriptive (Architect Designed)
055000
055000
055000
P
P
P
055000
055000
055000
055000
P
P
P
055200
055200
055200
P
P
P
042113
042000
107316
107316
107316
107316
107316
107316
D
D
D
D
D
D
081416
081416
081416
P
P
P
081100
081100
P
P
083200
083200
083200
P
P
P
084413
084413
084413
084413
D
D
D
D
074213
074213
074213
074213
074213
074213
074213
074213
PS
PS
PS
PS
PS
PS
PS
PS
AECOM Middle East
EWS-400 Series
EWS-410
EWS-414
EWS-417
EWS-418
EWS-419
EWS-420
EWS-424
EWS-425
EWS-426
EWS-600 Series
EWS-601
EWS-602
EWS-603
EWS-700 Series
EWS-701
EWS-704
EWS-706
EWS-800 Series
EWS-801
EWS-803
EWS-804
FL-200 series
FL-201
FL-900 Series
FL-901
FL-902
GL-100 Series
GL-101
GL-102
GL-103
GL-104
GL-105
GL-106
GL-107
GL-108
COM01j
COM01n
COM09
COM10
COM11
COM12
ST01
ST02
ST03
REN01
REN01a
REN01f
LVR01
ME02a
ME14
GL07
REN01e
ME16
ACS06
GL09
GL10
GL11
GL12
INS-500 Series
DMP05
DMP06
DMP07a
DMP07b
IRN-100 Series
IRN-101
IRN-102
DOR07
DOR09
IWS-800 Series
IWS-801
DOR01
PT-100 Series
PT-101
PT-102
PT-103
PT-104
PT-105
RFS-200 Series
RFS-201
RFS-400 Series
RFS-401
RFS-600 Series
RFS-601
REN02
REN03
REN04
DMP03
ROF13
ST05
CLADDING - BUILT-UP FRONT WEATHERED SYSTEMS

Glass-Fiber Reinforced Concrete Rainscreen Panel System
Glass-Fiber Reinforced Concrete Rainscreen Panel System
Standard Panel Cladding
Architectural Concrete Panel Cladding
Natural Stone Cladding - Lime Stone
Natural Stone Cladding - Granite
Natural Stone Cladding - Basalt
CLADDING - EXTERNAL RENDER SYSTEMS
Exterior Insulation Finish System (EIFS)
Exterior Insulation Finish System (EIFS) with Granitex Finish
Exterior Insulation Finish System (EIFS) with Brick Slip Finish
CLADDING - LOUVRE/ BRISE SOLEIL/ SCREEN SYSTEMS
Architectural Louvres
Picture Perforated Aluminium Panel Cladding
Terracotta Fins
CLADDING - SPECIAL/ FEATURE SYSTEMS
U-profile Glazing
Decorative Profiles
Timber Printed Aluminium Cladding
FLOOR FINISHES
NATURAL STONE
Lime Stone Tile
SPECIALIST SYSTEMS/ ACCESSORIES
Stone Threshold
Granite Skirting
GLAZED-IN PANELS
GLAZED PANELS
Screen/ Silk Printed Glass with Bespoke Pattern
Laminated Glass with Decorative Interlayers
Spandrel Glass with Ceramic Frit
Insulating Glass
Laminated Glass with Clear Interlayer
Insulating Glass Unit for Roof
Extra Clear Low Iron Glass
Plastic Glass
INSULATION
POLYSTYRENE (EPS)
External Wall Insulation
Roof Insulation
Floor Loose Lay Insulation
Roof Loose Lay Insulation
HARDWARE
Hardware
Stainless Steel Ironmongery
Brass Ironmongery
INTERNAL WALL SYSTEMS
SPECIAL INTERNAL WALL SYSTEMS
Frameless Glass Doors
PAINT FINISHES
INTERNAL PAINT FINISHES
Emulsion Paint
Emulsion Paint for Wet Areas
Protective Coating
Car Park Floor Coating
Varnish
ROOF FINISH SYSTEMS
WATERPROOF MEMBRANE SYSTEMS
Reinforced Bitumen Membrane Roofing
COMPOSITE SYSTEMS
Insulated Metal Deck Roof
ROOF FINISH ACCESSORIES
Stone Ballast
ROOF LIGHTS

29/07/2013
Work Package
Description
REF
Section (CSI 2004)

Avenue - Phase 2
034900
034900
034500
034500
034500
034500
044200
044200
044200
D
D
D
D
D
D
P
P
P
072400
072400
072400
P
P
P
089000
074213
074200
TBA
084413
072400
074213
P
PS
P
093000
093033
093033
P
P
088000
088000
088000
088000
088000
088000
088000
088000
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
072100
072100
072100
072100
P
P
P
P
087100
087100
P
P
083200
099100
099100
099100
099100
099100
P
P
P
P
P
075400
074113
075400
D
P
PS
AECOM Middle East
RFL-100 Series
RFL-101
SCR-200 Series
SCR-201
SCR-301
SGN-***
SGN-300 Series
SGN-301
ROF07
ME18
PROPRIETARY SYSTEMS
Glazed Aluminium Rooflights
SCREEDS
BONDED SCREEDS
Cement Sand Levelling Screed
Un-Bonded Sand Cement Screed
SIGNAGE
BESPOKE SIGNAGE
Aluminium Removable Signage Panel

29/07/2013
Work Package
Description
REF
Section (CSI 2004)

Avenue - Phase 2
086200
035300
035300
P
P
055000
AECOM Middle East
AECOM Middle East Limited
PO Box 43266, Abu Dhabi

United Arab Emirates
T +971 2 414 6000
F +971 2 414 6001
www.aecom.com
To create, enhance
andcreate,
sustainenhance
the
To
worlds
built,the
natural
and sustain
and social
worlds
built, natural
environments
and social
environments

Aecom Avenue Arch SD 2013.07.29

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Aecom Avenue Arch SD 2013.07.29

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

29 July 2013

Outline Specification - Architecture

100% Schematic Design

Architectural Outline Specification

AECOM Middle East

SECTION 034500 PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE

Architectural Outline Specification

AECOM Middle East

SECTION 034500 PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE

Performance Specified Work

Work Section Includes

Architectural precast concrete cladding with necessay accessories.

Off Site Testing

Architectural Outline Specification

AECOM Middle East

Results and Certificates

Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having

Calculated Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide architectural precast

Type EWS-417, EWS-418, EWS-419, EWS-420 Architectural Concrete Panel Cladding

Manufacturers: Rieder Smart Elements GMBH or acceptable equivalent.

Type EWS-417 Standard Panel Cladding

Description: Fiber reinforced panels in various colours and finishes.

Product Reference: Fiber C or acceptable equivalent.

Type EWS-418 Architectural Concrete Panel Cladding

Description: Bespoke cladding panels with various patterns and finishes.

Product Reference: Fiber C Design+ or or acceptable equivalent.

Type EWS-419 Architectural Concrete Panel Cladding

Description: Concrete panels with 3-dimensional cladding elements with faced

Product Reference: Fiber C 3D facade or acceptable equivalent.

Type EWS-420 Architectural Concrete Panel Cladding

Product Reference: ko Skin or acceptable equivalent.

Architectural Outline Specification

AECOM Middle East

If visible it shall be finished with PVDF, color to the Engineer's acceptance.

Sealant performance shall be verified by provision of current independent test certificates.

Provide panel frames that transfer window loads to building structure.

Structural Performance Requirements

Design Wind Pressures: Refer to the Structural Specification.

Uniform pressure of 957Pa/ 1436Pa, acting inward or outward.

Uniform pressure as indicated on the Design Drawings.

Specific Dead Loads:

Architectural Outline Specification

AECOM Middle East

Specific Live Loads:

A horizontal line load applied to the work, due to the occupants.

Thermal movements shall not result in audible noise.

Provision for the following deflection of building structure:

Environmental Performance Requirements

Caused by the flow of rainwater to the inside of the panels.

Thermal Performance Requirements:

Provide U-value calculations including condensation calculations to justify insulation and

Architectural Outline Specification

AECOM Middle East

Solar Performance Requirements:

Test-Pressure Difference: 75Pa.

Water Leakage: As defined according to AAMA 501.1.

The work shall provide internal sound reduction between floors.

Fire Performance Requirements

Acoustic Performance Requirements

Test-Pressure Difference: 300Pa.

Specific Fire Performance Requirements:

Surface spread of flame: In accordance with UL 723 and ASTM E 84.

Fire and Smoke Stopping: